Service Manual: MVC-CD200/CD300

MVC-CD200/CD300
SERVICE MANUAL US Model

Canadian Model
Level 2 Ver 1.0 2001. 05 AEP Model
UK Model
E Model
Hong Kong Model
Australian Model
Chinese Model
Tourist Model
Korea Model
Photo : MVC-CD300
Japanese Model
This service manual contains information for japanese model as well.
On the SY-67 board and the DDX-G2100 COMPLETE ASSEMBLY (Including the MD-083 Board)
This service manual provides the information on the premised of the circuit board replacement service and not intended
repair inside the SY-67 board in case of trouble. It is also premised that the mechanism deck DDX-G2100 COMPLETE
ASSEMBLY (including the MD-083 board) shall be exchanged as an assembly in case of trouble.
Therefore, disassembling procedure and exploded view of the DDX-G2100 COMPLETE ASSEMBLY are not shown. The
block diagram, printed wiring board, schematic diagram and electrical parts list of the SY-67 board are also not shown.
Note that the following pages are lacking intentionally.
SY-67 board DDX-G2100 COMPLETE ASSEMBLY
Block diagram ............................... Page 3-15 to 3-20 Disassembly ................................. Page 2-15 to 2-16
Printed wiring board ..................... Page 4-19 to 4-22 Exploded view .............................. Page 6-8
Schematic diagram ....................... Page 4-23 to 4-42 MD-083 board
Electrical parts list ........................ Page 6-18 to 6-24 Block diagram ............................ Page 3-21 to 3-26
Printed wiring board ................... Page 4-43 to 4-46
Schematic diagram .................... Page 4-47 to 4-54
Electrical parts list ...................... Page 6-14 to 6-18
The above-described information is shown in service manual Level 3.
SPECIFICATIONS
System Exposure control Drive ACC jack General
Image device Automatic exposure, Shutter Read: Maximum ×8 Mini-minijack (Ø 2.5 mm) Application
MVC-CD200: 6.64 mm speed priority, Aperture Write: ×4 USB jack Sony battery pack NP-FM50
(1/2.7 type) color CCD priority, Manual exposure mini-B (supplied)
Readout
MVC-CD300: 8.93 mm White balance Noncontact optical readout Power requirements
(1/1.8 type) color CCD Automatic, Indoor, Outdoor, LCD screen
(using semiconductor laser) 7.2 V
Lens One-push LCD panel
Laser Power consumption
3× zoom lens Data system TFT (Thin Film Transistor
Wavelength: 777 to 787 nm (During shooting with
MVC-CD200: f = 6.1 – Movie: MPEG1 NA: 0.5 active matrix) drive the LCD backlight
18.3 mm (1/4 – 3/4 inches) Still: JPEG, GIF (in TEXT Maximum output: 23 mW LCD size turned on)
(39 – 117 mm (1 9/16 – mode, Clip Motion), TIFF Emission duration: 600 ns 2.5 type MVC-CD200: 3.0 W
4 5/8 inches) when Audio with still image: Total number of dots MVC-CD300: 3.5 W
converted into a 35 mm still MPEG1 (Monaural) Input and Output 123 200 (560×220) dots Operating temperature
camera) Recording medium connector 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F)
MVC-CD300: f = 7 – 21 mm 8 cm CD-R/CD-RW A/V OUT (MONO)
(9/32 – 27/32 inches) (34 – Recommended flash (Monaural) — Continued on next page —
102 mm (1 3/8 – recording distance (ISO Minijack Video:
4 1/8 inches) when is set to AUTO): 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω, unbalanced,
converted into a 35 mm still
camera)
MVC-CD200: F = 2.8 – 2.9
MVC-CD200: 0.3 m to
2.5 m (11 7/8 inches to
8 1/3 feet)
MVC-CD300: 0.3 m to
sync negative
Audio: 327 mV (at a 47 kΩ
load)
DIGITAL STILL CAMERA
MVC-CD300: F = 2.0 – 2.5 Output impedance: 2.2 kΩ
3 m (11 7/8 inches to 9 feet
10 1/8 inches)
Storage temperature NP-FM50 battery pack Table for difference of functions
–20°C to +60°C (–4°F to Battery type
+140°F) Lithium ion Model MVC-CD200 MVC-CD300
Dimensions (Approx.) Maximum output Lens Carl Zeiss lens ✕ a
MVC-CD200: 143×92× voltage
89 mm (5 3/4×3 5/8× DC 8.4 V Optical zoom 3×
3 5/8 inches) (w/h/d) Mean output voltage Digital zoom 6×
MVC-CD300: 143×92× DC 7.2 V
94 mm (5 3/4×3 5/8× Capacity Filter diameter 37mm 52mm
3 3/4 inches) (w/h/d) 8.5 Wh (1180 mAh) CCD imager Size 1/2.7 type 1/1.8 type
Mass (Approx.) Operating temperature
MVC-CD200: 610 g 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F) Pixels 2.1mega 3.3mega
(1 lb 6 oz) Dimensions (Approx.) Image size Still 1600×1200 2048×1536
MVC-CD300: 650 g 38.2×20.5×55.6 mm
(1 lb 7 oz) (including NP- (1 9/16×13/16×2 1/4 inches) 1600 (3:2) 2048 (3:2)
FM50 battery pack, disc and (w/h/d)
lens cap, etc.)
1024×768 1600×1200
Mass (Approx.)
Built-in microphone 76 g (3 oz) 640×480 1280×960
Electret condenser
microphone Accessories 640×480
AC-L10A/L10B/L10C Movie
Built-in speaker 320 (HQ)
Dynamic speaker AC power adaptor (1)
Power cord (mains lead) (1) 320×240
AC-L10A/L10B/L10C Ferrite Core (1)
USB cable (1)
640×480
AC power adaptor
NP-FM50 battery pack (1)
Power requirements
100 to 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz A/V connecting cable (1)
8 cm CD adaptor (1)
Rated output voltage Mavica disc (2) (CD-R (1),
DC 8.4 V, 1.5 A in operating
CD-RW (1))
mode
Shoulder strap (1)
Operating temperature Lens cap (1)
0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F)
Lens cap strap (1)
Storage temperature CD-ROM (2)
–20°C to +60°C (–4°F to Operating instructions (2)
+140°F) 2-pin conversion adaptor (1)
Dimensions (Approx.) (E, Hong Kong, Tourist model
125×39×62 mm (5×1 9/16× only)
2 1/2 inches) (w/h/d)
Mass (Approx.) Design and specifications
280 g (10 oz) are subject to change
without notice.
CAUTION
Use of controls or adjustments or performance
procedures other than those specified herein may
result in hazardous radiation exposure.
SAFETY-RELATED COMPONENT WARNING!! ATTENTION AU COMPOSANT AYANT RAPPORT

À LA SÉCURITÉ!
COMPONENTS IDENTIFIED BY MARK 0 OR DOTTED LINE WITH LES COMPOSANTS IDENTIFÉS PAR UNE MARQUE 0 SUR LES
MARK 0 ON THE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AND IN THE PARTS DIAGRAMMES SCHÉMATIQUES ET LA LISTE DES PIÈCES SONT
LIST ARE CRITICAL TO SAFE OPERATION. REPLACE THESE CRITIQUES POUR LA SÉCURITÉ DE FONCTIONNEMENT. NE
COMPONENTS WITH SONY PARTS WHOSE PART NUMBERS REMPLACER CES COMPOSANTS QUE PAR DES PIÈSES SONY
APPEAR AS SHOWN IN THIS MANUAL OR IN SUPPLEMENTS DONT LES NUMÉROS SONT DONNÉS DANS CE MANUEL OU
PUBLISHED BY SONY. DANS LES SUPPÉMENTS PUBLIÉS PAR SONY.
SAFETY CHECK-OUT
After correcting the original service problem, perform the following

safety checks before releasing the set to the customer.
1. Check the area of your repair for unsoldered or poorly-soldered 4. Look for parts which, through functioning, show obvious signs
connections. Check the entire board surface for solder splashes of deterioration. Point them out to the customer and
and bridges. recommend their replacement.
2. Check the interboard wiring to ensure that no wires are 5. Check the B+ voltage to see it is at the values specified.
"pinched" or contact high-wattage resistors. 6. Flexible Circuit Board Repairing
3. Look for unauthorized replacement parts, particularly • Keep the temperature of the soldering iron around 270˚C
transistors, that were installed during a previous repair. Point during repairing.
them out to the customer and recommend their replacement. • Do not touch the soldering iron on the same conductor of the
circuit board (within 3 times).
• Be careful not to apply force on the conductor when soldering
or unsoldering.
—2—
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SERVICE NOTE ····································································· 6 Troubleshooting ··································································· 1-22
Warning and notice messages ·············································· 1-24
1. GENERAL Self-diagnosis display ·························································· 1-25
Introduction ··········································································· 1-1 LCD screen indicators ························································· 1-25
Getting started
Identifying the parts ······························································· 1-1 2. DISASSEMBLY
Preparing the power supply ··················································· 1-1 2-1. LCD SECTION (PK-58 BOARD) ·································· 2-2
Setting the date and time ························································ 1-3 2-2. CABINET (FRONT) SECTION ····································· 2-3
Inserting a disc ······································································· 1-3 2-3. LENS SECTION (CD-333/334 BOARD) ······················· 2-4
Basic operations 2-4. CABINET (FRONT) ASSEMBLY (TK-61 BOARD),
B Recording CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (RL-503) ······················· 2-5
Initializing a disc (INITIALIZE) ··········································· 1-4 2-5. BATTERY HOLDER (JK-208 BOARD) ························ 2-6
Recording still images ··························································· 1-4 2-6. SY-67 BOARD ································································ 2-6
Recording moving images ····················································· 1-6 2-7. STROBOSCOPE SECTION (FLASH UNIT) ················ 2-7
B Playback 2-8. BASE UNIT (DDX-G2100 COMPLETE ASSEMBLY) · 2-8
Playing back still images ······················································· 1-6 2-9. LID CD SECTION ·························································· 2-9
Playing back moving images ················································· 1-6 2-10. FUNCTION BUTTON (FS-83 BOARD) ······················· 2-9
Preparation for viewing images using a computer ················· 1-7 2-11. SOLENOID PLUNGER (DOOR LOCK/STROBO-
Viewing images using a computer ········································· 1-8 SCOPE), CD LOCK SLIDER ······································· 2-10
Image file storage destinations and image file names ········· 1-10 2-12. CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (ZK-503),
Advanced operations STRAP SHAFT ····························································· 2-11
Before performing advanced operations 2-13. MODE KNOB, POWER SPRING ································ 2-12
How to use the mode dial ···················································· 1-10 2-14. CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION ································· 2-13
How to use the control button ·············································· 1-11 2-15. FLEXIBLE BOARDS LOCATION ······························ 2-14
How to use the jog dial ························································ 1-11
Menu settings ······································································· 1-11 Disassembling procedure of Mechanism deck (DDX-
Setting the image size (IMAGE SIZE) ································ 1-12 G2100 COMPLETE ASSEMBLY) are not shown.
B Various recording Pages 2-15 and 2-16 are not shown.
Recording with the exposure fixed (AE LOCK) ················· 1-13
Recording with the manual adjustments ······························ 1-13 3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS
Recording images according to shooting conditions 3-1. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/2) ··························· 3-1
(SCENE SELECTION) ······················································· 1-14 3-2. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/2) ··························· 3-3
Recording three images continuously (BURST) 3-3. MODE CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM ······················· 3-5
(only for MVC-CD300) ······················································· 1-14 3-4. LCD BLOCK DIAGRAM ·············································· 3-7
Recording still images for e-mail (E-MAIL) ······················ 1-14 3-5. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/3) ································ 3-9
Adding audio files to still images (VOICE) ························ 1-14 3-6. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/3) ······························ 3-11
Recording text documents (TEXT) ····································· 1-14 3-7. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (3/3) ······························ 3-13
Recording still images as uncompressed files (TIFF) ········· 1-15
Recording three images with the exposure shifted Camera block diagrams and MD block diagrams are
(only for MVC-CD300) (EXP BRKTG) ····························· 1-15 not shown.
Creating Clip Motion Files ·················································· 1-15 Pages from 3-15 to 3-26 are not shown.
Setting the distance to the subject ········································ 1-16
Recording images in macro ················································· 1-16 4. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND
Adjusting the exposure (EXPOSURE) ································ 1-16 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
Adjusting the white balance (WHITE BALANCE) ············ 1-16 4-1. FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (1/2) ······················· 4-1
Enjoying picture effects (P. EFFECT) ································· 1-16 FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (2/2) ······················· 4-3
Recording the date and time on the still image 4-2. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND
(DATE/TIME) ······································································ 1-17 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS ············································ 4-5
Using the Spot light-metering function ······························· 1-17 • CD-333 (LENS DRIVE, CAMERA PROCESS,
B Various playback CCD IMAGER)
Playing back three or nine images at once ··························· 1-17 PRINTED WIRING BOARD (CD200) ·········· 4-7
Enlarging a part of the still image (Zoom and trimming) ···· 1-17 • CD-334 (LENS DRIVE, CAMERA PROCESS,
Playing back the still images in order (SLIDE) ··················· 1-18 CCD IMAGER)
Rotating a still image (ROTATE) ········································· 1-18 PRINTED WIRING BOARD (CD300) ·········· 4-9
Viewing images on a TV screen ·········································· 1-18 • CD-333/334 (LCD DRIVE)(1/3)
B Editing SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-11
Deleting images (DELETE) ················································ 1-18 • CD-333/334 (CAMERA PROCESS)(2/3)
Preventing accidental erasure (PROTECT) ························· 1-19 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-13
Changing the recorded still image size (RESIZE) ··············· 1-19 • CD-333 (CCD IMAGER)(3/3)
Selecting still images to print (PRINT) ······························· 1-19 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-15
Formatting a CD-RW ··························································· 1-20 • CD-334 (CCD IMAGER)(3/3)
Changing the setup settings (SET UP) ································ 1-20 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-16
Additional information • TK-61 (LENS CAP DETECT)
Precautions ··········································································· 1-21 PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-17
On discs ··············································································· 1-21 • TK-61 (LENS CAP DETECT)
Using your camera abroad ··················································· 1-22 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-18
About “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack ·································· 1-22
—3—
11. Auto White Balance Adjustment ··································· 5-19
Schematic diagram and printed wiring board of the SY- 12. Color Reproduction Adjustment ···································· 5-20
67 and MD-083 boards are not shown. 12-1. Color Reproduction Adjustment ···································· 5-20
Pages from 4-19 to 4-54 are not shown. 12-2. Color Reproduction Check ············································· 5-20
13. White Balance Check ···················································· 5-21
• CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (ZK-503) 14. CCD White Defect Compensation and Check ·············· 5-22
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-55 15. CCD Black Defect Compensation and Check ··············· 5-22
• FS-83 (CHARGER) 16. Strobe Adjustment ························································· 5-23
PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-56 17. LED Illumination Check ··············································· 5-24
• FS-83 (CHARGER) 1-5. LCD SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT ··································· 5-25
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-57 1. LCD Initial Data Input (1) ············································· 5-25
• JK-208 (USB INTERFACE) 2. LCD Initial Data Input (2) ············································· 5-26
PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-59 3. VCO Adjustment (PK-58 board) ··································· 5-26
• JK-208 (USB INTERFACE) 4. D Range Adjustment (PK-58 board) ····························· 5-27
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-61 5. Bright Adjustment (PK-58 board) ································· 5-27
• PK-58 (RGB DRIVE, TIMING GENERATOR, 6. Contrast Adjustment (PK-58 board) ······························ 5-28
BACK LIGHT) 7. Color Adjustment (PK-58 board) ·································· 5-28
PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-63 8. V-COM Level Adjustment (PK-58 board) ···················· 5-29
• PK-58 (RGB DRIVE)(1/3) 9. V-COM Adjustment (PK-58 board) ······························ 5-29
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-67 10. White Balance Adjustment (PK-58 board) ···················· 5-30
• PK-58 (TIMING GENERATOR)(2/3) 1-6. SYSTEM CONTROL SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT ········ 5-31
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-69 1. Battery End Adjustment (SY-67 board) ························· 5-31
• PK-58 (BACK LIGHT)(3/3) 2. Serial No. Input ····························································· 5-32
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-71 5-2. SERVICE MODE ·························································· 5-33
4-3. WAVEFORMS ······························································ 4-73 2-1. ADJUSTMENT REMOTE COMMANDER ················ 5-33
4-4. MOUNTED PARTS LOCATION ································· 4-78 1. Using the Adjustment Remote Commander ·················· 5-33
2. Precautions Upon Using the Adjustment Remote
5. ADJUSTMENTS Commander ··································································· 5-33
1. Adjusting items when replacing main parts and boards ·· 5-1 2-2. DATA PROCESS ··························································· 5-34
5-1. ADJUSTMENT ······························································· 5-2 2-3. SERVICE MODE ·························································· 5-35
1-1. PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENT ················· 5-2 1. Setting the Test Mode ···················································· 5-35
1-1-1. List of Service Tools ························································ 5-2 2. Bit Value Discrimination ··············································· 5-35
1-1-2. Preparations ····································································· 5-3 3. Switch check (1) ···························································· 5-36
1-1-3. Discharging of the flashlight power supply ····················· 5-3 4. Switch check (2) ···························································· 5-36
1-1-4. Precaution ········································································ 5-5 5. Switch check (3) ···························································· 5-36
1. Setting the Switch ···························································· 5-5 6. Switch check (4) ···························································· 5-37
2. Order of Adjustments ······················································ 5-5 7. Switch check (5) ···························································· 5-37
3. Subjects ··········································································· 5-5 8. LED check ····································································· 5-37
1-2. INITIALIZATION OF B, D, E, F, 7, 9 PAGE DATA ····· 5-6 9. Self Diagnosis Log check ·············································· 5-38
1-2-1. INITIALIZATION OF D PAGE DATA ·························· 5-6 10. Record of Use check ······················································ 5-38
1. Initializing the D Page Data ············································ 5-6
2. Modification of D Page Data ··········································· 5-6 6. REPAIR PARTS LIST
3. D Page Table ···································································· 5-6 6-1. EXPLODED VIEWS ······················································ 6-1
1-2-2. Initializing the B, E, F, 7, 9 Page Data ···························· 5-7 6-1-1. OVERALL SECTION ····················································· 6-1
1. Initializing the B, E, F, 7, 9 Page Data ···························· 5-7 6-1-2. CABINET (FRONT) SECTION, LENS CABINET
2. Modification of B, E, F, 7, 9 Page Data ··························· 5-7 SECTION (CD200) ························································· 6-2
3. F Page Table ···································································· 5-7 6-1-3. CABINET (FRONT) SECTION, LENS CABINET
4. 7 Page Table ····································································· 5-9 SECTION (CD300) ························································· 6-3
5. 9 Page Table ··································································· 5-10 6-1-4. LENS SECTION ····························································· 6-4
6. E Page Table ·································································· 5-10 6-1-5. CABINET (REAR) SECTION-1 ···································· 6-5
7. B Page Table ·································································· 5-10 6-1-6. CABINET (REAR) SECTION-2 ···································· 6-6
1-3. VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS ····························· 5-11 6-1-7. LID CD SECTION ·························································· 6-7
1. Video Output Level Adjustment (SY-67 board) ············ 5-11
1-4. CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS ························ 5-12 Exploded view and parts list of DDX-G2100 COMPLETE
1. HALL Adjustment (MVC-CD200) ······························· 5-12 ASSEMBLY are not shown.
2. Flange Back Adjustment (Using Minipattern Box) ······· 5-13 Page 6-8 is not shown.
3. Flange Back Adjustment ··············································· 5-14
3-1. Flange Back Adjustment (1) 6-2. ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST ·········································· 6-9
(Using Flange Back Adjustment Chart) ························ 5-14
3-2. Flange Back Adjustment (2)(MVC-CD200) ················· 5-14 Electrical parts list of the SY-67 and MD-083 boards
4. Flange Back Check ························································ 5-15 are not shown.
5. Picture Frame Setting ···················································· 5-16 Pages from 6-14 to 6-24 are not shown.
6. F No. Standard Data Input ············································· 5-17
7. Mechanical Shutter Adjustment ···································· 5-17
8. Light Value Adjustment ················································· 5-18 * LED illumination axis frame and color reproduction frame are
9. Mixed Color Cancel Adjustment ··································· 5-18 shown on pages 160 and 161.
10. Auto White Balance Standard Data Input ····················· 5-19
—4—
SERVICE NOTE
• NOTE FOR REPAIR

Make sure that the flat cable and flexible board are not cracked of When remove a connector, don't pull at wire of connector.
bent at the terminal. Be in danger of the snapping of a wire.
Do not insert the cable insufficiently nor crookedly.
When installing a connector, don't press down at wire of connector.

Be in danger of the snapping of a wire.
Cut and remove the part of gilt

which comes off at the point.
(Take care that there are
some pieces of gilt left inside)
[Discharging of the FLASH unit’s charging capacitor]
The charging capacitor of the FLASH unit is charged up to the

maximum 300 V potential.
There is a danger of electric shock by this high voltage when the
capacitor is handled by hand. The electric shock is caused by the
charged voltage which is kept without discharging when the main
power of the MVC-CD200/CD300 is simply turned off. Therefore,
the remaining voltage must be discharged as described below.
Preparing the Short Jig Discharging the Capacitor

To preparing the short jig. a small clip is attached to each end of a Short circuits between the positive and the negative terminals of
resistor of 1 kΩ /1 W (1-215-869-11) charged capacitor with the short jig about 10 seconds.
Wrap insulating tape fully around the leads of the resistor to prevent
electrical shock.
Harness retainer
1 kΩ/1 W Capactior Capactior cap
Short jig
Wrap insulating tape.
—5—
[Description on Self-diagnosis Display]
Self-diagnosis display
• C: ss: ss
The contents which can be handled
by customer, are displayed.
• E: ss: ss
The contents which can be handled
by engineer, are displayed.
Display Code Countermeasure Cause Caution Display During Error

Change the disk and turn off the main
C:32:01 Defective base unit. DRIVE ERROR
power then back on.
• The type of CD-R/RW disk that cannot
C:13:01 Replace the CD-R/RW disk. be used by this machine, is inserted. DISK ERROR
• Data is damaged.
Flash LED
Checking of flash unit or replacement of Abnormality when flash is being
E:91:01 Flash display
flash unit charged.
Flashing at 3.2 Hz
*1
E:61:00
Checking of lens drive circuit When failed in the focus initialization. —
*1
E:61:10
Note: The error code is cleared if the battery is removed.

*1 : The error display is given in two ways.
—6—
MVC-CD200/CD300
SECTION 1
This section is extracted from
GENERAL instruction manual.
Getting started
Introduction Identifying the parts

Captures images with your computer See the pages in parentheses for details of operation.
You can easily copy images onto your computer through a CD-ROM drive, CD-R
drive, CD-RW drive, or the USB cable and view and modify images on your 6
Getting started
computer using application software. When using a CD-ROM drive to view images 7
on your computer, the finalization is required (page 32).
Flow chart for disc operations 8
: CD-R 1 9
Start
: CD-RW 2 0
• A new disc [ ] : Required
time qa
• The disc finalized with a computer or other equipment
qs
Initialize 3 qd
(page 18)
Recording is complete 4
View on the qf
camera 5 qg
Record (page 28)
Disc preparation for Finalize View on a
recording is complete. [About 1 min] computer A Shutter button (20, 26) L ACC (Accessory) jack
(page 32) (page 35) B Built-in microphone Connects an external flash or other
About 13 MB disc Do not touch while recording. equipment.
space is used M Lens cap (supplied)
View through C Battery cover (bottom surface)
the USB cable (9) N USB jack (38)
(page 38)
D Lens O A/V OUT (MONO) jack (76)
E Tripod receptacle (bottom surface) Audio output is monaural.
Use a tripod with a screw length of
The disc status About the Carl Zeiss lens (MVC-
less than 6.5 mm (7/32 inch). You
is before View through a CD300 only)
Unfinalize cannot firmly secure the camera to
finalization [About 1 min] CD-R/CD-RW This camera is equipped with a Carl Zeiss
drive tripods having longer screws, and lens which is capable of reproducing fine
(page 34) may damage the camera. images. The lens for this camera uses the
About 13 MB disc (page 41)
F Accessory shoe MTF* measurement system for cameras
space restores. developed jointly by Carl Zeiss, in
G Photocell window for flash Germany, and Sony Corporation, and
View through a Do not block while recording with offers the same quality as other Carl Zeiss
CD-ROM drive the flash. lenses.
(page 37) ∗ MTF is an abbreviation of Modulation
H Flash (24) Transfer Function/Factor, a numeric
Format
Blank disc [About 7 min] Disc preparation I Self-timer lamp/AF illuminator value indicating the amount of light from
(page 82) for viewing through (24, 25) a specific part of the subject gathered at
the corresponding position in the image.
The disc space is fully a CD-ROM drive is J Hook for strap and lens cap
available. complete.
K Disc cover OPEN lever (16)
6 7
Preparing the power supply

1 qd
POWER
A
ON/
M
OFF(CHG)
S
SCN
Installing the battery pack
Getting started
UP ET
S
Attaching the Your camera operates only with the NP-FM50 (supplied) “InfoLITHIUM” battery
2 shoulder strap pack* (M series). See page 91 for more information about “InfoLITHIUM” battery
pack.
3 qf
4 qg
1 2 3
5 qh
6 qj 1
7 2 1
8 qk 2
9 ql
0 w;
qa wa 1 Open the battery cover.
Slide the battery cover in the direction of the arrow.
qs
2 Install the battery pack.
Insert the battery pack with the v mark facing toward the battery compartment
A Mode dial (45) M Hook for strap as illustrated.
B POWER switch (14) N (Spot meter) button (71)
3 Close the battery cover.
C (Exposure) button (67) O AE LOCK button (55)
D /CHG (Charge) lamp (10, 25) P Zoom W/T buttons (22) To remove the battery pack
E FOCUS button (66) Q Jog dial (48) Open the battery cover. Slide the battery eject lever in the arrow direction,
F Photocell window for LCD R POWER ON/OFF (CHG) lamp and remove the battery pack.
screen (14) Be careful not to drop the battery pack when removing it.
The LCD screen becomes brighter S Speaker
when exposed to sunlight.
T Control button (46)
G LCD screen
U MENU button (46)
H Disc window
I DISPLAY/LCD BACK LIGHT ON/ Battery eject lever
OFF button (23)
J ACCESS lamp (20) * What is “InfoLITHIUM”?
“InfoLITHIUM” is a lithium ion battery pack which can exchange information such as battery
K Reset button (99) consumption with compatible video equipment. “InfoLITHIUM” M series battery packs have
the mark. “InfoLITHIUM” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
L DC IN cover/DC IN jack (10, 13)
8 9
1-1
NP-FM50 (supplied) battery pack
Charging the battery pack When you record images in an extremely cold location or using the LCD backlight,
the operating time becomes short. When using the camera in an extremely cold
When the camera is turned on, you cannot charge the battery pack. Be sure to turn off location, place the battery pack in your pocket or other places to keep it warm, then
the power of the camera. insert the battery pack into the camera just before recording. When using a pocket
Getting started
heater, take care not to let the heater directly contact the battery.
Note on the /CHG lamp during charging

AC-L10A/L10B/L10C The /CHG lamp may flash:
AC power adaptor • When a malfunction occurs in the battery pack (page 99).
Power cord The /CHG lamp does not light up:
(mains lead) • When the battery pack is not installed properly.
Charging time
3 2 Battery pack Full charge (min.)
NP-FM50 (supplied) Approx. 150
to a wall outlet (mains)
Approximate time to charge a completely discharged battery pack at a temperature of
1 25°C (77°F).
Battery pack
Battery life and number of images that can be recorded/played back
Still image recording/playback

1 Insert the battery pack into your camera. NP-FM50 (supplied)
Battery life (min.) Number of images
2 Open the DC IN cover and connect the AC power adaptor to the DC
Continuous recording* Approx. 75 Approx. 800
IN jack of your camera with the v mark facing up.
Continuous playback** Approx. 120 Approx. 1000
3 Connect the power cord (mains lead) to the AC power adaptor and
then to a wall outlet (mains). Approximate battery life and number of images that can be recorded/played back at a
The /CHG lamp (orange) above the LCD screen lights up when charging temperature of 25°C (77°F) with a fully charged battery pack, using 640×480 image
begins. When the /CHG lamp goes off, full charge is completed. size, standard image quality, and NORMAL recording mode.
∗ Recording at about 5-second intervals
After charging the battery pack ∗∗ Playing back single-displayed images continuously at about 7-second intervals
Disconnect the AC power adaptor from the DC IN jack on your camera.
Moving image recording
Battery remaining indicator NP-FM50 (supplied)
The LCD screen on the camera shows the remaining time for which you can still Battery life (min.)
record or play back images.
This indication may not be entirely accurate depending on the conditions of use and Continuous recording Approx. 120
the operating environment. Approximate time that can be recorded 160×112-sized images at a temperature of
Charging at a room temperature of 10°C to 30°C (50°F to 86°F) is recommended. 25°C (77°F) with a fully charged battery pack.
10 11
Notes
• The battery life and number of images will be decreased when using at low temperature, using Using the AC power adaptor
the flash, turning the power on/off frequently, or using the zoom.
• The numbers of images shown on tables above are as a guide. The numbers may be smaller
depending on conditions.
• If sufficient battery remaining time is indicated but the power runs out soon, fully charge the
Getting started
battery so that the correct battery remaining time appears.
• Do not short the DC plug of the AC power adaptor with a metallic object, as this may cause a
malfunction. AC-L10A/L10B/L10C
AC power adaptor
Power cord
(mains lead)
2 1
to a wall outlet (mains)
1 Open the DC IN cover and connect the AC power adaptor to the DC

IN jack of your camera with the v mark facing up.
2 Connect the power cord (mains lead) to the AC power adaptor and
then to a wall outlet (mains).
Using a car battery

Use a Sony DC adaptor/charger.
Using your camera abroad

For details, see page 90.
When using the AC power adaptor

Be sure to use it near the wall outlet (mains). If a malfunction occurs, disconnect the
plug from the wall outlet (mains).
12 13
1-2
Setting the date and time 5 Set the numeric value with v/V on the
control button, then press the center z to
When you first use your camera, set the date and time. If these are not set, the enter it. CLOCK SET Y/M/D
M/D/Y
CLOCK SET screen appears whenever you turn on your camera. After entering the number, v/V moves to the next D/M/Y
item. If you selected [D/M/Y] in step 3, set the 2001 / 7 / 1 12 : 00 O K
Getting started
AM
time on a 24-hour cycle. CANCEL
OK
1 6 Select [OK] with B on the control button,

2 then press the center z at the desired
moment to begin clock movement. CLOCK SET Y/M/D
POWER ON/OFF (CHG) lamp The date and time are entered.
M/D/Y
D/M/Y
2001 / 7 / 4 10 : 30 O K
3–6
PM
CANCEL
OK
To cancel the date and time setting

Select [CANCEL] with v/V/b/B on the control button, then press the center z.
1 Set the mode dial to , S, A, M, , SCN, or .
2 Push the POWER switch in the arrow direction to turn on the

power.
The POWER ON/OFF (CHG) lamp (green) lights up.
The CLOCK SET screen appears.
When resetting the date and time once you set, set the mode dial to SET UP
(page 84), and then follow the procedure from step 3.
3 Select the desired date display format with

v/V on the control button, then press the
center z. CLOCK SET Y/M/D
M/D/Y
Select from [Y/M/D] (year/month/day), [M/D/Y] D/M/Y
(month/day/year), or [D/M/Y] (day/month/year). 2001 / 1 / 1 12 : 00 O K
AM
CANCEL
OK
4 Select the year, month, day, hour or minute

item you want to set with b/B on the control
button. CLOCK SET Y/M/D
M/D/Y
The item to be set is indicated with v/V. D/M/Y
2001 / 1 / 1 12 : 00 O K
AM
CANCEL
OK
14 15
Inserting a disc Removing the disc

While sliding the lock tab to the left, slide down the disc cover OPEN lever, and open
You can use only the 8 cm CD-Rs or 8 cm CD-RWs that have these
the disc cover after the cover is unlocked. Then, remove the disc as illustrated below.
marks.
Getting started
1 2
Disc cover
OPEN lever
Lock tab
Notes
• Before removing the disc, be sure to check that the disc is not rotating.
• Do not open the disc cover while the ACCESS lamp is lit. If you do, the recorded image may be
damaged or the disc may become unusable.
• When writing data on a disc or connecting with a computer using the USB connection, the disc
cover OPEN lever is locked.
1 While sliding the lock tab to the left, slide down the disc cover
OPEN lever.
Open the disc cover by your hand after the cover is unlocked.
2 Place a disc with the printed side up.

Push down the center of the disc until it clicks. When installing, do not push
with too much force and do not touch the pickup lens.
Pickup lens
Push here
Disc
3 Close the disc cover.
16 17
1-3
Basic operations B Recording
Initializing a disc (INITIALIZE) What is initialization?

The initialization is required to record images on a disc.
When you use a new disc or the disc which was finalized with other equipment than In case that you have executed the finalization (page 32) using the camera to view
this camera (page 32), you have to initialize the disc. Before initializing the disc, images on a CD-ROM drive, the initialization is automatically executed. You can
push the POWER switch in the arrow direction to turn on the power and insert the continuously record images. When executing the finalization using a computer or
disc. other equipment, execute the initialization to record new images. Images recorded
before finalization will remain on the disc.
Tip
1
B Recording
You can also execute the initialization using [ ] (DISC TOOL) in the setup settings
(page 84).
1 Set the mode dial to , S, A, M, SCN, or .

“INITIALIZE PLACE ON LEVEL SURFACE” appears on the LCD screen.
Be sure to avoid any vibration during the initialization in step 2.
2 Select [OK] with v on the control button, then press the center z.
Initialization starts.
INITIALIZE INITIALIZE INITIALIZE

AVOID ANY VIBRATION AVOID ANY VIBRATION
READY TO INITIALIZE INITIALIZE IN PROGRESS INITIALIZE COMPLETE
To cancel the initialization

Select [CANCEL] with V on the control button, then press the center z.
To initialize after canceling the initialization

Open and close the disc cover. Or set the mode dial to , S, A, M, SCN, or ,
press v on the control button, then press the center z.
18 19
Recording still images 3 Press the shutter button fully down.

The shutter clicks. “RECORDING” appears on the LCD screen, and the image
Still images are recorded in JPEG format. Before recording still images, push the will be recorded on the disc. When “RECORDING” disappears from the LCD
POWER switch in the arrow direction to turn on the power and insert a disc. screen, you can start the next recording.
1 2, 3
RECORDING
B Recording
For the number of images you can record on a disc

See page 54.
ACCESS lamp
Auto power-off function
If you do not operate the camera for about three minutes, the camera turns off
automatically to prevent wearing down the battery pack. To use the camera again,
1 Set the mode dial to , S, A, M, or SCN.
push the POWER switch in the arrow direction to turn on the camera again.
2 Press and hold the shutter button halfway down. While the image is being recorded on a disc, the ACCESS lamp lights.
The beeps sound. However, the image has not been recorded yet. While the When this lamp is lit, do not shake or strike the camera. Also, do not
AE/AF lock indicator z is flashing, the camera automatically adjusts the turn the power off, not remove the battery pack/disc, or not open the
exposure and focus of the captured image. When the camera finishes the disc cover. Otherwise, an image data breakdown may occur or the
automatic adjustments, the AE/AF lock indicator z stops flashing, then disc may become unusable.
lights up, and the camera is ready for recording.
If you release the shutter button, the recording will be canceled. Notes
AE/AF lock indicator (green) • When using a CD-R, even if you delete images, the disc remaining space does not increase.
flashes t lights up • Only when using a CD-RW, the disc remaining space increases after deleting the last-recorded
image if the is indicated on the LCD screen before deleting. If you modify an image, or
open and close the disc cover, will disappear.
• When recording bright subjects, the color of the LCD screen may change after the AE is
locked. However, this will not affect the recorded image.
• After you change the disc, “REPAIRING DATA” appears on the LCD screen and it may take
about 10 minutes to get ready for recording depending on the disc condition.
• When you press the shutter button fully down at once, the camera starts recording after the
automatic adjustment is complete. However, the recording cannot be carried out while the /
CHG lamp (page 8) is flashing. (During this time, the camera is charging the flash.)
• When the AE/AF lock indicator flashes slowly, the subject may be hard to focus on because it
is too dark or no contrast, or it may be too close to the camera. Release the shutter button, and
focus on it again.
20 21
1-4
Checking the last recorded image (Quick Review)
Digital zoom function
This camera has a digital zoom function.
You can check the last recorded image by clearing the menu from the screen Digital zoom enlarges the image by digital processing, and it starts to function when
(page 46) and pressing b (7) on the control button. the zoom exceeds 3×.
To return to the normal recording mode: press the shutter button lightly, or press
b (7) again.
To delete the image: 1. Press MENU. 2. Select [DELETE] with B, then press the W T
center z. 3. Select [OK] with v, then press the center z.

The T-side of the bar shows the
B Recording
Adjusting the brightness of the LCD screen digital zooming zone.
Adjust the brightness with the [LCD BRIGHTNESS] item in the setup settings
(page 85). This adjustment does not affect the brightness of the images recorded on
the disc.
Using digital zoom
• The maximum zoom magnification is 6×.
To turn off the LCD backlight • Digital zooming deteriorates the picture quality. When digital zoom is not
Press DISPLAY/LCD BACK LIGHT ON/OFF repeatedly to turn off the LCD necessary, set [DIGITAL ZOOM] to [OFF] in the setup settings (page 84).
backlight (page 23). The battery life will be longer. Notes
• Digital zoom does not work for moving images.
• The zoom function does not work while recording a moving image. Set the zoom position
Using the zoom feature before you start recording (MVC-CD300 only).
The lens part moves in/out while zooming. Be careful not to touch the lens.
The indicators on the LCD screen during recording
Each time you press DISPLAY/LCD BACK LIGHT ON/OFF, the status of the LCD
Zoom buttons screen changes as follows:
The LCD backlight is turned on/all the available indicators are turned on
t The LCD backlight is turned on/warning messages and manual adjustment
W: for wide-angle T: for telephoto items which are set using the jog dial are turned on
(subject appears (subject appears t The LCD backlight is turned off/warning messages and manual adjustment
farther away) closer) items which are set using the jog dial are turned on
See page 105 for a detailed description of the indicators.
If you cannot get a sharp focus on a close subject

Press the zoom W button repeatedly and move closer to the subject until the focus is
sharp (page 66).
DISPLAY/LCD BACK
Minimum focal distance to the subject LIGHT ON/OFF
W side: Approx. 50 cm (19 3/4 inches) (MVC-CD200)
Approx. 50 cm (19 3/4 inches) (MVC-CD300)
Notes
T side: Approx. 60 cm (23 5/8 inches) (MVC-CD200)
• You cannot turn off the (self-timer) indicator and some of the indicators used in advanced
Approx. 50 cm (19 3/4 inches) (MVC-CD300) operations.
To record even closer subjects, see page 66. • The indicators on the LCD screen are not recorded.
22 23
Notes
Using the self-timer
• When [ISO] is set to [AUTO] in the menu settings (page 49), the recommended shooting
When you use the self-timer function, the subject is recorded about 10 seconds after distance is 0.3 to 2.5 m (11 7/8 inches to 8 1/3 feet) (MVC-CD200) or 0.3 to 3.0 m (11 7/8
you press the shutter button. inches to 9 feet 10 1/8 inches) (MVC-CD300). When it is not set to [AUTO], the flash may be
ineffective even if the flash level is changed.
Self-timer lamp • Attaching a conversion lens (optional) may block the light from the flash and the recorded
image may be eclipsed.
• You cannot use the built-in flash and an external strobe (optional) at the same time.
Shutter button • The RED EYE REDUCTION function may not produce the desired red-eye reduction effects
depending on individual differences, the distance to the subject, if the subject does not see the
B Recording
V ( ) on the pre-strobe, or other conditions.
• Red-eye reduction effects are also difficult to obtain if you select a slow shutter speed in shutter
control button
speed priority mode.
• The flash effect is not obtained easily when you use forced flash in a bright location.
• While charging the flash, the /CHG lamp flashes. After the charging is complete, the lamp
Clear the menu (page 46), then press V ( ) on the control button. The (self- goes out.
timer) indicator appears on the LCD screen, and the subject is recorded about 10 • The flash does not function when recording moving images or recording in EXP BRKTG or
seconds after you press the shutter button. After you press the shutter button, the self- BURST mode (MVC-CD300 only) (pages 59, 63).
timer lamp flashes until the image is recorded.
Recording images with the AF illuminator
Recording images with the flash The AF illuminator is fill light to focus on a subject easily under dark conditions. Set
[AF ILLUMINATOR] to [ON] in the setup settings, appears on the LCD screen
The initial setting is AUTO (no indication). In this mode, the flash automatically pops
and the AF illuminator emits light when the shutter button is pressed halfway under
up and strobes if the camera senses that the surroundings become dark. To change the
dark situations. It keeps emitting light until the focus is locked.
flash mode, clear the menu (page 46), then press v ( ) on the control button
repeatedly so that the flash mode indicator on the LCD screen changes.
AF illuminator
v ( ) on the
control button
Notes
Each time you press the button, the indicator changes as follows. • If AF illuminator light does not reach the subject sufficiently or the subject has no contrast,
(No indication) t t t (No indication) focus will not be achieved. Approximate 0.3 to 3.0 m (11 7/8 inches to 9 feet 10 1/8 inches)
Forced flash : The flash strobes regardless of the surrounding brightness. distance is recommended.
No flash : The flash does not strobe. • In TWILIGHT mode of the SCENE SELECTION function (page 58), the AF illuminator will
Pop down the flash by your hand after recording. emit only when the flash mode is set to (Forced flash).
• The AF illuminator will not emit when the LANDSCAPE mode of the SCENE SELECTION
function (page 58) is selected or [CONVERSION LENS] is set to [ON] in the setup settings
You can change the amount of flash light with [ ±] (FLASH LEVEL) in the menu (page 85). ([CONVERSION LENS] is only for MVC-CD300.)
settings (page 50). • Focus is achieved as long as AF illuminator light reaches the subject even if its light is slightly
out of the middle position of the subject.
To reduce the red-eye phenomenon • AF illuminator light is safe for persons. However, do not use the AF illuminator with its light
emitted directly to person eyes at point-blank range as its light is very strong.
Set [RED EYE REDUCTION] to [ON] in the setup settings (page 84), the flash
strobes before recording to reduce the red-eye phenomenon. When [ON] is selected,
appears on the LCD screen.
24 25
1-5
Recording moving images 5 Set the mode dial to .
The preparation for recording a moving image is complete.
Moving images with audio are recorded in MPEG format. Before recording moving
images, push the POWER switch in the arrow direction to turn on the power and 6 Press the shutter button fully down.
insert a disc. “REC” appears on the LCD screen and the image and sound are recorded on the
disc.
6, 7 1, 5 7 Press the shutter button fully down again to stop recording.

The recording automatically stops in the following time even if you do not
B Recording
press the shutter button again.
When selecting the 320 (HQ) size: Approximate 15 seconds
When selecting the 320×240 size: Approximate 1 minute
When selecting the 160×112 size: Approximate 4 minutes
For details on the image size, see “Setting the image size (IMAGE SIZE)” on
page 53.
Adjusting the brightness of the LCD screen, zooming or using the

self-timer
See pages 22 to 24.
1 Set the mode dial to SET UP.
The setup screen appears.
The indicators on the LCD screen during recording
2 Select [ ] (CAMERA) with v/V on the Press DISPLAY/LCD BACK LIGHT ON/OFF to turn on/off the indicators on the
control button, then press B. CAMERA
LCD screen.
SCENE SELECTION: TWIRIGHT
MOVING IMAGE: MPEG MOVIE
DATE/TIME: OFF These indicators are not recorded. See page 105 for a detailed description of the
DIGITAL ZOOM:
BRACKET STEP:
ON
±0.7EV
indicators.
RED EYE REDUCTION: OFF
AF ILLUMINATOR: ON
SELECT
3 Select [MOVING IMAGE] with v/V on the

control button, then press B. CAMERA
SCENE SELECTION:
DATE/TIME: CLIP MOTION
DIGITAL ZOOM:
BRACKET STEP:
RED EYE REDUCTION:
AF ILLUMINATOR:
OK
4 Select [MPEG MOVIE] with v/V on the

control button, then press the center z. CAMERA
SCENE SELECTION: TWIRIGHT
DATE/TIME: OFF
DIGITAL ZOOM: ON
BRACKET STEP: ±0.7EV
RED EYE REDUCTION: OFF
AF ILLUMINATOR: ON
SELECT
26 27
B Playback
Playing back still images Playing back moving images
1 1
2 2, 3
B Playback
ACCESS lamp ACCESS lamp
1 Set the mode dial to . 1 Set the mode dial to .

The ACCESS lamp lights and the last recorded image (still or moving) appears The ACCESS lamp lights and the last recorded image (still or moving) appears
on the LCD screen. on the LCD screen.
2 Select the desired still image with b/B on

120min
2 Select the desired moving image with b/B 120min
the control button. 1600
27/28 on the control button. 320
21/28
00:00
b: To display the preceding image. Moving images are displayed one size smaller than
B: To display the next image. still images except when you shot at the 320 (HQ)
(page 53) size.
100-0028 2001 7 4 10:30PM b: To display the preceding image. MOV00022 2001 7 4 10:30PM
PLAY FILE BACK/NEXT VOLUME
FILE BACK/NEXT VOLUME
B: To display the next image.
Note 3 Press the center z on the control button to 120min

You may not be able to play back images whose image sizes are larger than the maximum image start the playback. 320
21/28
00:04
size that can be used with this camera for recording. The moving image and sound are played back.
During playback, B (playback) appears on the LCD
The indicators on the LCD screen during still image playback screen.
MOV00022 2001 7 4 10:30PM
STOP REV/CUE VOLUME
Press DISPLAY/LCD BACK LIGHT ON/OFF to turn on/off the indicators on the
LCD screen.
See page 106 for a detailed description of the indicators. To stop the playback
Press the center z on the control button to stop the playback.
To advance or rewind the moving image

Press b/B on the control button during playback. To return to the normal playback,
press the center z.
28 29
1-6
Adjusting the volume Preparation for viewing images
Press v/V on the control button to adjust the volume. using a computer
Using the supplied 8 cm CD adaptor
v/V on the When your disc drive does not conform to 8 cm CD, use the supplied 8 cm CD
control button adaptor.
1 Slide the disc into the inner groove and under two of the tabs on
the inner circle of adaptor in the numbered order.
1
The indicators on the LCD screen during moving image playback
B Playback
Printed side of the disc (The other side is
Press DISPLAY/LCD BACK LIGHT ON/OFF to turn on/off the indicators on the recordable side.)
LCD screen.
See page 107 for a detailed description of the indicators.
2 Printed side of the adaptor (SONY is printed
on this side and the other side is the luster
side.)
2 Pull the third tab out away from the disc and the disc will slip into
place. Release the third tab and the disc will be held firmly in place.
30 31
Executing the finalization

3 Check that the disc is set correctly in the grooves of the adaptor,
that all the tabs are even with the surface of the adaptor, and that
the disc is not protrude from the adaptor.
The setup screen appears on the LCD screen.
2 Select [ ] (DISC TOOL) with v/V on the

control button, then press B. DISC TOOL
FINALIZE:
FORMAT:
INITIALIZE:
UNFINALIZE:
SELECT
If the tabs protrude, press them back down

into place. Otherwise, it may cause 3 Select [FINALIZE] with v/V on the control
malfunction of your disc drive. button, then press B. DISC TOOL
FINALIZE: OK B Playback
FORMAT: CANCEL
INITIALIZE:
UNFINALIZE:
OK
4 Select [OK] with v on the control button,

then press z.
FINALIZE
Notes “FINALIZE PLACE ON LEVEL SURFACE” PLACE ON LEVEL SURFACE
• The supplied adaptor may not be used with your disc drive. For details, refer to the operating appears on the LCD screen. Be sure to avoid any
instructions of the disc drive. vibration during the finalization. READY?
OK
• Use the adaptor at a low-speed (8-speed or lower). CANCEL
• Do not place the adaptor under direct sunlight or near the heat. OK
• The adaptor is only used with Mavica discs. This cannot be used with other 8 cm CD-Rs/CD-
RWs. 5 Select [OK] with v on the control button, then press z.
Finalization starts and the disc remaining indicator changes from to , or
from to .
Preparing for viewing images on CD-ROM drives (FINALIZE)
You can play back the disc recorded with this camera on CD-ROM drives. You have FINALIZE FINALIZE FINALIZE
to execute the finalization before viewing images on a CD-ROM drive. A disc that
has not been executed the finalization cannot be read with CD-ROM drives. READY TO FINALIZE FINALIZE IN PROGRESS FINALIZE COMPLETE
What is finalization?
• The finalization is required to view images on a CD-ROM drive.
• You can record new images on the finalized disc if you execute the initialization on
it again. The initialization will be automatically executed when the finalization is To cancel the finalization
executed using the camera. You have to execute the finalization to view new images Select [CANCEL] with V on the control button in step 4 or 5, then press the center
on a CD-ROM drive. Each time you execute the finalization, approximate 13 MB of z. Once the finalization starts, you cannot cancel it.
the disc will decrease. We recommend that you execute the finalization onto
compiled data at a time.
• You can execute the finalization onto the disc later, even if you remove it from the
camera.
• The CD-ROM drive must conform to the MultiRead type to read the disc that was
finalized.
32 33
1-7
Notes
• It takes for about one minute to execute the finalization. Do not shake or jar the camera during
Viewing images using a
this operation. Place the camera on a stable surface during the finalization.
• When you execute the finalization, we recommend that you use the external power source
computer
(page 13).
You can view data recorded with your camera on a computer. This section describes
the general method for viewing images on a computer and installing the driver into a
Canceling the finalization (UNFINALIZE) (only for CD-RWs) computer. Be sure to also see the operation manuals for your computer and
application software. To view images on the CD-RW using a CD-ROM drive or CD-
When using CD-RWs, you can cancel the last-executed finalization. Once you cancel R drive, the drive must conform to the MultiRead type. Whether your drive conforms
it, the disc space for executing the finalization is recovered. to the MultiRead type or not, consult the drive manufacturer.
1 Set the mode dial to the , S, A, M, SCN, or <<Recommended Windows environment>>

.
“UNFINALIZE PLACE ON LEVEL SURFACE”
UNFINALIZE
PLACE ON LEVEL SURFACE
You can view images on a Windows computer in the following three ways, A, B,
B Playback
appears on the LCD screen. Be sure to avoid any and C. Check the computer environment below, then follow the procedures
vibration during the unfinalization. READY? described on pages 37 to 42.
OK
CANCEL
OK
A Viewing images with a CD-ROM drive (page 37)
Finalize the disc beforehand (page 32).
2 Select [OK] with v on the control button, then press z.
Unfinalization starts and the disc remaining indicator changes from to . OS:Microsoft Windows 98, Windows 98SE, Windows Me, Windows 2000 Professional
The above OS is required to be installed at the factory.
UNFINALIZE UNFINALIZE UNFINALIZE Operation is not assured in an environment upgraded to the operating systems described
above.
READY TO UNFINALIZE UNFINALIZE IN PROGRESS UNFINALIZE COMPLETE
B Viewing images with a computer connected with the USB
cable (page 38)
There are two ways to make the USB connection, which are the normal connection
and the PTP connection (page 86). This is set using [USB CONNECT] in the setup
To cancel the unfinalization settings. However, any OS does not conform to [PTP] as of February 2001. Here
Select [CANCEL] with V on the control button in step 2, then press the center z. describes the way using the [NORMAL] setting.
When it is canceled, you can continuously record an image on the CD-RW.
You do not need to finalize the disc. You have to install the USB driver and the
To unfinalize after canceling the unfinalization software, DirectCD included in the supplied CD-ROM. For details on DirectCD,
Set the mode dial to SET UP, then execute [UNFINALIZE] from [ ] (DISC refer to the software operating instructions of DirectCD.
TOOL) in the setup settings (page 84). OS:Microsoft Windows 98, Windows 98SE, Windows Me, Windows 2000 Professional
Notes The above OS is required to be installed at the factory.
Operation is not assured in an environment upgraded to the operating systems described
• Unfinalization cannot be executed when you record a new image or edit an image on the CD-
above.
RW after executing the finalization.
CPU:MMX Pentium 200 MHz or faster
• It takes about one minute to execute the unfinalization. Do not shake or jar the camera during
The USB connector must be provided as standard.
this operation. Place the camera on a stable surface during the unfinalization.
The CD-ROM drive is required for installing the USB driver.
Tip
You can also execute the unfinalization using [ ] (DISC TOOL) in the setup settings
(page 84).
34 35
Notes • Windows and ActiveMovie, DirectShow are either registered trademarks or trademarks of
• Operations are not guaranteed if you connect two or more USB equipment to a single computer Microsoft Corporation in the United States and /or other countries.
at the same time (except for the USB keyboard and mouse which are provided as standard), or • Macintosh and Mac OS, QuickTime are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Apple
when using a hub. Computer, Inc.
• Depending on the type of USB equipment that is used simultaneously, some equipment may • DirectCD is a trademark of Adaptec, Inc.
not operate. • All other product names mentioned herein may be the trademarks or registered trademarks of
• Operations are not guaranteed for all the recommended computer environments mentioned their respective companies. Furthermore, “™” and “®” are not mentioned in each case in this
above. manual.
C Viewing images with a CD-R/CD-RW drive (page 41)

You do not need to finalize the disc. You have to install the software, DirectCD Viewing images on a Windows computer
included in the supplied CD-ROM. For details on Windows environment, refer to the When playing back moving images, Real Player or Windows Media Player must be
software operating instructions of DirectCD.
installed into your computer.
A Viewing images with a CD-ROM drive

B Playback
<<Recommended Macintosh environment>>

You cannot view images on a Macintosh computer by USB connection. Finalize the disc beforehand (page 32).
Install the driver, Adaptec UDF Volume Access included in the supplied CD-ROM
into your computer and finalize the disc to view images. E.g., for Windows Me users
Macintosh computer with the Mac OS 8.5.1/8.6/9.0 standard installation 1 Start up your computer and insert the disc into the CD-ROM drive
of your computer.
QuickTime 3.0 or later must be installed.
Note 2 Open [ My Computer] and double click the drive recognizing the
disc (Example:[ CD-ROM (D:)]).
Operations are not guaranteed for all the recommended computer environments mentioned above.
3 Double-click the desired data file.
For the detailed folder and file names, see “Image file storage destinations and
Notes on using your computer image file names” (page 43).
Software Desired file Double-click in this order
• Data recorded with your camera is stored in the following formats. Make sure that type
applications that support these file formats are installed on your computer. Still image “DCIM” folder t “100MSDCF” folder t Image file
— Still image (except TEXT mode, uncompressed mode and Clip Motion): JPEG
format Moving image* “MSSONY” folder t “MOML0001” folder t Image file
— Moving image/Voice memo: MPEG format Audio* “MSSONY” folder t “MOMLV100” folder t Audio file
— Uncompressed mode still image: TIFF mode Clip Motion “DCIM” folder t “100MSDCF” folder t Image file
— TEXT mode/Clip Motion: GIF format. image
• Depending on your application software, the file size may increase when you open E-mail image “MSSONY” folder t “IMCIF100” folder t Image file
a still image file. Tiff image
• When you copy the image to the camera from your computer, which was modified (uncompressed)
with a retouching software and was converted to another file format, the “FILE
ERROR” message may appear and you may be unable to open the image.
∗ Copying a file to the hard disk of your computer before viewing is recommended. If you
• Depending on your application software, only the first frame of the Clip Motion file play back the file directly from the disc, the image and sound may break off.
may be played back.
Communications with your computer (for Windows only)

Communications between your camera and your computer may not recover after
recovering from Suspend or Sleep.
36 37
1-8
B Viewing images with a computer connected with the USB cable
Once you install DirectCD included in the supplied CD-ROM, you do not need to
7 Connect the USB jack on your camera with the USB connector on
your computer using the supplied USB cable.
finalize the disc to view images on the disc.
You can exchange data between the camera and a computer using the supplied USB
cable and CD-ROMs.
to the USB connector to the USB jack
Installing the USB driver
Do not connect the camera to the computer yet.
Push the
Before connecting your camera to your computer, install the USB driver to the USB connector as far
computer. The USB driver is contained in the supplied CD-ROM (SPVD-006). computer cable as it will go
If the drive is not recognized, see “Troubleshooting” on page 93.
8 The computer automatically recognizes the camera.
B Playback
E.g., for Windows Me users Open [ My Computer], the newly recognized drive (Example: (E:)) is added.
1 Turn on your computer and allow Windows to load. Installing driver is complete.
Do not connect the USB cable in this step.
9 Insert the disc into the camera, connect the AC power adaptor to
the camera, then turn on the power of the camera.
2 Insert the supplied CD-ROM (SPVD-006) in the CD-ROM drive of
Go to “Viewing images” below. If you remove the disc without viewing an
your computer
If the setup screen of DirectCD appears, click [Finish] on the screen. image, be sure to read “Before disconnecting the USB cable” on page 40.
3 Open [ My Computer] on Windows and right-click the CD-ROM

drive (Example: CD-ROM (D:)), then select [Open (O)]. Viewing images
The file list of the CD-ROM appears. If other application software works, quit When you view images on the disc which was not finalized, you have to install
the application software. DirectCD included in the supplied CD-ROM. For details on DirectCD, refer to the
software operating instructions of DirectCD.
4 Double-click the [SONY USB] folder in the file list, and then double-
click [ SET UP].
The installer of device driver starts and the necessary files are automatically E.g., for Windows Me users
copied to the computer. 1 Turn on your computer and allow Windows to load.
5 Restart the computer.
2 Connect the USB jack on your camera with the USB connector on
If the message appears after the installation to verify that you restart the your computer using the supplied USB cable.
computer, restart the computer. In other cases, restart it manually.
6 Prepare the camera before connecting the computer.

• Connect the AC power adaptor to the camera.
• Turn on the camera. to the USB connector to the USB jack
Push the
USB connector as far
computer cable as it will go
3 Insert the disc into the camera, connect the AC power adaptor to
the camera, then turn on the power of the camera.
“USB MODE” appears on the LCD screen of the camera.
38 39
4 Open [ My Computer] on Windows and double-click the newly 1 Remove the disc.
recognized drive. (Example: [ CD Mavica (E:)]) For details, refer to the software operating instructions of DirectCD.
The folders inside the disc are displayed, and the disc cover of the camera will
be locked. To remove the disc, carry out the operation for removing the disc 2 When using Windows Me, Windows 2000 Professional:
described on the software operating instructions of DirectCD.
If the drive is not recognized, see “Troubleshooting” on page 93.
1 Select the applicable drive from [ ] on the task bar, then stop it.
5 Select and double-click the desired image/sound file from the
folder. 2 After the message informing you that the drive has been removed safely
For the detailed folder and file names, see “Image file storage destinations and appears, disconnect the USB cable.
image file names” (page 43).
When using other operating systems than above:
Desired file Double-click in this order Simply, disconnect the USB cable.
type B Playback
Still image “DCIM” folder t “100MSDCF” folder t Image file C Viewing images using a CD-R/CD-RW drive
Moving image* “MSSONY” folder t “MOML0001” folder t Image file You do not need to finalize the disc. You have to install DirectCD included in the
Audio* “MSSONY” folder t “MOMLV100” folder t Audio file supplied CD-ROM. For details on DirectCD, refer to the software operating
Clip Motion “DCIM” folder t “100MSDCF” folder t Image file instructions of DirectCD.
image
E-mail image “MSSONY” folder t “IMCIF100” folder t Image file Viewing images on a Macintosh computer
Tiff image
(uncompressed) Viewing images with a CD-ROM drive
Finalize the disc beforehand (page 32). You have to install the driver, Adaptec UDF
∗ Copying a file to the hard disk of your computer before viewing is recommended. If you Volume Access included in the supplied CD-ROM (SPVD-006).
play back the file directly from the disc, the image and sound may break off.
1 Start up your computer and allow the Mac OS to load.
Before you remove the disc, be sure to read “Before disconnecting the USB
cable” on page 40. 2 Insert the supplied CD-ROM (SPVD-006) in the CD-ROM drive of
your computer.
Copying a file in the disc to a computer 3 Double-click the CD-ROM drive icon to open the window.
Select the desired file, and drag it to the desired drive or folder.
4 Double-click the icon of the hard disk containing the OS to open
the window.
Copying a file in a computer to a disc
Once you install DirectCD included in the supplied CD-ROM into your computer, 5 Move the driver, “Adaptec UDF Volume Access” from the window
opened in step 3 to the “System Folder” folder in the window
you can drag and drop the desired file to the disc. To view the image using this opened in step 4 (drag and drop).
camera, the file name format must be as follows, “DSC0ssss.JPG”.
For details, see “Image file storage destinations and image file names” (page 43). 6 When “Put these items into the Extensions folder?” appears, click
“OK.”
Before disconnecting the USB cable 7 Restart your computer.
Before disconnecting the USB cable, you must carry out the operation for
removing the disc. This operation is described in “Removing the disc” of the
software operating instructions of DirectCD. Viewing images
The data in the disc may be broken if you do not carry out this operation.
Refer to the procedure below. 1 Start up your computer and insert the disc into the CD-ROM drive
of your computer.
40 41
1-9
2 Double click the disc folder. Image file storage destinations
3 Double-click the desired data file. and image file names
For the detailed folder and file names, see “Image file storage destinations and
image file names” (page 43). Image files recorded with your camera are grouped in folders by recording mode.
The meanings of the file names are as follows. ssss stands for any number
Desired file Double-click in this order within the range from 0001 to 9999.
type
Still image “DCIM” folder t “100MSDCF” folder t Image file E.g., for Windows Me users (The drive recognizing the camera
is “E.”)
Moving image* “MSSONY” folder t “MOML0001” folder t Image file
Audio* “MSSONY” folder t “MOMLV100” folder t Audio file
Clip Motion “DCIM” folder t “100MSDCF” folder t Image file Folder containing still image recorded in
image
B Playback
normal mode, TEXT mode image and Clip
E-mail image “MSSONY” folder t “IMCIF100” folder t Image file Motion image data
Tiff image
(uncompressed)
Folder containing E-MAIL mode and TIFF
mode image data
∗ Copying a file to the hard disk of your computer before viewing is recommended. If you
play back the file directly from the disc, the image and sound may break off.
Folder containing moving image data
Folder containing VOICE mode audio data
Folder File Meaning

100MSDCF DSC0ssss.JPG • Still image file recorded normally
• Still image file recorded in
— E-MAIL mode (page 59)
— TIFF mode (page 62)
— VOICE mode (page 60)
CLP0ssss.GIF • Clip Motion file recorded in NORMAL
mode (page 64)
CLP0ssss.THM • Index image file of Clip Motion file
recorded in NORMAL mode
MBL0ssss.GIF • Clip Motion file recorded in MOBILE
mode (page 64)
MBL0ssss.THM • Index image file of Clip Motion file
recorded in MOBILE mode
TXT0ssss.GIF • Still image file recorded in TEXT mode
(page 61)
TXT0ssss.THM • Index image file of still image file
recorded in TEXT mode
42 43
Advanced operations
Folder File Meaning
IMCIF100 DSC0ssss.JPG • Small-size image file recorded in E-
Before performing advanced
MAIL mode (page 59) operations
DSC0ssss.TIF • Uncompressed image file recorded in
TIFF mode (page 62) This section describes the basic control methods that are frequently used for
MOML0001 MOV0ssss.MPG • Moving image file recorded normally “Advanced operations.”
MOMLV100 DSC0ssss.MPG • Audio file recorded in VOICE mode
(page 60)
The numerical portions of the following files are the same. How to use the mode dial
—A small-size image file recorded in E-MAIL mode and its corresponding image file
—An uncompressed image file recorded in TIFF mode and its corresponding image file The mode dial switches the function which is used for recording, playback, or
—An audio file recorded in VOICE mode and its corresponding image file editing. The SET UP position changes the settings of infrequently-used items
—An image file recorded in TEXT mode and its corresponding index image file (page 84). Set the dial as follows before starting to operate your camera.
—An image file recorded with Clip Motion and its corresponding index image file
Tip
A
M
S
The digital still camera saves recorded images as digital data. The format of the SCN
Before performing advanced operations
UP ET
saved data is called as the file format. The formats that can be used with this S
camera are as follows: : To record still images, VOICE memos

S: To record in the shutter speed priority mode
JPEG format
A: To record in the aperture priority mode
Most digital still cameras, operating systems of computers, and browser software M: To record with the shutter speed and aperture
adopt this format. This format is able to compress files without appreciable set manually
deterioration. However, if the image is compressed and saved on repeated SCN: To record in the SCENE SELECTION mode
occasions, the image will deteriorate. This camera records still images using the SET UP: To display the setup items
JPEG format for normal recording. : To record moving images or Clip Motion
images
GIF format : To play back or edit images
Using this format, the image will not deteriorate even if the image is compressed
and saved on repeated occasions. This format limits the number of colors to 256
colors. This camera records still images using the GIF format in Clip Motion
(page 64) or TEXT mode (page 61).
TIFF format
Stores shooting images without compression, so the image does not deteriorate.
Most of operating systems and applications correspond to this format. This camera
records still images using the TIFF format for the TIFF mode (page 62).
MPEG format
This format is very typical for moving images. This camera records audio using
the MPEG format for the moving images recording and the VOICE mode
(page 60).
44 45
1-10
How to use the control button 2 When the mode dial is set to Example: SET UP
SET UP or :
1 Press v/V/b/B on the control
When the menu or setup screen is displayed, the control button is used to select the button to select the item or
buttons, images and menu items displayed on the LCD screen of your camera and setting you want to set up.
modify the settings. The operation methods that are frequently used for “Advanced The selected setting turns
operations” are described below. yellow. DELETE PROTECT PRINT SLIDE
2 Press the center z to enter the OK
item.
DELETE PROTECT PRINT SLIDE

OK
When the mode dial is set to Example:

, S, A, M, SCN, or :

Press v/V/b/B on the control
Turning on/off the operation buttons (menu) on the LCD screen button to select the setting of the
item. ONE PUSH
AUTO
The selected setting turns yellow, IN DOOR
OUT DOOR
and the setup is complete. WHITE BAL ISO MODE
Press MENU to display/clear the

menu on the LCD screen.
DELETE PROTECT PRINT SLIDE
OK
Menu
Setting up the items in the setup or menu
1 Set the mode dial to SET UP so that the setup screen appears, or
press MENU so that the menu appears.
46 47
How to use the jog dial 3 Press the jog dial.

The value number turns to yellow. To adjust the value, repeat step
2.
The functions which are used frequently are set up using the jog dial and the
following direct buttons. The jog dial is used to change the value in manual
adjustments.
Viewing the next/previous image using the jog dial during playback
FOCUS* When viewing an image in single-image mode (page 72), you can easily view the
** next/previous image by turning the jog dial.
Mode dial (S, A, M)
Menu settings
Menu items that can be modified differ depending on the positions of the mode dial.
The LCD screen shows only the items you can operate at the moment. Initial settings
are indicated with x.
When the mode dial is set to /S/A/M/SCN

∗ This button is available when the mode dial is set to , S, A, M, SCN, or .
∗∗ This button is available when the mode dial is set to , S, A, SCN, or .
Item Setting Description
WB ONE PUSH Sets the white balance (page 68).
(WHITE x AUTO
1 Press FOCUS or , or set the mode dial to S, A, or M.
BAL) IN DOOR
2 Turn the jog dial to select the item or value OUT DOOR
number you want to adjust. ISO 400 Selects the ISO film speed. When recording
• When the indication b at the right end on the LCD 200 under dark situations or recording a fast-moving
screen is in yellow, you can select the item. In such subject, use a high-number setting. When you
100
cases, go to step 3. Yellow record high-quality images, use a low-number
x AUTO
setting (except when the mode dial is set to
M
449
SCN).
0.8m
+2.0EV
F5.6
MVC-CD200 Selects the image size when recording still
60 (IMAGE x 1600×1200 images (page 53).
SIZE) 1600 (3:2)
1024×768
640×480
• When the value number at the right end on the
MVC-CD300
LCD screen is in yellow, you can adjust the value. M
449
(When you press FOCUS, the 9 mark appears on 0.6m x 2048×1536
+2.0EV
value number position.) F5.6
60
2048 (3:2)
When you adjust only the value, the adjustment is 1600×1200
complete. 1280×960
640×480
Yellow
48 49
1-11
Item Setting Description Item Setting Description
x FINE Records still images in the fine image quality PFX SOLARIZE Sets the image special effects (page 69).
(P. QUALITY) mode. (P. EFFECT) B&W
STANDARD Records still images in the standard image SEPIA
quality mode. NEG.ART
MODE TIFF Records a TIFF (uncompressed) file in addition x OFF
(REC to the JPEG file (page 62).
MODE) TEXT Records a GIF file in black-and-white (page 61). When the mode dial is set to ([MOVING IMAGE] is set to
VOICE Records an audio file (with a still image) in
[CLIP MOTION] in the setup settings.)
addition to the JPEG file (page 60). Item Setting Description
E-MAIL Records a small-size (320×240) JPEG file in WB ONE PUSH Sets the white balance (page 68).
addition to the selected image size (page 59). (WHITE x AUTO
EXP BRKTG Records three images with the exposure value of BAL) IN DOOR
(MVC-CD300 each image shifted a little (page 63). OUT DOOR
only) x NORMAL Selects the Clip Motion image size (page 53).
BURST (MVC- Records three images continuously (page 59). (IMAGE MOBILE
CD300 only) SIZE)

x NORMAL Records an image using the normal recording ± HIGH Makes the flash level higher than normal.
mode. (FLASH x NORMAL Normal setting.
LEVEL)
± HIGH Makes the flash level higher than normal. LOW Makes the flash level lower than normal.
(FLASH x NORMAL Normal setting.
LEVEL) PFX SOLARIZE Sets the image special effects (page 69).
LOW Makes the flash level lower than normal. (P. EFFECT) B&W
PFX SOLARIZE Sets the image special effects (page 69). SEPIA
(P. EFFECT) B&W NEG.ART
SEPIA x OFF
NEG.ART +2 to –2 Adjusts the sharpness of the image.
x OFF (SHARPNESS) The indicator appears (except when the
+2 to –2 Adjusts the sharpness of the image. setting is 0).
(SHARPNESS) The indicator appears (except when the
setting is 0). When the mode dial is set to
When the mode dial is set to ([MOVING IMAGE] is set to
DELETE OK Deletes the displayed image (page 77).
[MPEG MOVIE] in the setup settings.)
CANCEL Cancels deleting of the image.
PROTECT – Protects images against accidental erasure
WB ONE PUSH Sets the white balance (page 68). (page 78).
(WHITE x AUTO
BAL) IN DOOR PRINT – Marks the print mark on still images (page 81).
OUT DOOR
320 (HQ) Selects the MPEG image size when recording
(IMAGE 320×240 moving images (page 53).
SIZE) x 160×112
50 51

Setting the image size (IMAGE SIZE)
SLIDE* INTERVAL Sets the slide show interval.
x 5 sec/10 sec/30 sec/1 min
REPEAT A slide show can be repeated for up to approx.
20 minutes. 1
x ON/OFF
START Starts the slide show.
CANCEL Cancels the slide show.
RESIZE* MVC-CD200 Changes the recorded image size (page 80). 3
1600×1200 Control button
1024×768
640×480
CANCEL 2
MVC-CD300
2048×1536
1600×1200 1 Set the mode dial to , S, A, M, SCN, or .
1280×960
640×480 2 Press MENU.

CANCEL The menu appears.
ROTATE* – Rotates the still image (page 75). 3 Select the desired image size with v/V on the control button from
[ ] (IMAGE SIZE).
∗ Only in single-image mode.
Still image sizes:
MVC-CD200: 1600×1200, 1600 (3:2)*, 1024×768, 640×480
MVC-CD300: 2048×1536, 2048 (3:2)*, 1600×1200, 1280×960, 640×480
∗ The image is recorded in the ratio of three to two to fit the printing paper size. Using this
image size, the margin of an image is not printed out. However, the slight amount of the
upper and lower black portions are displayed on the LCD screen.
Moving image (MPEG movie) sizes:
320 (HQ)*, 320×240, 160×112
∗ High Quality mode
Moving image (Clip Motion) sizes:
MOBILE (80×72), NORMAL (160×120)
52 53
1-12
The number of images* or the time** that you can record on a disc B Various recording To release AE LOCK
MVC-CD200 MVC-CD300 Carry out one of the followings:
Recording with the • Press AE LOCK again after step 2.
Image size Quality Image size Quality • Release your finger from the shutter
STANDARD FINE STANDARD FINE
exposure fixed (AE button after step 3.
LOCK) • Press down the shutter button in step
1600×1200 Approx. Approx. 2048×1536 Approx. Approx. 81 Mode dial: /S/A/SCN
237 132 147 4.
1600 (3:2) Approx. Approx. 2048 (3:2) Approx. Approx. 81 Once you press AE LOCK, the
237 132 147 exposure, now captured, is fixed. For
instance, this function is convenient in
1024×768 Approx. Approx. 1600×1200 Approx. Approx. the following use:
500 321 237 132
Measure the exposure of the desired
640×480 Approx. Approx. 1280×960 Approx. Approx. portion of the subject using the spot
1300 663 349 197 light-metering function and fix its
320 (HQ) Approx. 355 (15) sec ** 640×480 Approx. Approx. exposure value by pressing AE LOCK.
1300 663 Then, recompose the picture.
320×240 Approx. 1420 (60) sec **
320 (HQ) Approx. 355 (15) sec **
160×112 Approx. 5400 (240) sec ** 3, 4
MOBILE Approx. 1430 320×240 Approx. 1420 (60) sec ** 1
160×112 Approx. 5400 (240) sec **
NORMAL Approx. 560 2
MOBILE Approx. 1430
NORMAL Approx. 560
B Various recording
∗ When MODE (REC MODE) is set to NORMAL.
∗∗ The numbers in parentheses indicate the maximum recording time in continuous recording 1 Set the mode dial to , S, A,
or SCN.
Note
The number of images recordable on a disc may decrease depending on conditions. 2 Target the subject that has
desired exposure value, then
Tip press AE LOCK.
The size of the image is indicated by the pixel unit. The higher the number of pixels, the more The exposure is fixed and the AE-
information is included. So, an image that is saved using a large number of pixels is suitable L mark appears.
for a large-format print and one that is saved using a smaller number of pixels is suitable for
attaching to an E-mail. Normally, an image is recorded in the ratio of four to three to fit the 3 Target the subject you want
monitor ratio. This camera can also record the image in the ratio of three to two to
to record and press and hold
accommodate the most common printing paper size. This is the same ratio as the one used in
the shutter button halfway
photo-developing shops.
down.
The focus is automatically
adjusted.
4 Press down the shutter

button.
2048×1536 2048 (3:2)
54 55
Note
Aperture priority mode Manual exposure mode
Recording with the If the setting is not appropriate in aperture
manual adjustments Once the aperture is adjusted manually, You can manually adjust the shutter priority mode, shutter speed priority mode,
the shutter speed will be automatically speed and aperture values to achieve or manual exposure mode, the setting value
Mode dial: S/A/M indicator on the LCD screen flashes when
adjusted to the suitable value to attain the desired shooting condition
the shutter button is pressed halfway down.
correct exposure according to the according to your purpose. The You can record in this setting, we, however,
Shutter speed priority mode brightness of the subject. As selecting exposure value appears on the LCD recommend that you adjust the flashed-
a narrow aperture, the lens iris opens. screen (page 67). And you can also value again.
Once the shutter speed is adjusted Using a narrow aperture, you can adjust this value according to your
manually, the aperture will be record a subject with its background taste. 0 EV is the most suitable value
automatically adjusted to the suitable unclear. And using a wide aperture, set by the camera.
value to attain correct exposure you can record both the subject and the
according to the brightness of the background stand out clearly.
subject. Using the higher shutter speed,
you can record a fast-moving subject
1
with its motion frozen. And using the 2–5
lower shutter speed, you can record the
1
flow motion of a moving subject. 2
1
2
1 Set the mode dial to M.
1 Set the mode dial to A. 640 FINE M

449
B Various recording
+1.0EV
2 Select an aperture value with F5.6
60
the jog dial, then press the
jog dial.
1 Set the mode dial to S. The aperture value can be selected
from F2.8 to F11 (MVC-CD200)
2 Select a shutter speed with or from F2 to F8 (MVC-CD300) 2 Select the aperture value
the jog dial, then press the by 1/3 step. indication with the jog dial,
jog dial. then press the jog dial.
The shutter speed can be selected
from 8'' to 1/800 (MVC-CD200) or 3 Select the aperture value with
8'' to 1/1000 (MVC-CD300) by 1/3 the jog dial, then press the
step. jog dial.
4 Select the shutter speed

value indication with the jog
dial, then press the jog dial.
5 Select the shutter speed

value with the jog dial.
For details on available values, see
“Shutter speed priority mode” on
page 56, or “Aperture priority
mode” on page 56.
56 57
1-13
To cancel the SCENE
Recording images SELECTION function Recording three Recording still
according to shooting Set the mode dial to , S, A, M, SET images continuously images for e-mail (E-
conditions (SCENE UP, , or . (BURST) (only for MAIL)
SELECTION) Notes MVC-CD300) Mode dial: /S/A/M/SCN
Mode dial: SCN • You can focus only on distant subjects in Mode dial: /S/A/M/SCN
LANDSCAPE mode. In the E-MAIL mode, a small-size
This camera has preset three SCENE • Set the forced flash when you use the This mode is used for a continuous image which is suitable for e-mail
flash in the following modes: transmission is also recorded at the
SELECTION modes. Each mode is —TWILIGHT mode recording. Press the shutter button in
suitable for the following situations; this mode, the camera records three same time as recording a normal still
—LANDSCAPE mode
night scene, landscape, and portrait. • When using the SCENE SELECTION images continuously. image. (The size of the normal still
mode, the AF illuminator (page 25) emits image is set using [ ] (IMAGE
in the following conditions: 4 SIZE) in the menu settings (page 53).)
1, 4 —TWILIGHT mode: when the flash mode
is set to the forced flash mode
1 4
—PORTRAIT mode: when the subject is 1
2, 3 under dark situations 3
• When the LANDSCAPE mode is selected,
the AF illuminator cannot be used.
2 3
2
Tip
1 Set the mode dial to SET UP. Under normal recording conditions, the
camera automatically makes various
1 Set the mode dial to , S, A,
The setup screen appears. M, or SCN. 1 Set the mode dial to , S, A,
adjustments, such as those for the focus,
M, or SCN.
2 Select [ ] (CAMERA) with iris, exposure, and white balance, as it 2 Press MENU.
B Various recording
v/V, [SCENE SELECTION] shoots. However, you may not be able to
with B/v/V, then press B. carry out your desired shooting
The menu appears. 2 Press MENU.
The menu appears.
depending on shooting conditions. The 3 Select [MODE] (REC MODE)
3 Select the desired setting, SCENE SELECTION function provides with b/B, [BURST] with v/V. 3 Select [MODE] (REC MODE)
then press z. you with near-optimum adjustments to with b/B, [E-MAIL] with v/V.
suit your shooting situation. 4 Record the image.
TWILIGHT mode 4 Record the image.
You can record the subject without
losing the dark atmosphere of the To return to normal
surroundings. We recommend that recording mode The number of images that you can
you use a tripod to prevent camera- Select [NORMAL] with v/V in step 3. record on a disc in E-MAIL mode
shake as the shutter speed is set
Notes MVC-CD200
slow in this mode.
• You cannot use the flash in this mode. Image size Quality
LANDSCAPE mode • During recording in this mode, the image
is not displayed on the LCD screen. Make STANDARD FINE
Focuses only on a distant subject to
the composition before pressing the shutter 1600×1200 Approx. Approx.
record landscapes, etc. button. 216 126
• The recording interval is approximate 0.6
PORTRAIT mode second. 1600 (3:2) Approx. Approx.
Suits for portrait recordings. • The shutter speed more than 1'' cannot be 216 126
Backgrounds blurred away, and the selected in BURST mode. 1024×768 Approx. Approx.
frontward person is sharpened. 416 285
4 Set the mode dial to SCN. 640×480 Approx. Approx.
The selected setting is loaded. 855 524
58 59
MVC-CD300 Image size Quality

Image size Quality Adding audio files to Recording text
STANDARD FINE
still images (VOICE) documents (TEXT)
STANDARD FINE Mode dial: /S/A/M/SCN 1024×768 Approx. Approx. Mode dial:
2048×1536 Approx. Approx. 369 262
138 79 In the VOICE mode, the audio is also 640×480 Approx. Approx. The TEXT mode is suitable for
recorded at the same time as recording 677 451 recording a document to emphasize its
2048 (3:2) Approx. Approx.
a still image. You can vividly record character by the black and white
138 79
the situation with audio. MVC-CD300 colors. The LCD screen also turns to
1600×1200 Approx. Approx. black and white, and the image is
216 126 Image size Quality
4 recorded in the GIF format.
1280×960 Approx. Approx. 1 STANDARD FINE
306 182 2048×1536 Approx. Approx. 4
133 77 1
640×480 Approx. Approx. 3
855 524 2 2048 (3:2) Approx. Approx.
133 77 3
To return to normal 1600×1200 Approx. Approx. 2
recording mode 203 121
Select [NORMAL] with v/V in step 3. 1 Set the mode dial to , S, A,
M, or SCN. 1280×960 Approx. Approx.
280 172 1 Set the mode dial to .
2 Press MENU.
The menu appears. 640×480 Approx. Approx. 2 Press MENU.
677 451 The menu appears.
3
B Various recording
Select [MODE] (REC MODE)

∗ When recording 5-second audio. 3 Select [MODE] (REC MODE)
with b/B, [VOICE] with v/V.
with b/B, [TEXT] with v/V.
4 Record the image. To return to normal
If you press and release the recording mode 4 Record the image.
shutter button, sound is Select [NORMAL] with v/V in step 3.
recorded for five seconds.
If you hold down the shutter The number of images that you can
button, sound is recorded until record on a disc in TEXT mode*
you release the shutter button for MVC-CD200
up to 40 seconds.
Image size
1600×1200 Minimum 330
The number of images that you can
record on a disc in VOICE mode* 1600 (3:2) Minimum 361
1024×768 Minimum 618
MVC-CD200
640×480 Minimum 974
Image size Quality
STANDARD FINE MVC-CD300
1600×1200 Approx. Approx. Image size

203 121 2048×1536 Minimum 221
1600 (3:2) Approx. Approx. 2048 (3:2) Minimum 244
203 121
1600×1200 Minimum 330
60 61
1-14
Image size MVC-CD300
Recording still Image size Quality Recording three
1280×960 Minimum 462
images as images with the
640×480 Minimum 974 STANDARD FINE
uncompressed files exposure shifted (only
∗ The maximum number of recordable 2048×1536 Approx. Approx.
(TIFF) 12 11
for MVC-CD300) (EXP
images depends on the document
condition, such as the amount of text
Mode dial: /S/A/M/SCN BRKTG)
2048 (3:2) Approx. Approx. Mode dial: /S/A/M/SCN
portions. Records the images without 14 13
compression, so the image does not The camera continuously records three
To return to normal deteriorate. Images recorded in this To return to normal images with each exposure value
recording mode mode are suitable for printing with a recording mode shifted. The exposure compensation
Select [NORMAL] with v/V in step 3. high-quality image. The JPEG value can be set between ±1.0 EV from
Select [NORMAL] with v/V in step 3.
(compressed) format image is also the correct exposure value by 1/3 EV.
Notes recorded with the TIFF format image. Notes
• If the subject is not evenly illuminated, you 7
• JPEG images are recorded in the image
may be unable to record a clear image. 4 size selected by the [ ] (IMAGE SIZE) 1, 4
• Reading and writing data takes more time 1
than normal image recording. menu (page 53). TIFF images are recorded
in [1600×1200] (MVC-CD200) or
• When the mode dial is set to M or SCN,
[2048×1536] (MVC-CD300) size other 2, 3, 6
the image may be bleached out or may be 3 than when [1600 (3:2)] (MVC-CD200) or 5
turned black.
• The number of recordable images is the
2 [2048 (3:2)] (MVC-CD300) is selected.
same regardless of whether [ ] (P. • Writing data takes more time than in
normal recording.
QUALITY) is set to [STANDARD] or 1 Set the mode dial to SET UP.
[FINE]. 1 Set the mode dial to , S, A, The setup screen appears.
B Various recording
M, or SCN.
2 Select [ ] (CAMERA) with
2 Press MENU. v/V, [BRACKET STEP] with
The menu appears. B/v/V, then press B.
3 Select [MODE] (REC MODE) 3 Select the desired bracket
with b/B, [TIFF] with v/V. step value with v/V, then
press z.
4 Record the image. ±1.0EV: Shifts the exposure value
by plus or minus 1.0EV.
±0.7EV: Shifts the exposure value
The number of images that you can by plus or minus 0.7EV.
record on a disc in TIFF mode ±0.3EV: Shifts the exposure value
MVC-CD200 by plus or minus 0.3EV.
Image size Quality 4 Set the mode dial to , S, A,
M, or SCN.
STANDARD FINE
1600×1200 Approx. Approx. 5 Press MENU.
20 19 The menu appears.
1600 (3:2) Approx. Approx. 6 Select [MODE] (REC MODE)
22 21 with b/B, [EXP BRKTG] with
v/V.
7 Record the image.
62 63
To return to normal ∗ When recording 10 frames per Clip

recording mode Creating Clip Motion 6 Record the image for the first Motion file
frame.
Select [NORMAL] with v/V in step 6. Files ∗∗ When recording 2 frames per Clip
Mode dial: 60min 160 Motion file
2/10
Notes Notes
• You cannot use the flash in this mode. Clip Motion is an animation function
MAKING “CLIP MOTION” • Reading and writing data takes more time
• During recording, the image is not that plays back still images in than normal image recording.
displayed on the LCD screen. Make the succession. The images are stored in • Due to the limitations of the GIF format,
composition before pressing the shutter GIF format, which is convenient for the number of colors for Clip Motion
button. creating home pages or attaching Before carrying out step 8, the images is reduced to 256 colors or less.
• Focus and white balance are adjusted
against the first image and this setting is
images to an e-mail. images are temporarily stored in Therefore, the picture quality may
deteriorate for some images.
also used for the other images. memory. These images are not
• When the exposure is manually adjusted, 6, 7 recorded on the disc, yet.
• The file size is reduced in MOBILE mode,
1, 3 so the picture quality deteriorates.
the adjusted value is used for the center
• GIF files not created on this camera may
value. 7 Record the image for the next
not be displayed correctly.
• The recording interval is approximate 0.6 frame.
second.
2, 5, 8 Image recording can be repeated
• All the frame images are immediately
4 recorded on the disc if the mode dial is
up to the maximum number of switched or the power is turned off.
recordable frames.
1 Set the mode dial to SET UP. 8 Press z.

The setup screen appears. All the frame images are recorded
on the disc.
v/V, [MOVING IMAGE] with B/
B Various recording
To delete some of the frame

v/V, [CLIP MOTION] with v/V,
then press z. images or all the frame
images
3 Set the mode dial to . 1 Press b (7) in step 6 or 7.
The recorded frame images are
4 Press MENU. played back in turn.
The menu appears. 2 Press MENU, and select [DELETE
5 Select the desired mode from LAST] or [DELETE ALL], then
[ ] (IMAGE SIZE) with v/V. press z.
3 Select [OK] with v/V, then press
NORMAL (160×120)
z.
Clip Motion of up to 10 frames can
When [DELETE LAST] is selected
be recorded.
in step 2, each time you repeat
This is suitable for use on home
steps 1 – 3, the recorded frame is
pages, etc.
deleted from the newest one.
MOBILE (80×72)
The number of Clip Motion frames
Clip Motion of up to 2 frames can
that you can record on a disc
be recorded.
This is suitable for use with Image size
portable data terminals. NORMAL (160×120) Approx. 560*
MOBILE (80×72) Approx.
1430**
64 65
1-15
Tip
Setting the distance Recording images in Adjusting the Normally, the camera automatically
to the subject macro exposure adjusts the exposure. If the color of the
Mode dial: /S/A/M/SCN/ Mode dial: /S/A/M/SCN/ (EXPOSURE) image is too dark or bright as illustrated
Mode dial: /S/A/SCN/ below, we recommend that you adjust the
Normally the focus is automatically The macro recording is used when exposure manually. When recording a
adjusted. This function is useful when zooming up a little subject, such as Adjusts the exposure value which is set backlighted subject or a subject in the
the auto focus does not work well such flowers, insects. snow, set it toward +, and when recording
in the automatic adjustment.
as in dark places. a dark subject with fully displayed on the
LCD screen, set it toward –.
1 1 Set the exposure
1 3 toward +
3 2
2
2
1 Set the mode dial to , S, A, 1 Set the mode dial to , S, A,

1 Set the mode dial to , S, A, M, SCN, or . SCN, or .
M, SCN, or .
2 Press the control button B 2 Press .
2 Press FOCUS. ( ) with the menu cleared.
The focus is fixed and the 9 The (macro) indicator appears 3 Select the desired exposure Set the exposure
(manual focus) indicator appears. on the LCD screen. value with the jog dial. toward –
With the zoom set to the W side, Adjust the exposure value while
B Various recording
3 Turn the jog dial to select the you can shoot a subject that is checking the brightness of the
desired focus setting. about 3 cm (1 3/16 inch) (MVC- background. You can select values
You can select from 15 focus CD200) or 4 cm (1 5/8 inch) ranging from +2.0 EV to -2.0 EV
settings (unit: m) including the 9 (MVC-CD300) away from the lens in steps of 1/3 EV.
position: surface in macro mode.
0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.5, 0.8, 1.0, 1.5, 2, 3,
5, 7, 10, 15, and ∞ (infinity) Note
To return to normal If a subject is under extremely bright or dark
recording mode situations, or the flash is used, the exposure
To reactivate auto focusing adjustment may not be effective.
Press the control button B ( ) again.
Press FOCUS again and the focal point The indicator disappears.
information disappears.
Note
Notes You cannot record images in macro with the
• Focal point information may not LANDSCAPE mode of the SCENE
completely show the correct distance. Use SELECTION function.
the information as a guide.
• The focus preset does not work properly
when attaching a conversion lens.
• If you shoot a subject within 0.5 m
(19 3/4 inches) with the zoom is set to the
T side, you may not get a clear focus. In
such cases, the focal point information
flashes. Press the zoom W button until the
indicator stops flashing.
66 67
To shoot in one-push white Tip

Adjusting the white balance mode The image is susceptible to lighting
Enjoying picture
balance (WHITE 1 Select [ONE PUSH]. The conditions. The image looks blue under effects (P. EFFECT)
BALANCE) indicator appears. sunlight in the summer, and looks red Mode dial: /S/A/M/SCN/
Mode dial: /S/A/M/SCN/ 2 Shoot a white object such as paper under mercury lamps. Human eyes can
full under the same situation you resolve these problems. However, the You can digitally process images to
Normally, the white balance is camera cannot resolve the problem by obtain special effect.
will shoot.
making adjustments. Normally, the
automatically adjusted (AUTO). When 3 Press v . camera adjusts it automatically, but, if the
you record with the shooting condition The indicator flashes quickly. image appears in strange colors, we
fixed or under the specific lighting When the white balance has been recommend that you change the white 1
condition, you can manually adjust the adjusted and stored in the memory, balance mode.
white balance. the indicator stops flashing. 3
2
To reactivate auto adjustment
1 Select [AUTO] with v/V in step 3.
3 Notes 1 Set the mode dial to , S, A,

• Select [AUTO] when shooting with M, SCN, or .
2 fluorescent lighting.
• The indicator means: 2 Press MENU.
Slow flashing: white balance is not set or The menu appears.
was not able to be set.
Quick flashing: white balance is being 3 Select [PFX] (P. EFFECT) with
M, SCN, or .
adjusted (after you press v).
b/B, the desired mode with
v/V.
B Various recording
Lit steady: white balance has been set.

2 Press MENU.
• If the indicator keeps flashing even SOLARIZE
The menu appears.
when you press v, record in automatic The light contrast is clearer and the
3 Select [WB] (WHITE BAL) white balance mode. picture looks like an illustration.
with b/B, the desired setting
with v/V. B&W
The picture is monochrome (black
ONE PUSH ( ) and white).
Adjusting the white balance SEPIA
depending on the light source The picture is sepia-toned like an
AUTO (No indicator) old photograph.
Adjusts the white balance NEG.ART
automatically The color and brightness of the
IN DOOR (n) picture are reversed as in a
• Places where the lighting negative.
condition changes quickly OFF
• Under bright lighting such as Does not use the picture effect
photography studios function.
• Under sodium or mercury lamps
OUT DOOR ( ) To cancel PICTURE EFFECT

Recording a sunrise/sunset, night Select [OFF] with v/V in step 3.
scene, neon signs, or fireworks
68 69
1-16
Notes
Recording the date • If you select [DATE] in step 3, the date is Using the Spot light-
and time on the still imposed onto the image in the order metering function
selected with “Setting the date and time”
image (DATE/TIME) (page 14).
Mode dial: /S/A/M/SCN/
Mode dial: /S/A/M/SCN • The date and time are not superimposed
Use this function when there is
onto Clip Motion images.
backlight or when there is strong
5 contrast between the subject and the
1, 4 background, etc.
2, 3

Press to activate the spot light-
v/V, [DATE/TIME] with B/v/V,
then press B. metering function. Position the point
you want to record at the spot light-
3 Select the date and time metering cross hair.
setting with v/V, then press
z. LCD screen
B Various recording
DAY & TIME
Imposes the date, hour, and
minute.
DATE
Imposes the year, month, and day. Spot light-
metering
OFF cross hair
Does not impose the date and time.
M, or SCN.
5 Record the image.

The date and time do not appear on
the LCD screen during shooting.
These appear during playback
only.
2001 7 4
70 71
B Various playback • Triple-image screen Tip

When the triple-image screen is
Enlarging a part of the
Playing back three or displayed, pressing MENU opens the still image (Zoom and
nine images at once menu including [PRINT], [PROTECT], trimming)
APERTURE VALUE: F2.5 and [DELETE]. For details on items, see Mode dial:
Mode dial: SHUTTER SPEED: 1/125
EXPOSURE VALUE: 0.0 pages 77, 78, and 81. To close the menu,
press MENU again. The menu disappears
You can display multiple images on the 100-0005 2001 7 4 10:30PM and the recording information is
LCD screen at one time using the SINGLE DISPLAY
indicated. 1
zoom buttons. The image indicated by the yellow 3
frame in the index screen is
displayed in the middle of the
4
1 triple-image screen with the
recording information. To display
2 the other information, press v/V.
The following marks are displayed 1 Set the mode dial to .
on each image according to the
image type and settings. 2 Display the image to be
: Moving image file enlarged.
1 Set the mode dial to .
: VOICE mode file
2 Press the zoom W/T buttons : E-mail file 3 Zoom in the image with the
repeatedly. : Print mark zoom T button.
The LCD screen display changes - : Protect mark
as follows: TEXT: TEXT file 4 Press v/V/b/B repeatedly to
• Single (single-image) screen TIFF: TIFF file select the desired portion of
CLIP: Clip Motion file the image.
1600 (No mark): Normal recording (no v: The image moves downward
1/10
settings) V: The image moves upward
B Various playback
b: The image moves rightward

B: The image moves leftward
To display the next
100-0001 2001 7 4 10:30PM
FILE BACK/NEXT VOLUME (previous) index screen
W T Press v/V/b/B. To return to the normal size
Press z.
• Index (nine-image) screen To return to normal playback
(single-image) To record an enlarged image
• Press the zoom T button repeatedly. (trimming)
• Press z. 1 Press MENU after zooming.
2 Select [TRIMMING] with B, then
Note press z.
SINGLE DISPLAY
When viewing an image recorded in Clip 3 Select the image size with v/V,
Motion or TEXT mode on the index screen, then press z.
W T the image may appear different from the The image is recorded and the
actual image. image on the LCD screen returns
to the normal size after recording.
72 73
1-17
Notes To cancel the SLIDE SHOW
• Zoom scaling is up to 5× regardless of the Playing back the still setting Rotating a still image
original image size. images in order Select [CANCEL] with v/V in step 3, (ROTATE)
• The quality of enlarged images may be
(SLIDE) then press z. Mode dial:
deteriorated.
• The original data is left even if you enlarge Mode dial:
To stop the SLIDE SHOW You can rotate the image recorded in
the image.
• The enlarged image is recorded as the This function is useful for checking the playback portrait orientation and display it in
newest file. recorded images or for presentations, landscape orientation.
Press z, select [EXIT] with B, then
• If you trim an image, the disc space will be etc. press z.
decrease.
• If the disc space is not sufficient, you may
To skip to the next/previous 1
be unable to trim an image.
• Moving images cannot be enlarged. 1 image during the SLIDE
• The still images recorded in TEXT mode SHOW 3, 4
can be enlarged, but these images cannot 3, 4 Select b/B at the lower-left on the 2
be trimmed. LCD screen.
2
Note
The interval setting time may vary
depending on the image size.
1 Set the mode dial to , and
1 Set the mode dial to . display the image to rotate.
2 Press MENU. 2 Press MENU.

The menu appears. The menu appears.
3 Select [SLIDE], then press z. 3 Select [ROTATE] with b/B,

then press z.
Set the following items.
INTERVAL 4 Rotate the image clockwise
You can select from 1 min (one or counterclockwise ,
B Various playback
minute), 30 sec (30 seconds), then select [OK] with v/V,
10 sec (10 seconds), or 5 sec then press z.
(5 seconds).
REPEAT To cancel rotation
ON: Plays back images in a Select [CANCEL] with v/V in step 4,
continuous loop (The slide show then press z.
stops in approximately 20
minutes*). Notes
OFF: After all images have been • You cannot rotate protected or
played back, the slide show ends. uncompressed images, or images recorded
in TEXT mode.
∗ The slide show does not end until all • You may not be able to rotate images
the images are played back, even if it recorded with other equipment.
takes more than 20 minutes. • Also, when viewing images on a computer,
the image rotation information may not be
4 Select [START], then press z. reflected depending on the application
The slide show begins. software.
• If you rotate an image, the disc space will
decrease.
not be able to rotate an image.
74 75
B Editing In index mode

Viewing images on a
TV screen Deleting images
Mode dial:
(DELETE)
Before connecting your camera, be Mode dial: 1
sure to turn off the TV.
Protected images cannot be deleted. 3–5
Set the TV/VIDEO 2, 5
switch to
In single-image or triple-
“VIDEO”.
image mode
1 Set the mode dial to , then

display the index screen with
1 the zoom W button.
A/V 2
connecting
cable 2, 4, 5 2 Press MENU.
The menu appears.
3
to A/V OUT (MONO) 3 Select [DELETE] with b/B,
jack then press z.
1 Connect the A/V connecting 4 Select [ALL] or [SELECT]
with b/B, then press z.
cable to the A/V OUT (MONO) 2 In single-image mode:
jack of your camera and to Display the image you want to
the audio/video input jacks of delete with b/B.
the TV. In triple-image mode:
If your TV has stereo type input Press the zoom W button twice to
jacks, connect the audio plug turn to the triple-image mode.
(black) of the A/V connecting Display the image you want to
cable to the Lch jack. delete with b/B.
2 Turn on the TV and start
3 Press MENU.
playback on your camera.
B Editing
The playback image appears on the The menu appears.

TV screen.
4 Select [DELETE] with b/B in
single-image mode, or with
Notes v/V in triple-image mode,
then press z.
• You cannot use a TV that has an antenna
(aerial) connector only.
• When viewing a still image on the TV, the 5 Select [OK] with v/V, then
black band may appear around the image. press z.
The image (or the middle-
positioned image in triple-image
mode) is deleted.
76 77
1-18
5 When you select [ALL] In index mode 5 When you select [ALL]
Preventing accidental
Select [ENTER] with b/B, then Select [ON] with b/B, then press
press z. erasure (PROTECT) z.
All the unprotected images are Mode dial: All the images in the disc are
deleted. 1 protected.
Protects images against accidental
When you select [SELECT] erasure. When you select [SELECT]
The frame of the selected image
3–5 The frame of the selected image
turns green. In single-image or triple- 2, 5 turns green.
1 Select the image to be deleted image mode 1 Select the image to be protected
with v/V/b/B, then press z. with v/V/b/B, then press z.
To cancel, press z again. To cancel, press z again.
Repeat this step to select other
Repeat this step to select other
display the index screen with
images. 1 the zoom W button. images.
The (delete) indicator 2 The - indicator appears on
appears on the selected images. 2 Press MENU. the selected images.
2, 4 The menu appears.
3
3 Select [PROTECT] with b/B,
then press z.
4 Select [ALL] or [SELECT]
SET MENU TO NEXT
with b/B, then press z. SET MENU TO NEXT
2 Press MENU.
2 In single-image mode
Display the image you want to 2 Press MENU.
3 Select [OK] with b/B, then protect with b/B. 3 Select [OK] with b/B, then
press z. In triple-image mode press z.
Press the zoom W button twice to
turn to the triple-image mode.
To cancel deleting Display the image you want to To release protection
Select [CANCEL] with b/B in step 4 protect with b/B. If you selected [ALL] in step 4, select
or [EXIT] with b/B in step 5, then
[OFF] with b/B, then press z. If you
press z. 3 Press MENU. selected [SELECT] in step 4, select the
B Editing
The menu appears. image to be unprotected with v/V/b/
Notes
• When using a CD-R, even if you delete B, then press z. Repeat this step to
4 Select [PROTECT] with b/B in select other images. Press MENU and
images, the disc remaining space does not single-image mode, or with
increase. v/V in triple-image mode, select [OK] with b/B, then press z.
• Only when using a CD-RW, the disc then press z.
remaining space increases after deleting Notes
The displayed image (or the
the last-recorded image if the is • If you protect an image, the disc space will
indicated on the LCD screen before
middle-positioned image in triple- decrease. Also, if you release protection,
deleting. If you modify an image, or open image mode) is protected. The - the disc space will decrease.
and close the disc cover, will (protect) indicator appears on the • If the disc space is not sufficient, you may
disappear. image. not be able to protect an image.
not be able to delete an image.
• If the lower four-digit file number of an To release protection
image is the same as the number of the Press z again in step 4. The -
selected image, that image also will be indicator disappears.
deleted.
78 79
Notes To unmark the print mark

Changing the • When you change from a small size to a Selecting still images Press z again in step 4. mark
recorded still image large size, the picture quality deteriorates. to print (PRINT) disappear.
• The original image is retained even after
size (RESIZE) resizing.
Mode dial:
Mode dial: • You cannot change the size of images In index mode
You can mark a print mark on still
recorded in TEXT mode, moving images,
You can change the image size of the uncompressed images, or Clip Motion images recorded with your camera.
recorded image. images. This mark is convenient when you
• The resized image is recorded as the have images printed at a shop that
newest file. conforms with the DPOF (Digital Print 1
• If you resize an image, the disc space will Order Format) standard.
1 decrease.
3 – 5, 7
In single-image or triple- 2, 6
3, 4 not be able to resize an image. image mode
2

1 display the index screen with
1 Set the mode dial to , then 2 the zoom W button.
display the image of which
you want to change the size. 2, 4 2 Press MENU.
3 The menu appears.
2 Press MENU.
The menu appears. Select [PRINT] with b/B, then
3
press z.
3 Select [RESIZE] with b/B, 1 Set the mode dial to .
then press z. Select [SELECT] with b/B,
2 In single-image mode 4
then press z.
4 Select the desired size with Display the image you want to When marking the mark, you
v/V, then press z. print with b/B. cannot select [ALL].
MVC-CD200: 1600×1200, In triple-image mode The frame of the selected image
1024×768, 640×480 Press the zoom W button twice to turns green.
MVC-CD300: 2048×1536, turn to the triple-image mode.
B Editing
1600×1200, 1280×960, 640×480 Display the image you want to

print with b/B.
5 Select the image to be
The resized image is recorded. marked with v/V/b/B, then
press z.
3 Press MENU. To cancel, press z again.
To cancel changing the size The menu appears. Repeat this step to select other
Select [CANCEL] with v/V in step 4, images. The mark appears on
4 Select [PRINT] with b/B in the selected image.
then press z. single-image mode, or with
v/V in triple-image mode,
then press z.
The (print) mark is marked on
the displayed image (or the
middle-positioned image in triple-
image mode). SET MENU TO NEXT
80 81
1-19
Notes
6 Press MENU. Formatting a CD-RW • When you format, be sure to use a fully
The menu appears. charged battery pack or the AC power
When deleting all the images in the adaptor as the power source.
7 Select [OK] with b/B, then CD-RW or using the CD-RW • CD-Rs cannot be formatted.
press z. formatted with other equipment than • The disc which is formatted using other
this camera, format the CD-RW. When equipment than this camera cannot be used
with this camera. Format the disc again
you format a CD-RW, all data stored
To unmark selected print with this camera.
on the disc will be deleted. Check the • It takes about seven minutes to execute the
marks contents of the disc before formatting. format.
Select the image to be unmarked in The initialization is also executed after • About 300 times formatting can be
step 5 with v/V/b/B, then press z. the format. available on a CD-RW.
• Once you format the CD-RW, protected
To unmark all the print images are also deleted.
marks 2
Select [ALL] with b/B in step 4, then 1
press z. Select [OFF] with b/B, then
press z.
3–5
The marks on all images are
unmarked.
To cancel marking the print

mark 1 Insert only the CD-RW you
want to format.
Select [CANCEL] with b/B in step 4,
then press z, or select [EXIT] with b/
B in step 7, then press z.
Notes
• You cannot mark moving images, Clip 3 Select [ ] (DISC TOOL) with
Motion images or images recorded in
v/V, [FORMAT] with B/v/V,
then press B.
TEXT mode.
• If you mark an image recorded in TIFF
mode with a print mark, only the 4 Select [OK] with v/V, then
press z.
B Editing
uncompressed image is printed, and the
JPEG image recorded at the same time is “FORMAT PLACE ON LEVEL
not printed. SURFACE” appears on the LCD
• If you mark an image with a print mark, screen.
the disc space will decrease. Also, if you
unmark the print mark, the disc space will Select [OK] with v/V, then
decrease.
5
press z.
not be able to mark an image with a print
mark.
To cancel formatting
Select [CANCEL] with v/V in step 3,
then press z.
82 83
SETUP 1
Changing the setup settings (SET UP) Item Setting Description
Set the mode dial to SET UP. The setup screen appears. You can set up the following FILE NUMBER SERIES Assigns numbers to files in sequence even if
items with the control button. the disc is changed.
x RESET Resets the file number that starts from 0001
DISC TOOL each time the disc is changed.
Item Setting Description CONVERSION ON Set to [ON] when using the VCL-MHG07
FINALIZE OK Finalizes a disc (page 32). LENS (MVC- conversion lens (not supplied). At this time,
CD300 only) the zoom function does not work. Also, note
CANCEL Cancels the finalization. that the VAD-S70 adaptor ring needed to
FORMAT OK Formats a CD-RW (page 82). mount the conversion lens to your camera is
not sold in some countries and regions.
CANCEL Cancels formatting of the CD-RW.
x OFF
INITIALIZE OK Initializes a disc (page 18).
/ x ENGLISH Displays the menu items in English.
CANCEL Cancels the initialization. LANGUAGE /JPN Displays the menu items in Japanese.
UNFINALIZE OK Unfinalizes a CD-RW (page 34).
CLOCK SET OK Sets the date and time (page 14).
CANCEL Cancels the unfinalization.
CANCEL
CAMERA
When [CONVERSION LENS] is set to [ON]:
Item Setting Description • The SCENE SELECTION and zoom functions are not activated.
SCENE x TWILIGHT Selects the SCENE SELECTION mode that • When the mode dial is set to S or M, the iris value can be selected only from F4 or more.
SELECTION is assigned to the SCN position (page 58). • The focus preset is not activated.
LANDSCAPE • The macro recording is not activated.
PORTRAIT
MOVING x MPEG MOVIE Records the MPEG movie (page 26). SETUP 2
IMAGE CLIP MOTION Records the Clip Motion. Item Setting Description
DATE/TIME DAY & TIME Sets whether to insert the date and time into LCD BRIGHT Selects the LCD brightness (page 22).
DATE the still image (page 70). BRIGHTNESS x NORMAL
x OFF DARK
B Editing
DIGITAL ZOOM x ON Uses digital zoom (page 23). LCD BRIGHT Selects the brightness of the LCD backlight.
OFF Does not use digital zoom. BACKLIGHT x NORMAL
BRACKET STEP ±1.0EV Sets the exposure plus minus value when BEEP SHUTTER Turns on the shutter sound only. (The shutter
(MVC-CD300 x ±0.7EV recording three images with each exposure sound is heard when you press the shutter
only) value shifted (page 63). button.)
±0.3EV
RED EYE ON Reduces the red-eye phenomenon (page 24).
x ON Turns on the beep/shutter sound (when you
press the control button/shutter button).
REDUCTION x OFF
OFF Turns off the beep/shutter sound.
AF x ON Uses when it is hard to focus on the subject
ILLUMINATOR OFF under dark situations (page 25). VIDEO OUT NTSC Sets the video output signal to NTSC mode
(e.g., Japan, the USA).
PAL Sets the video output signal to PAL mode
(e.g., Europe).
84 85
1-20
Item Setting Description Additional information Cleaning the camera surface
Clean the camera surface with a soft
USB CONNECT PTP Switches the USB mode (page 35). cloth slightly moistened with water,
Precautions
x NORMAL then wipe the surface dry. Do not use
The set is not disconnected from the any type of solvent such as thinner,
DEMO x ON This is activated only when using the AC
power adaptor. [DEMO] is set to [STBY] at AC power source (mains) as long as it alcohol or benzene as this may damage
OFF is connected to the wall outlet, even if the finish or the casing.
the factory and the demonstration starts
about 10 minutes after you have set the the set itself has been turned off.
After using your camera at the
mode dial to , S, A, M, or SCN. To seashore or other dusty locations
cancel the demonstration, turn off the power. Clean your camera carefully.
On handling the camera
Otherwise, the salty air may corrode
Do not carry the camera by holding the metal fittings or dust may enter the
the disc cover inside of your camera, causing a
malfunction.
On operating temperature
Your camera is designed for use
between the temperatures of 0°C to
40°C (32°F to 104°F). Recording in
extremely cold or hot places that
Do not touch the rotating disc
exceed this range is not recommended.
This may cause serious injuries.
On moisture condensation
On pickup lens cleaning
If the camera is brought directly from a
When the pickup lens is dirty and the
cold to a warm location, or is placed in
camera cannot read any image, clean
a very damp room, moisture may
the pickup lens using a commercially
condense inside or outside the camera.
available blower.
Should this occur, the camera will not
operate properly.
Moisture condensation occurs
easily when:
• The camera is brought from a cold
location such as a ski slope into a
Pickup warmly heated room.
Additional information
lens • The camera is taken from an air-
conditioned room or car interior to
the hot outdoors, etc.
On cleaning How to prevent moisture
condensation
Cleaning the LCD screen When bringing the camera from a cold
Wipe the screen surface with a place to a warm place, seal the camera
cleaning cloth (not supplied) or an in a plastic bag and allow it to adapt to
LCD cleaning kit (not supplied) to conditions at the new location over a
remove fingerprints, dust, etc. period of time (about an hour).
86 87
If moisture condensation occurs • Do not place the unit in locations that

On the built-in rechargeable
Turn off the camera and wait about an are: lithium battery On discs
hour for the moisture to evaporate. — Extremely hot or cold
Note that if you attempt to record with — Dusty or dirty Your camera is supplied with a built-in Be sure to use only 8 cm CD-Rs/CD-
moisture remaining inside the lens, you rechargeable lithium battery installed RWs. You cannot read or write data on
— Very humid
will be unable to record clear images. so as to retain the date and time, etc., other type discs that do not correspond
— Vibrating to this camera.
regardless of the setting of the POWER
switch. The built-in rechargeable
On pickup lens On battery pack lithium battery is always charged as On cleaning
Do not touch the pickup lens inside the long as you are using your camera. The
• Use only the specified charger with battery, however, will get discharged • Do not clean a disc using a cleaner
disc cover. And do not open the disc
the charging function. gradually if you do not use your before recording. Use a
cover except when inserting or
removing a disc to keep dust out. • To prevent accident from a short camera. It will be completely commercially available blower to
circuit, do not allow metal objects to discharged in about one month if you remove dust.
come into contact with the battery do not use your camera at all. Even if • If fingerprints, dust, drop of water, or
On AC power adaptor terminals. the built-in rechargeable lithium oil makes the recordable side (the
• Keep the battery pack away from fire. battery is not charged, it will not affect other side of the printed side) of a
• Unplug the unit from the wall outlet • Never expose the battery pack to the camera operation. To retain the
(mains) when you are not using the disc dirty, the camera may not
temperatures above 60°C (140°F), date and time, etc., charge the battery if properly record an image on the disc.
unit for a long time. To disconnect such as in a car parked in the sun or the battery is discharged.
the power cord (mains lead), pull it You should handle a disc with a lot of
under direct sunlight. care.
out by the plug. Never pull the power Charging the built-in rechargeable
• Keep the battery pack dry. lithium battery: • If a disc does become dirty, wipe it in
cord (mains lead) itself.
• Do not expose the battery pack to any • Connect your camera to house a straight line from center to edge
• Do not operate the unit with a
mechanical shock. current (mains) using the AC power with a soft dry cloth or a soft cloth
damaged cord (mains lead) or if the
unit has been dropped or damaged. • Do not disassemble nor modify the adaptor supplied with your camera, lightly moistened with a mild
battery pack. and leave your camera with the detergent solution. You can use a
• Do not bend the power cord (mains
• Attach the battery pack to the camera power turned off for more than 24 commercially available CD cleaner.
lead) forcibly, or place a heavy object
on it. This will damage the cord securely. hours.
(mains lead) and may cause fire or • Charging while some capacity • Or install the fully charged battery
electrical shock. remains does not affect the original pack in your camera, and leave your
• Prevent metallic objects from coming battery capacity. camera with the power turned off for
into contact with the metal parts of more than 24 hours.
the connecting section. If this
happens, a short may occur and the If any problem occurs, unplug your
unit may be damaged. camera and contact your nearest Sony
• Always keep metal contacts clean. dealer.
• Do not disassemble the unit.

• Do not apply mechanical shock or
drop the unit.
• While the unit is in use, particularly • Do not use any solvent (benzine,
during charging, keep it away from thinner, static protection product,
AM receivers and video equipment. record cleaner, etc.) to clean a disc.
AM receivers and video equipment Notes
disturb AM reception and video • Do not remove the disc while reading or
operation. writing data.
• The unit becomes warm during use.
This is not a malfunction.
88 89
1-21
• Data may be damaged if: 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz. Use a Effective use of the battery pack
— You remove the disc or turn off the commercially available AC plug About “InfoLITHIUM” • Battery performance decreases in
power while reading or writing data. adaptor [a], if necessary, depending on low-temperature surroundings. So,
— You use the camera in a location subject
battery pack
the design of the wall outlet (mains) the time that the battery pack can be
to the effects of static electricity or
[b]. What is the “InfoLITHIUM” battery used is shorter in cold places. We
noise.
• Do not attach any material on the surface
pack? recommend the following to use the
of a disc. This causes a nonuniform The “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack is a battery pack longer:
rotating speed and this may cause a AC-L10A/L10B/L10C lithium-ion battery pack that has — Put the battery pack in a pocket
malfunction of the camera. functions for communicating close to your body to warm it up,
• You can write only on the label surface of a information related to operating and insert it in your camera
disc. When you write, use only a felt-tip conditions between your camera and immediately before you start
marker and do not touch it until it is in dry the AC power adaptor. taking shots.
state, and do not heat it. Do not use a Watching the playback picture on The “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack
sharp-pointed tool, such as a ballpoint pen. TV • Frequently operating the zoom wears
calculates the power consumption out the battery pack faster.
• Hold a disc at the edges while pressing the If you want to view the playback
center hole lightly. Do not touch the according to the operating conditions • Be certain to turn the POWER switch
picture on a TV, you need a TV having of your camera, and displays the
recordable side (the other side of the a video input jack and a video to off when not taking shots or
printed side) of a disc. remaining battery time in minutes. playing back on your camera.
connecting cable.
The color system of the TV must be Charging the battery pack • We recommend having spare
the same as that of your digital still • Be sure to charge the battery pack batteries handy for two or three times
camera. Check the following list: before you start using your camera. the expected shooting time, and make
• We recommend charging the battery a trial shots before taking the actual
NTSC system shots.
pack in an ambient temperature of
Bahama Islands, Bolivia, Canada, • Do not expose the battery pack to
between 10°C to 30°C (50°F to 86°F)
Central America, Chile, Columbia, water. The battery pack is not water-
until the /CHG lamp goes out,
Ecuador, Jamaica, Japan, Korea, resistant.
indicating that the battery pack is
Mexico, Peru, Surinam, Taiwan, the
• When you carry or store a disc, put it in its fully charged. If you charge the
Philippines, the U.S.A., Venezuela, etc. Remaining battery time indicator
case. battery pack outside of this
• If the power goes off although the
• Do not strike, bend or drop a disc, or rub PAL system temperature range, you may not be
battery remaining indicator indicates
the edge of a disc. Australia, Austria, Belgium, China, able to efficiently charge the battery
• Do not store a disc in the following
that the battery pack has enough
Denmark, Finland, Germany, Great pack.
locations: power to operate, charge the battery
Britain, Holland, Italy, Kuwait, • After charging is completed, either pack fully again so that the indication
—In dusty or dirty places
Malaysia, New Zealand, Norway, disconnect the AC power adaptor on the battery remaining indicator is
—Under direct sunlight
—Near heaters
Portugal, Singapore, Spain, Sweden, from the DC IN jack on your camera correct. Note, however, that the
—In dump places Switzerland, Thailand, etc. or remove the battery pack. correct battery indication sometimes
• If you play back the disc on which any will not be restored if it is used in
PAL-M system
image has not been recorded using a CD- high temperatures for a long time or
ROM drive, the CD-ROM drive may
Brazil
left in a fully charged state, or the
malfunction or the disc may be scratched. PAL-N system battery pack is frequently used.
Argentina, Paraguay, Uruguay Regard the remaining battery time
SECAM system indication as the approximate
Using your camera Bulgaria, Czech Republic, France, shooting time.
abroad Guiana, Hungary, Iran, Iraq, Monaco,
Poland, Russia, Slovak Republic,
Power sources Ukraine, etc.
You can use your camera in any
country or area with the supplied
battery charger within 100 V to
90 91
• The E mark indicating there is little

remaining battery time sometimes Troubleshooting
flashes depending on the operating
conditions or ambient temperature If you experience trouble with your camera, first check the following items. Should
and environment even if the your camera still not operate properly after you have made these checks, press the
remaining battery time is 5 to 10 reset button located on the bottom. (If you press the reset button, the date and time
minutes. setting is cleared.) Should your camera still not operate properly, consult your Sony
dealer or local authorized Sony service facility. If code displays (C:ss:ss)
How to store the battery pack appear on the LCD screen, the self-diagnosis display function is working
• Even if the battery pack is not used (page 102).
for a long time, store it in a dry, cool
place after fully charging it once per
year and then using the battery pack Symptom Cause and/or Solution
up on your camera. This is to
maintain the battery pack’s functions. Your camera does not • You are not using an “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack.
• To use the battery pack up on your
work. t Use an “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack (page 9).
camera, leave the POWER switch to • The disc is not inserted properly.
on in mode until the power goes t Eject the disc, and insert it again (page 16).
off without a disc inserted. • The battery level is too low. (The E indicator
appears.)
Battery life
• The battery life is limited. Battery t Charge the battery pack fully (page 10).
capacity decreases little by little as • The AC power adaptor is not connected securely.
you use it more and more, and as t Connect it securely to the DC IN jack and a wall
time passes. When the battery outlet (mains) (page 10, 13).
operating time is shortened • The malfunction occurs inside the camera.
considerably, a probable cause is that t Turn off the power, and turn on after one
the battery pack has reached the end minute, then check that the camera works
of its life. Please buy a new battery properly.
pack. Your camera cannot • The mode dial is set to or SET UP.
• The battery life varies according to record images. t Set it to , S, A, M, SCN, or (pages 20,
how it is stored and operating 26).
conditions and environment for each
• No disc is inserted into your camera.
battery pack.
t Insert a disc (page 16).
• The disc has not been initialized.
t Initialize the disc (page 18).
92 93
1-22
Symptom Cause and/or Solution Symptom Cause and/or Solution
The picture is out of focus. • Your camera is not in macro recording mode when The flash does not work. • The flash is set to .
you shoot a subject that is about 3 to 50 cm t Set the flash to (no indication) or (page 24).
(1 3/16 to 19 3/4 inches) (MVC-CD200) or about 4 • The mode dial is set to , SET UP, or
to 50 cm (1 5/8 to 19 3/4 inches) (MVC-CD300) (MPEG MOVIE).
away from the lens. t Set it to , S, A, M, SCN, or (CLIP
t Set the macro recording mode (page 66). MOTION).
t Press the zoom W button repeatedly. • The camera is in one of the following SCENE
• The LANDSCAPE mode of the SCENE SELECTION modes: TWILIGHT or
SELECTION function is selected. LANDSCAPE.
t Cancel the function. t Cancel the SCENE SELECTION function or set
• The focus preset is selected. the flash to (page 24, 58).
t Cancel the function. • [MODE] (REC MODE) is set to [EXP BRKTG] or
• [CONVERSION LENS] is set to [ON] in the setup [BURST] (MVC-CD300 only) in the menu
settings (MVC-CD300 only). settings.
t Set it to [OFF] (page 85). t Set it to the other modes.
The resizing function does • You cannot resize moving images, text images, Clip The date and time are • The date and time are not set correctly.
not work. Motion images, and uncompressed images. recorded incorrectly. t Set the correct date and time (page 14).
You cannot display a print • You cannot display print marks on moving images, Vertical streaks appear • This is called the smear phenomenon. This is not a
mark. text images and Clip Motion images. when you are shooting a malfunction.
The picture is noisy. • Your camera is placed near a TV or other
very bright subject. t Set the exposure toward – (page 67).
equipment that uses strong magnets. The zoom does not work. • [CONVERSION LENS] is set to [ON] in the setup
t Move your camera away from the TV, etc. (MVC-CD300 only) settings.
The picture is too dark. • You are shooting a subject with a light source t Set it to [OFF] (page 85).
behind the subject. • The zoom cannot be used when recording a moving
t Adjust the exposure (page 67). image with [MOVING IMAGE] set to [MPEG
• The brightness of the LCD screen is too low. MOVIE].
t Adjust the brightness of the LCD screen Digital zoom does not • The digital zoom cannot be used when recording a
(page 22). function. moving image with [MOVING IMAGE] set to
[MPEG MOVIE].
• [DIGITAL ZOOM] is set to [OFF].
t Set [DIGITAL ZOOM] to [ON] in the menu
settings (page 23).
The image is in • You shot the image in TEXT mode.
monochrome. t Cancel the TEXT mode (page 61).
• [PFX] (P. EFFECT) is set to [B&W] in the menu
settings.
t Cancel the B&W mode (page 69).
94 95
Symptom Cause and/or Solution Symptom Cause and/or Solution

The image cannot be • The disc has not been finalized. The TEXT mode • The subject is not under even lighting situations.
played back on the CD- t Finalize the disc (page 32). recording cannot be t Change lighting.
ROM drive of your • An error occurs during recording by vibration. properly done. • The mode dial is set to S, A, M, or SCN.
computer.
t Possibly, you may be able to play back images if t Set it to .
you connect the camera to your computer with Your computer does not • The battery level is low.
the USB cable. recognize your camera. t Use the AC power adaptor (page 13).
• The CD-ROM drive does not correspond to the
• The camera is turned off.
packet-write system or does not conform to the
MultiRead type. t Turn on the camera.
t Consult the computer or the CD-ROM drive • The USB cable is not connected firmly.
manufacturer. t Disconnect the USB cable, and connect it again
• Causes not described above are occurred. firmly. Make sure that “USB MODE” is
displayed on the LCD screen (page 38).
t Consult the computer or software manufacturer.
• The USB connectors on your computer are
Your camera cannot delete • The disc is not initialized. connected to other equipment besides the keyboard,
an image. t Initialize the disc (page 18). the mouse, and your camera.
• The disc space is not sufficient. t Disconnect the USB cables except for the ones
t This is not a malfunction. connected to the keyboard, the mouse, and your
• The image is protected. camera.
t Cancel the protection (page 78). • The USB driver is not installed.
The power turns off • If you do not operate the camera for about three
t Install the USB driver (page 38).
suddenly. minutes while the power is on, the camera turns off • [USB CONNECT] is set to [PTP] in the setup
automatically to prevent wearing down the battery settings.
pack. t Set it to [NORMAL] (page 86).
t Turn on the camera. • Since the camera is connected to a computer with
• The battery pack is discharged. the USB cable before installing the USB driver, the
drive is not recognized by the computer.
t Replace it with a fully charged battery pack.
t Delete the drive which is not recognized, then
The image does not • The [VIDEO OUT] setting of your camera is install the USB driver. For details, see the
appear on the TV screen. incorrect. procedure below.
t Change the setting (page 85).
The SLIDE SHOW • The SLIDE SHOW function stops after about Reinstall the USB driver when using Windows 98, Windows
function stops 20 minutes. 98SE, Windows Me and Windows 2000 Professional
automatically. t To continue the slide show, select [START] Perform all steps without skipping.
again (page 74). 1 Turn on your computer and allow Windows to load.
The macro function does • [SCENE SELECTION] is set to [LANDSCAPE] in
not work. the setup settings. 2 Connect the USB jack on the camera and the computer with the
supplied USB cable.
t Cancel the SCENE SELECTION function
(page 58). 3 Insert a disc.
• [CONVERSION LENS] is set to [ON] in the setup
settings (MVC-CD300 only). 4 Connect the AC power adaptor to your camera and then to a wall
t Set it to [OFF] (page 85). outlet (mains), and turn on the power of your camera.
96 97
1-23
5 Open “Device Manager” on Windows. Symptom Cause and/or Solution
For Windows 98, Windows 98SE and Windows Me users: The indication of the • You are using the camera for many hours under
1 Open [Control Panel] from [ My Computer], then double-click [System]. battery remaining time is extremely hot or cold temperatures.
not proper, or the power is • The battery pack is dead.
2 “System properties” is displayed. Click the [Device Manager] tab located at immediately turned off t Replace the battery pack with a new one
the top. even if the battery (page 9).
remaining indicator
• The battery level is too low.
3 Click [ CD Mavica] in [ Other devices], then click the [Delete (E)] indicates that the battery
button located at the lower-right corner. level is sufficient. t Install the fully charged battery pack (page 9,
10).
For Windows 2000 Professional users: • A deviation has occurred in the remaining battery
* Log in with the permission of administrator. time.
1 Open [Control Panel] from [ My Computer], then double-click [System]. t Charge the battery pack fully (page 10).
The /CHG lamp flashes • A malfunction has occurred in the battery pack.
2 “System properties” is displayed. Click the [Hardware] tab located at the top, when charging a battery t Contact your Sony dealer or local authorized
then click the [Device Manager (D)] button. pack. Sony service facility.
3 Click [View] in [Device Manager], then click [Devices by type (E)]. The /CHG lamp does • The AC power adaptor is not connected.
not light up when charging t Connect the power cord firmly to a wall outlet
4 Right-click [ CD Mavica] in [ Other devices], then click [Delete (E)]. a battery pack. (mains) (page 10).
• The battery pack is not installed properly.
6 After the message appears to verify that you delete the device
t Install it properly (page 9).
manager, click “OK.”
• Charging of the battery pack is complete.
7 Turn off the camera, disconnect the USB cable, and restart the
No function works though •—
computer.
the power is on. t Remove the battery pack, then install it again
8 Install the USB driver in the supplied CD-ROM to the computer after about one minute. If the function still do
following the procedure on page 38. not work, press the reset button located on the
bottom using a sharp-pointed object. (If you
press the reset button, the date and time setting
is cleared.)
Battery packs
Symptom Cause and/or Solution

The battery pack cannot • The power of the camera is turned on.
be charged. t Turn off the power of the camera (page 10).
The battery life is short. • You are recording/playing back images under
extremely cold temperatures.
• The battery pack is not charged enough.
t Charge the battery pack fully.
• The battery pack is dead.
t Replace the battery pack with a new one.
98 99
Message Meaning
Warning and notice messages
E The battery level is too low.
Various messages appear on the LCD screen. Check the corresponding descriptions
CAN NOT UNFINALIZE A CD-R or the disc that is not finalized is
in the following list. inserted.
CAN NOT FORMAT A CD-R is inserted.
Message Meaning
FORMAT ERROR The disc that is formatted using other
LENS CAP ATTACHED The lens cap is attached. equipment than this camera is inserted.
COVER OPEN The disc cover is opened. TURN THE POWER OFF AND ON A malfunction occurs on the lens (MVC-
NO DISC No disc is inserted. AGAIN CD300 only).
DRIVE ERROR There is trouble with the disc drive or the The amount of light is not sufficient or
camera. the shutter speed is too slow.
DISC ERROR An unusable disc is inserted or there is
trouble with the disc.
DEW ERROR A moisture condensation has occurred
inside the camera.
DISC PROTECT The disc was protected with a computer.
DIRECTORY ERROR The same directory exists.
NOT ENOUGH DISC SPACE The remaining capacity of the disc is not
enough to operate other than executing
the finalization.
NOT INITIALIZED Since the disc has not been initialized,
the camera cannot record any image on
the disc.
ALREADY INITIALIZED It is not necessary to execute the
initialization, the disc was initialized.
ALREADY FINALIZED It is not necessary to execute the
finalization, the disc was finalized.
NO FILE No image is recorded on the disc.
FILE ERROR Trouble has occurred during playback.
IMAGE SIZE OVER You tried to play back images with an
image size larger than the maximum

playback size of this camera.
INVALID OPERATION You try to play back the image recorded
with other equipment.
FILE PROTECT The image is protected.
For "InfoLITHIUM" BATTERY The battery is not the “InfoLITHIUM”
ONLY type.
NOT ENOUGH BATTERY The battery level is too low to execute the
initialization or finalization.
100 101
1-24
Self-diagnosis display LCD screen indicators
Your camera has a self-diagnosis display. This
function displays the camera condition on the The indicators during recording
LCD screen with a combination of a letter and
four digits of numbers. If this appears, check the
following code chart. The code informs you of the 1 qd
camera’s current condition. The last two digits 2 qf
(indicated by ss) will differ depending on the
state of the camera. 3 qg
4 qh
Self-diagnosis display 5 120min AE-L
qj
640FINE
• C: ss: ss 6 4000 qk
You can repair the camera DATE
ISO400 5.8m
7 SOLARIZE +2.0EV ql
yourself.
8 F4.3 w;
• E: ss: ss 2000
Contact your Sony dealer or local 9 wa
authorized Sony service facility. 0 ws
qa WHITE BAL ISO MODE wd
Code Cause and/or Corrective Action
qs
C:32:ss • There is trouble with the disc drive.
t Turn the power off and on again. A Battery remaining indicator O Image size indicator
C:13:ss • A disc not compatible with this camera B Flash level indicator/Flash P Image quality indicator
is inserted or the data is broken. mode indicator
t Change the disc. (page 16) Q SCENE SELECTION indicator
C Red-eye reduction indicator
E:61:ss • A camera malfunction that you cannot R Remaining disc capacity
E:91:ss repair has occurred. D White balance indicator indicator
t Contact your Sony dealer or local E DATE indicator S Remaining number of
authorized Sony service facility and recordable images/Recording
inform them of the 5-digit F AF illuminator indicator time indicator/Self-diagnosis
indication. (example: E:61:10) G ISO number indicator function indicator
If you are unable to rectify the problem even if you try corrective actions a H Sharpness indicator T Manual adjustment indicators
few times when C:ss:ss is indicated, contact your Sony dealer or local
authorized Sony service facility. I Picture effect indicator U Self-timer indicator
J AF frame V Light amount warning indicator
K Spot light-metering cross hair W Jog dial indicator
L Menu
Pressing MENU switches the
menu on/off.
M AE/AF lock indicator
N Recording mode/Clip Motion
indicator
102 105
The indicators during still image playback The indicators during moving image playback
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 120min 160 4
120min 1600 2/5
11/12 5 00:01 5
x1.3 6
7 6
8
7
9
0 MOV00002 2001 7 4 10:30PM 8
100-0011 2001 7 4 10:30PM STOP REV/CUE VOLUME
qa 9
A Recording mode/Clip Motion A Recording mode indicator

indicator
B Image size indicator
B Image size indicator
C Image number/number of
C Image number stored images on a disc
D Number of stored images on a D Remaining disc capacity
disc indicator
E Remaining disc capacity E Time counter
indicator
F Playback image
F Print mark indicator
G Playback bar
G Protect indicator
H Menu and guide menu
H Zoom scaling indicator
I Playback/pause indicator
I Disc space recoverable B is displayed during playback,
indicator and x during stop.
J Recording date of the playback
image*
K File name*
∗ When the menu is displayed, this
indicator disappears from the screen.
106 107
1-25E
MVC-CD200/CD300
SECTION 2
DISASSEMBLY
The following flow chart shows the disassembly procedure.
2-1. LCD section (PK-58 board) PK-58 board service position
2-2. Cabinet (front) section 2-3. Lens section (CD-333/334 board)
2-4. Cabinet (front) assembly (TK-61 board),

CD-333/334, TK-61 boards service position
Control switch block (RL-503)
2-5. Battery holder (JK-208 board)
SY-67, JK-208, CD-333/334 boards and

2-6. SY-67 board Camera section check service position
MVC-CD200/CD300
2-7. Stroboscope section (Flash unit) Flash unit service position
FS-83 board and

2-8. Base unit (DDX-G2100 complete assembly) Base unit (DDX-G2100 complete assembly)
check service position
2-9. Lid CD section 2-16. Disassembling procedure of MD-083 board
2-10. Function button (FS-83 board) MD-083 board service position
Refer to level 3
2-11. Solenoid plunger (Door lock/Stroboscope),
CD lock slider
2-12. Control switch block (ZK-503), Strap shaft
2-13. Mode knob, Power spring
[CONNECTION OF THE EQUIPMENT]
Tapping CN302
screw (DIA1.7 × 5) 1
18
AC power
adaptor AC IN
1
CPC-9 jig
18 1 (J-6082-393-C)
Monitor TV 18
Adjustment remote
CPC lid commander (RM-95)
Connect the remote

commander to either one.
2-1
NOTE: Follow the disassembly procedure in the numerical order given.
2-1. LCD SECTION (PK-58 BOARD) 3 Two precision
screws (DIA 1.7 × 4)
5 PK-58
board
Upper stay assembly
Remove the CD rear lid in the
direction of the arrow A.
Remove the PK-58
8
-5
board in the direction
K
P
B of the arrow B.
8
-5
K
P
4 Precision
screw (DIA 1.7 × 4)
3 Four precision
screws (DIA 1.7 × 4) 1 Liquid crystal indicator
module (24P)
1 Two precision
screws (DIA 1.7 × 4) 2 Back light
(10P)
2 Flexible
cover (CD)
4 Precision
screw
(DIA 1.7 × 5)
1 Two precision
2 Two precision
6 CD rear
lid 3 BL retainer plate
8
-5
K
P
4 Back light
5 CPC lid Cold cathode
fluorescent tube
5 Liquid crystal
indicator module
6 Solar window
[PK-58 BOARD SERVICE POSITION] Setup before LCD section check

To facilitate the checks, set the “Internal color bar signal” mode
using the adjustment remote control before LCD section check.
PK-58 board Setting the “Internal color bar signal” mode.

1) Set the mode dial to “ ”.
2) Select page: 4, address: F1, and set data: 04.
Note: If “CLOCK SET” display appered in the screen, cancel it.
1
18 Exiting the “Internal color bar signal” mode.
1) Select page: 4, address: F1, and set data: 00.
8
-5
K
P
CPC-9 jig
(J-6082-393-C)
AC power
adaptor AC IN Adjustment remote
Liquid crystal commander ( -95)
Back light
indicator module Cold cathode
fluorescent tube
2-2
2-2. CABINET (FRONT) SECTION
9 Screw (M 2 × 4),
3 Two screws lock ace, P2
(M 2 × 3.5) 6 Screw (M 2 × 4),
lock ace, P2
4 Accessory
shoe 2 Special (step)
screw (M 2)
qf FP-369 flexible board (5P)
qg Control switch block SY
(RL-503) (6P) -67
7 Screw (M 2 × 4), 1 Open the lid

lock ace, P2 CD section
JK
-20
8
5 Screw (M 2 × 4),
qh Cabinet (front) section, lock ace, P2
Lens cabinet section,
Lens section qs FP-364 flexible
board (70P)
qa BIB retainer
qd Microphone
(2P) 8 Open the
BT lid
0 Two screws (M 2 × 4),

lock ace, P2
(CD200)
4 Two screws (M 2 × 4),

lock ace, P2
5 Lens
section
3 Ornamental ring
6 Cabinet (front) section

(CD300)
A 2 Remove the lens cabinet assembly

in the direction of the arrow A.
1 Screw (M 2 × 4),
lock ace, P2
4 Three screws (M 2 × 4),
lock ace, P2
3 Ornamental ring 5 Lens

1 Three screws (M 1.7 × 7) section
4 Lens cabinet (H) 6 Cabinet (front) section
2 Remove the lens cabinet assembly

in the direction of the arrow B.
3 LC switch
2 Filter ring 1 Screw (M 2 × 4),
lock ace, P2
2-3
2-3. LENS SECTION (CD-333/334 BOARD)
(CD200)
5 Four screws
5 CCD fitting adaptor (CL)
4 Four claws
6 Optical filter block
7 Seal rubber (CL)
8 Remove the solderings 6 Zoom motor unit
0 CCD heat sink (M)
8 Zoom
qa CD-333 board lens
7 Focus motor unit
4 Remove the solderings

1 Spacer 1 Precision
33
screw
2 Flexible board, -3 (DIA 1.7 × 4)
(from lens section) CD
(26P) 3 Two tapping
9 CCD block screws (B 1.7 × 7.5 )
assembly 3 Lens frame (M)
2 Precision screw
(DIA 1.7 × 4)
(CD300)
6 Optical filter block

7 Seal rubber (N)
9 CCD block assembly
8 Remove the solderings 2 Lens frame (H)
3 Tapping
screw
(B 1.7 × 3.5) 3 Lens
assembly
qa CD-334 board
2 Flexible board,
(from lens section)
(6P)
34
-3
1 Flexible board, CD
(from lens section) 4 Three tapping
(16P) 5 screws
(B 1.7 × 6) 1 Three screws
(M 1.7 × 4),
0 CCD heat sink (H) lock ace, p2
2-4
2-4. CABINET (FRONT) ASSEMBLY (TK-61 BOARD),
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (RL-503)
1 Two screws
(M 1.7 × 2),
lock ace, P2
2 Two claws
6 Microphone holder
assembly
1 Two precision 7 Microphone cushion
screws
(DIA 1.7 × 4) 8 Microphone
9 Retainer
sheet
metal
4 Microphone
4 FP-370 flexible 5 Tape (A) sheet
board (5P),
LED 5 Two tapping
screws (B 1.7 × 3.5)
2 LED cap 3 Rear sheet
3 Two precision metal (upper)
screws
6 TK-61 board, (DIA 1.7 × 4)
FP-369 flexible 2 Control switch
board block (RL-503)
1 Two precision
screws
(DIA 1.7 × 4)
3 Cabinet (front) assembly
[CD-333/334, TK-61 BOARDS SERVICE POSITION]
Control switch block

(RL-503) (6P)
AC power
adaptor AC IN
FP-369 flexible SY
board (5P) -67
1 CPC-9 jig
FP-364 flexible JK
board (70P) 20-
(J-6082-393-C)
8 18
TK-61 board Adjustment remote

commander (RM-95)
(CD300)
CD-334 board (CD200)
CD-333 board
-
CD4 -
33 CD3
33
Lens block assembly

Lens block assembly
2-5
2-5. BATTERY HOLDER (JK-208 BOARD)
3
-8
5 Battery terminal FS
board (3P)
4 Remove the BT holder assembly
REMOVING THE BATTERY HOLDER

A SY
-67
8 Battery holder 6 BT holder
assembly
3 BT lid
retainer 7 Battery spring 3 Precision
screw
6 Battery terminal (DIA 1.7 × 4)
board
1 Open the
BT lid 2 Screw
(M 2 × 4),
lock ace, P2 JK
-20
8
1 Two tapping
screws 7 Two precision (CD300)
(1.7 × 3) 5 Two screws
2 BT lid
claws (DIA 1.7 × 4) 8 JK-208 board,
FP-361 flexible board
(CD200)
4 BT sheet
8 SJ sheet
0 JK-208 board,
JK
FP-361 flexible
-20 board
8
9 JK sheet
2-6. SY-67 BOARD

6 Harness
7 Precision screw (from flash unit 8P)
(DIA 1.7 × 4)
8 Four
claws Tape (A)
When attaching the connector, route A
the harnesses through the notch as B
shown while taking care so the the
harness must not be caught or pinched. MD Tape (Z)
08 -
3 2 Tape (A)
A C
C B 3 Tape (Z)
SY
-67
JK
-20
8
4 Harness (FS-139) (2P)
(strobe plunger)
5 Harness (FS-140) (2P)
0 SY-67 board, JK-208 board, (dew sensor)
1 Harness retainer FP-361 flexible board, FP-364 flexible board
9 Remove the connector
[SY-67, JK-208, CD-333/334 BOARDS AND CAMERA SECTION CHECK SERVICE POSITION]
(CD300) Control switch block
CD-334 board (RL-503) (6P)
SY-67 board
AC power
JK-208 board, adaptor AC IN
-
CD4 FP-361 flexible
33 board
- MD
Lens block assembly SY 08 -
JK8
- 67 3 CPC-9 jig
20
1
(CD200) (J-6082-393-C)
CD-333 board 18
Harness (FS-140) Adjustment remote

(2P) (dew sensor) commander (RM-95)
-
CD3
33 FP-364 flexible Extension cable
board (70P) (J-6082-487-A) (50P)
Lens block assembly When using the CD-R/RW drive unit. When using the CD-R/RW drive unit.
press S101 and S103. the dew sensor must be connected.
2-6
2-7. STROBOSCOPE SECTION (FLASH UNIT)
Note: The charging capacitor is charged to the maximum of 300V.
There is a danger of electric shock due to the high voltage when the capacitor is touched by bare hand.
Discharge the voltage remained in the capacitor, referring to the Service Note (See page 5).
3 Discharging the capacitor

Capacitor cap 4 Two precision
Short jig screws
6 Stroboscope (DIA 1.7 × 4)
cover
Capacitor 3 Stroboscope 7 Flash unit

base
5 Stroboscope
4 Sheet (UW) case assembly
2 ST-POP-UP
1 Capacitor cap spring
5 Control switch block
(ZK-503) (14P) 1 ST sensor
lever
2 Capacitor - MD
SY 08 -
- 6 7 3
JK8
20
2 Remove the stroboscope

section in the direction
of the arrow A.
1 Precision screw
(DIA 1.7 × 4)
- MD
SY 08 -
JK8
- 67 3
20
[FLASH UNIT SERVICE POSITION]
AC power AC IN
adaptor
(CD300) Control switch block
(RL-503) (6P)
CD-334 board
Flash unit
Stroboscope case assembly

-
CD4
33 Stroboscope base, ST sensor lever,
ST-POP-UP spring
Lens block assembly Control switch block

(ZK-503) (14P)
(CD200)
- MD
CD-333 board SY 08 -
- 6 7 3 1 CPC-9 jig
JK8
20 (J-6082-393-C)
- 18
CD3
33 Adjustment remote
FP-364 flexible commander (RM-95)
board (70P)
Lens block assembly
2-7
2-8. BASE UNIT (DDX-G2100 COMPLETE ASSEMBLY)
Precautions during handling 7 Remove the DDX-G2100 complete

• Do not turn the side of the optical assembly in the direction of the arrow.
lens downward. 1 Harness (FS-138) (2P)
• Hold the frame. (door look plunger)
• Do not touch the optical lens surface.
-
- SY
JK8 67
20
5 Two precision
MD screws
08 - (DIA 1.7 × 4)
3
MD
08 - 3 Harness (SF-81)
3
4 Nut plate (side)

9 MD heat sink,
MD sheet
6 Precision
8 Precision screw screw 2 Two precision
(DIA 1.7 × 4) (DIA 1.7 × 4) screws (DIA 1.7 × 4)
[FS-83 BOARD AND BASE UNIT (DDX-G2100 COMPLETE ASSEMBLY)

CHECK SERVICE POSITION]
Control switch block
(CD300) (RL-503) (6P)
CD-334 board
SY-67 board FS-83 board
JK-208 board, AC power

- adaptor AC IN
CD4 FP-361 flexible
3 3 board
-
Lens block assembly SY FS
-
67
-83
JK8
20 1 CPC-9 jig
(CD200)
(J-6082-393-C)
CD-333 board 18
Harness (FS-140) Adjustment remote

- (2P) (dew sensor) commander (RM-95)
CD3 FP-364 flexible
33 M
board (70P) 08D-
3 DDX-G2100
complete
Lens block assembly assembly
Extension cable
(J-6082-487-A) (50P)
When using the CD-R/RW When using the CD-R/RW drive unit.
drive unit. press S101 and S103. the dew sensor must be connected.
2-8
2-9. LID CD SECTION
Remove the PRE open

spring in the direction of the
FS
arrow C. -83
-
SY 1 Open the lid
67 CD section
A
3 PRE
FS
open spring 2 Remove the Parallel pin (DIA 3)
-83
-
SY
67
2 Parallel 2 Remove the lid CD section in

pin cover 5 FP-363 flexible the direction of the arrow B.
board (33P) 1 Two screws
(M 1.7 × 3), P2
1 Precision
screw
(DIA 1.7 × 4)
B
4 Flexible cover (CD)
3 Two precision FS
-83
screws -
(DIA 1.7 × 4) SY
67
2-10.FUNCTION BUTTON (FS-83 BOARD)
2 Dowel
8 Speaker
retainer 9 Speaker
5 Speaker (2P) 4 Control switch block
8 Harness (ZK-503) (14P) 7 Precision
(FS-136) (14P) screw
(DIA 1.7 × 4)
B
6 FP-363 flexible
board (33P) A
FS
-83
B
6 DC-IN
connector (3P)
4 FP-362 flexible board (11P)
7 FP-362 flexible
A board (11P)
SY 5 Harness
-67 (FS-136) (14P)
1 Three
precision 3 Remove the FS-83 board
2 FP-361 flexible screws in the direction of the arrow.
board (27P) (DIA 1.7 × 4)
9 SY-67 board JK
-20
8
3 JK-208 board
1 FP-364 flexible
board (70P)
3 Function button
2 F button spring
1 Special head screw

(M 1.7 × 3)
2-9
2-11.SOLENOID PLUNGER (DOOR LOCK/STROBOSCOPE), CD LOCK SLIDER
1 CD lock
lever spring
2 CD lock lever
2 Two precision 3 Parallel pin

(DIA 1.7 × 4)
1 CD opener
spring
3 Solenoid cover
1 Solenoid plunger (door lock),

Harness (FS-138)
#
2 CD opener
assembly
2 Four precision
screws
(DIA 1.7 × 4)
3 ST lock
cover
4 Solenoid plunger
(stroboscope), Harness (FS-139)
Spring
#
1 Remove the CD lock spring
in the direction of the arrow.
3
When attaching the solenoid plunger, route the
harnesses through the notch as shown while
taking care so that the harness must not be
caught or pinched.
2 Parallel pin
3 CD lock slider
1 CD lock spring
4 FP-248 flexible board (dew sensor) ,

Harness (FS-140)
2-10
2-12.CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (ZK-503), STRAP SHAFT
Remove the PO spring stay in 1 Open the lid

the direction of the arrow A. CD section
FS
-83
FS
-83
A PRE open 3 PO spring

spring stay
2 Two screws
(DIA 1.7 × 5.5)
Discharging the capacitor

Capacitor cap
Short jig
PRECAUTION DURING
INSTALLATION
Mode knob
retainer "S" position Capacitor
set in live A
Control switch 1 Capacitor

block (ZK-503)
s A
FS
-83
3 Dowel
4 Control switch block

(ZK-503)
5 Claw 2 Two precision
screws
6 Capacitor (DIA 1.7 × 4)
cap
3 Strap shaft
2 Strap sheet
metal (R)
FS
-83
1 Precision
screw
(DIA 1.7 × 4)
2-11
2-13.MODE KNOB, POWER SPRING
"S" position set in live A
When attaching it, coat the
2 7 Mode knob hatched portion with grease.
s
6 Dial base
A
5 Click plate
Click
plate
4 Three EG grip Rear view
screws (M 1.4 × 2.5)
Note: Perform the running-in rotation of the
click plate several times.
3 Mode knob
retainer
1 Special head screw
(M 1.7 × 3)
8 Friction spring
9 Slider ring
0 Power knob
Rear view
qa Power spring
2-12
2-14.CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION
SY-67
LD, PEARL, VIDEO OUT, SH, 16M FLASH MEMORY,
64M SDRAM, CLK GEN, CW, HI CONTROL,
AUDIO PROCESS, DC/DC CONVERTER,
FLASH UNIT
TK-61
(LENS CAP DETECT)
CD-334 (CD300)
(LENS DRIVE, CAMERA PROCESS, CCD IMAGER)
MD-083
CD-RF PROCESS, SERVO, CD, DSP,
CD-R/RW GA, MD SYSTEM CONTROL,
EFM/ENC CONTROL
PK-58
(RGB DRIVE, TIMING GENERATOR, BACK LIGHT)
FS-83
(CHARGER)
JK-208
(USB INTERFACE)
CD-333 (CD200)
2-13
2-15.FLEXIBLE BOARDS LOCATION
The flexible boards contained in the mechanism deck and that in the zoom lens are not shown.
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK

(ZK-503)
FP-362
FP-248
FP-370
FP-369

(RL-503)
FP-363
FP-361
FP-364
Disassembling procedure of Mechanism

deck (DDX-G2100 COMPLETE ASSEMBLY)
are not shown.
Pages 2-15 and 2-16 are not shown.
2-14E
MVC-CD200/CD300
SECTION 3
BLOCK DIAGRAMS
3-1. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/2) ( ) : Page No. shown in ( ) indicates the page to refer on the schematic diagram.
CD-333 BOARD (MVC-CD200) SY-67 BOARD(1/2)

CD-334 BOARD (MVC-CD300)
(4-25)
ZOOM (4-14)
LENS IRIS
(4-15) (4-16)
(SHUTTER)
IC202 12 AD DATA 12
IC301 16 DATA BUS
IC101 IC401 CCD OUT
CAMERA DSP
(MVC-CD200) (MVC-CD300) S/H,AGC,A/D CONV.
MEMORY CONTROL
CCD IMAGER 14
VIDEO ENCODER ADDRESS BUS
M002 M001 V1A,V1B,V2,

(4-14) OPD,OSD,HOST IF
(MVC-CD300) (MVC-CD200) RES CONTROL
ZOOM FOCUS V3A,V3B,V4,
MOTOR MOTOR IRIS ADDRESS
ZOOM FOCUS
METER
IRIS
METER HALL
RG,VSHT
IC201 SG,JPEG,L-MODE
AUDIO I/F IC302
M RESET
SENSOR
RESET
SENSOR
M M M H H1,H2
TIMING CAM SO,XCAM,SCK SHUTTER CONTROL
14
GENERATOR MCK12 STROBO CONTROL DATA SDRAM

64Mbit
16
IRIS CONT 1,2

IC303 MC XCS2 (4-26) MC XCS2
MC XCS6
MC XCS6
IC304
XZM RST SENS
XFC RST SENS
IC302 FOCUS
MOTOR
DRIVE
IRIS
DRIVE
SHUTTER
DRIVE
CAM SO,CAM SI,XCAM SCK
IRIS DRIVE
ZOOM
MOTOR
DRIVE
(4-11) IC301 HALL (+)
HALL AMP
HALL AD
IC101
(4-11) EXT STRB ON EXT STRB ON
(4-11,12)
EVR
IRIS EN
MSHUT ON
PE DIR 1A
PE DIR 1B
PE DIR 0A
PE DIR 0B
MSHUT ON
IC201
IRIS EN
PE EN1
PE EN0
(4-24) Y
IRIS EN
PE EN 0,1
VIDEO OUT
PE DIR 0A,1A C
PE DIR 0B,1B
VIDEO AMP
CONTINUED ON
MSHUT ON
XZM RST SENS
XFC RST SENS
(4-28) (SEE PAGE 3-3)
(MVC-CD300)
AU SDTO AU SDTO
AU SDTI AU SDTI
DIR 0B
MSHUT ON IC103 Y
IC104 CAM SO,CAM SI,XCAM SCK

R-Y
TK-61 BOARD IC105 STB ON

B-Y
VD,HD
FP-370 S502
(MVC-CD300)
IRIS PRE-DRIVE
(FLEXIBLE) LENS CAP

SW
XLENS OPEN
(4-24)
PRE LAMP CAM SO,CAM SI,XCAM SCK
Q501
LED PRE LAMP AF ON

DRIVE
SYSTEM CONTROL SIG
(SEE PAGE 4-18) (SEE PAGE 4-18)

TG CLK
IC901 MC CLK
AU CLK
CLOCK
BT901 FS-83 BOARD(1/2) GENERATOR USB CLK
LCD901
BATTERY
TERMINAL (SEE PAGE 4-57)
(4-32)
PK-58 BOARD(1/2)
BATT SIG VD,HD IC401 2.5INCH
LCD
FAST CHARGE TIMING PANEL
GENERATOR
BATT/XEXT
S SYS DD ON (4-69)
LCD DD ON
Y R
Q001,002
CAM DD ON IC301 R-Y IC302 G
EVR B-Y LCD B
DRIVE
(4-41) (4-67) (4-68)

J901
DC IN IC001 D 3.4V
CAM 15V
IC201,202 BL HIGH ND901
BACK LIGHT
BL UNREG
CAM P5V BACK LIGHT DRIVE
DC/DC
CONVERTER CW D 4.6V
A 4.9V
F002
CAM -7.5V (4-71,72)
F004 CAM 3.1V
D 3.4V
A 3.4V
D 1.8V
PANEL -15.3V
PANEL 13.2V
PANEL 6.5V
FLASH UNIT
PANEL 4.9V (SEE PAGE 4-39)
STB CHARGE FLASH
(MVC-CD300) UNIT
CAM 5V
ST UNREG
S401
F001 STRB POPUP FLASH
CW UNREG OPEN/CLOSE
F003
ACV UNREG
BL UNREG Q703,704 PL901

F005
ST UNREG STB PLUNGER PLUNGER STROB
F006 DRIVE PLUNGER
BATT UNREG
16
3-1 3-2
MVC-CD200/CD300
3-2. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/2) ( ) : Page No. shown in ( ) indicates the page to refer on the schematic diagram.
OPTICAL
MD-083 BOARD BASE UNIT DEVICE
SY-67 BOARD(2/2)
(4-33)
FMDT,FMCK FMDT,FMCK
(DDX-G2100)
PH901
IC154 IC414 ENCEFM
IC207 EQ EFM LD LASER
DRIVE DIODE
IC155 DATA
CD-R/RW
DATA BUS 16 BUS
SWITCH
16
ATAP1
CD-R 8 IC408 GA
SWDT,SDCK
IC013
ENC/DEC
16 16 16 EFM ENC A-H PD
BUFFER
CONTROL DRAM CD-R/RW
12 RF IC
(4-50) PROCESS
ADDRESS BUS 3 3 (4-53)
ADDRESS
HCS0,1
24 12 17
MDATA,BCLK,LRCK
20 8
IC201 RF AC
FRONT
(4-54) (4-46) MONITOR
CD
DSP
FE,TE
IC501 IC504 IC503 AUDIO
OAC
MC CAM
SDRAM
64Mbit
FLASH ROM
16Mbit
8 8
(4-49) IC014 IC001
SH DSP FOCUS
DATA BUS FOCUS COIL
(4-29) (4-31) (4-31) SERVO
FOCUS/
MC XCS2 TRACKING
MC XCS6 MC XCS3 MC XCS0 DRIVE
TRACKING TRACKING
ADDRESS BUS SERVO (4-47) COIL
(4-32)
IC019
IC505 17 16 16
EVR
IC005
20
EEPROM
(D/A CONV) SLED
SERVO SLED M
IC401 IC406 IC404 (4-48)
DRIVE
(4-47) M902
SLED
SYSTEM MOTOR
SRAM EEPROM
CONTROL(MD)
USB D+/D- OUT (4-52) (4-52) (4-51)

CAM SO,CAM SI,XCAM SCK USB D+/D- IN IC003
Q412,416
SPINDLE
SERVO SPINDLE M
DRIVE
DOOR LOCK
(4-47) M901
DRIVE
SPINDLE
MOTOR
(4-48)
HI SO,HI SI,XHI SCK
EXT STRB ON
DOOR LOCK
CONTINUED ON
(SEE PAGE 3-2) DEW SENS
DEW SENSOR
S001 FS-83 BOARD(2/2)
(SEE PAGE 4-57)
KEY AD0,AD1,AD2,AD3 KEY AD0 CONTROL
XPOWER ON BUTTON
IC402 DIAL A,B
MODE DIAL
XPB ON S002
MODE CONTROL XSET UP KEY AD1
(4-36) XSHTR ON MENU SW
XAE LOCK ON
IC401 LANC SIG LANC SIG
J101
LANC IN
LANC OUT LANC
I/O ACC
(4-61)
RESET
HALL AD (4-35) USB D+/D- OUT

IC101 CN102
S301,303,304,306,307 PK-58 BOARD
XLENS OPEN ACV UNREG USB D+/D- IN D+,D- KEY AD2 FUNCTION
PRE LAMP AF ON
BACK UP VCC
IC403 BATT UNREG
USB
USB SW (2/2)
I/F
CAM DD ON VL 3V S305 (SEE PAGE 4-67)
BACK UP VCC RESET RESET
BATT SIG
SW
RESET BT101
FAST CHARGE
RESET (LITHIUM BATTERY)
BATT/XEXT
(4-36) S102
SYS DD ON
XEJECT
OPEN/CLOSE
LCD DD ON
STB CHARGE
KEY AD3
CONTROL
STB PLUNGER ON ZOOM SW
STB POPUP XLID OPEN
S101 S103
SWITCH
OPEN/CLOSE
BEEP XPOWER ON
BLOCK
POWER SW
(ZK-503)
VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT (SEE PAGE 4-55)
DIAL A,B JOG

J102 DIAL
IC252 AUDIO OUT AUDIO OUT A/V OUT
(MONO)
AU SDTO
AU SDTI
AU SDTO
AU SDTI
IC251 AU OUT
AU IN
LINE/
SPEAKER
MODE DIAL
XPB ON
AMP
AUDIO SP+,SP- XSET UP MODE
MIC AMP AU SP+,SP-
AD/DA SP901 DIAL
CONV. SPEAKER
MIC SIG
SYSTEM CONTROL SIG (4-37)
(4-38)
JK-208 BOARD
XSHTR ON CONTROL
XAE LOCK ON
MIC901 SHUTTER
SW SWITCH
MIC
BLOCK
(RL-503)
16
(SEE PAGE 4-40)
3-3 3-4
MVC-CD200/CD300
3-3. MODE CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM ( ) : Page No. shown in ( ) indicates the page to refer on the schematic diagram.
FS-83 BOARD S001 SY-67 BOARD(3/3)

(SEE PAGE 4-57) (CONTROL BUTTON)
IC403
UP SET RIGHT D405
(CHARGE) BACKUP VCC, RESET
LEFT DOWN
S002 VDD 8 VRO V BAT 3
MENU CN001 CN708 XRESET 6 5 RESET
KEY AD0
10 2 82 KEY AD0 IC402 D404
KEY AD1 47
11 1 83 KEY AD1 MODE CONTROL VDD • 6 VOUT V IN 7 ACV UNREG
D004 POWER LED 65
(POWER)
9 3 25 XPOWER LED (4-36) BATT UNREG
VDD BACKUP VCC 98 D403
Q402
AVCC 90
LANC UNREG
IC401 4
22 XLANC ON CMOD
BATT IN
26
15
4 CS
(4-36)
JK-208 BOARD(2/2) CN101 1
LANC •
8 ACV SENS 94
(SEE PAGE 4-61) CN709 I/O
LANC DC
6 22 14 10 95 LANC IN BATT SENS 93
LANC SIG (4-35)
3 25 11 12 96 LANC OUT
VL 3V
BT101 27 1
LITHIUM D401
BATTERY BATT/XEXT 14 BATT/XEXT
13 XLANC PWR ON
Q404 INIT CHARGE INIT CHARGE
J102 36
LANC JACK IN
A/V OUT 5 23 20 LANC JACK IN FAST CHARGE 37 FAST CHARGE POWER
(MONO)
S101 S103
SYS DD ON 31 SYS DD ON
OPEN/ XLID OPEN Q408
VDD 26 2 12 XLID OPEN BATT SI 78
CLOSE DET
I/F BATT SIG
S102
BATT SO 79
OPEN/ XEJECT
25 3 4 XEJECT
CLOSE DET
Q101,102
EXT FLASH EXT STROB ON IC402 4
1 27
DRIVE
CN702
3.4Vp-p XSTB FULL
CN302
PK-58 BOARD(2/3) (SEE PAGE 4-67) CN301 CN707 100nsec XSTB FULL 18 8
STB CHARGE
LANC IN STB CHG 35 1
CPC 11 29 30 STRB PHOTO ON
LANC OUT 2
FOR CHECK 12 28 29
CAM DD ON 5
PHOTO TR OUT FLASH
S305
RESET
RESET
2 3
S401
FLASH 44 XSTRB POP UP
Q701,702 7
STROB ON
A4.9V
UNIT
OPEN/CLOSE A4.9V 3
UNREG
KEY AD2 ST UNREG 6
31 32 84 KEY AD2
S304 S307 S306 S303 S301
SPOT FOCUS EXPOSURE AE DISPLAY

METER LOCK
Q301
D304 LED
32 33 24 XCHARGE/STB LED
CHARGE DRIVE CN701
D302 ACCESS LED TH OUT 87 3 TH OUT MD BLOCK

1 2 (MD-083)
ACCESS 47 XLID OPEN
(SEE PAGE 3-21
PL901 Q703,704
of LEVEL 3)
CN712
STROB VCC PLUNGER
1 43 STB PLUNGER
PLUNGER DRIVE
CN713
DEW DEW SENS
1 91 DEW SENS
SENSOR
FP-370 TK-61 BOARD (SEE PAGE 4-18)
FLEXIBLE S502
(MVC-CD300)
CN501 CN703
(SEE PAGE 4-18)
LENS CAP 3 3 9 XLENS CAP OPEN XRST FLASH 33 XRST FLASH
PRE LAMP LED HI SO 76 HI SO

CN503 Q501
IC402 <z//>
PRE LAMP AF ON 99 32kHz IN HI SI 75 HI SI
4 LED 2 2 X402
DRIVE SELF TIMER 32.768kHz 100 32kHz OUT HI SCK HI SCK
5 5 5 77
X401 3 10MHz IN XMC CS 74 XMC CS

2.0Vp-p
10MHz
4 10MHz OUT XMC NMI 73 XMC NMI
30.5µsec
S002 XMC HELP 97 XMC HELP
CONTROL DIAL B
1
CN705
42 DIAL B
XRST SYS 34 XRST SYS
JOG AV JACK IN 21 AV JACK IN CAMERA(2)

SWITCH DIAL DIAL A
2 41 DIAL A USB JACK IN 19 USB JACK IN (SEE PAGE 3-19
KEY AD3
of LEVEL 3)
BLOCK 4 85 KEY AD3
MELODY 80
Q407
S005 S004 MOD BEEP

(ZK-503) JOG ZOOM ZOOM
MELODY ENV 38
SET T W BEEP ON 37 BEEP ON

(SEE PAGE 4-55)
SELF TIMER
S001 POWER S003 XPOWER ON
XPOWER ON
7 7 ACCESS LED
ON/OFF
XPB ON
11 8 XPB ON
MODE XSET UP
12 88 XSETUP ON
DIAL
MODE DIAL
13 86 MODE DIAL
PAL/XNTSC 32 PAL/XNTSC
SYS V 16 SYS V
STRB PHOTO IN
CAMERA(1)
PHOTO TR OUT
(SEE PAGE
CONTROL (SHUTTER)
CN710
STROB ON 3-16(MVC-CD200),
3-18(MVC-CD300)
XRST SYS
SWITCH XSHTR ON
1 10 XSHTR ON
PRE LAMP AF ON
of LEVEL 3)
BLOCK XAE LOCK SW

2 11 XAE LOCK ON EXT STRB ON
(RL-503)
16 (SEE PAGE 4-40)
3-5 3-6
MVC-CD200/CD300
3-4. LCD BLOCK DIAGRAM ( ) : Page No. shown in ( ) indicates the page to refer on the schematic diagram.
BACK LIGHT UNIT

PK-58 BOARD(3/3) Q206
SWITCHING
ND901
(BACK LIGHT)
(4-67) IC302 ws IC302 wf L201 4 L202 L203
IC301 4.5Vp-p 4.5Vp-p BL_UNREG 2
5
I/O EXP (EVR)
Q209 T201
BL HIGH
XCS PANEL D/A 16 22 XEN V REV 15 1 3 5 CN201
CAMERA(2) C216
(SY-67) XCAM SCK 18 19 CLK 16 INVERTER 1 10
H REV 2H 10
(SEE PAGE 3-19 2H DRIVE
CAM SO 17 20 SI 18
(4-71)
COMTST 2
of LEVEL3)
BRIGHT 1
IC302 w;
IC201 SWITCHING Q204
3 6
COLOR
CONTRAST
RGB AMP
BRIGHT
COM ADJ
BRT TST
BRT R
BRT B
14 VCC COLOR 2 4.5Vp-p SWITCHING REG. 4
D 3.4V
VDD BRT TST 12 Q201,202
PANEL 3.4V 13
23 VDDA BRT.R 3 PANEL 2 1
VCC OUTPUT Q207,208
4.9V
BRT.B 4
BL
CONTRAST 5 LEVEL
LED
2
8
2H PWM
VCO AMP
V COM 9
6 40 38 30 32 31 39 35 FB Q205
RGB AMP 6
3 1
COM ADJ 7 SAW
CONTRAST
SUB BRT R
SUB BRT B
7 OSC
RGB AMP
COM ADJ
10
BRT TST
BL LEVEL (4-72)
BRIGHT
4
COLOR
17
NTSC
IC202
1V
D202 BL LOW
CURRENT
COM OUT 4 DETECT 3 3
41 SHORT
(4-68) CIRCUIT 5
PANEL Y Y PROTECT
PANEL Y 8 8 R OUT
PANEL R-Y 7
PANEL R-Y
9
R-Y IC302 20
PANEL B-Y B-Y G OUT Q203

CAMERA(1) PANEL B-Y 6 10 LCD DRIVE 22 PROTECT
(SY-067) SWITCH
IC302 8 B OUT
(SEE PAGE 24
3-16(MVC-CD200),
3-18(MVC-CD300)
PANEL V
of LEVEL 3) PANEL V 4
COM FRP
BLACK IN
HDO
EXT BGP
HDO Q210
3 LED SWITCH
VCC1
VCC2
VSH
FRP
CN301
0.5Vp-p
H CN401
44 25 26 14 48 29 28 R OUT VR
16
G OUT VG
IC302 9 15
B OUT VB
14
(4-69)
PANEL 3.4V
PANEL 6.5V
PANEL 4.9V
IC402 (1/2)
Q401-404 PANEL 4.9V VSH 2
FRPV
FRPT
COM OUT 12
0.2Vp-p COM
COM AMP
H W MSK W MSK,FRPV,FRPT DRIVE
IC302 q;
BL LEVEL GND
13 LCD901
COM
V-COM 11
VG VB12
0.2Vp-p VB12 2.5 INCH
19 COLOR LCD UNIT
H PANEL COM GENERATOR
(4-69) IC401 (4-69)

PANEL -15.3V
VSS
9
IC402 (2/2)
TIMING GENERATOR
W MSK
WIDOV 9
FILTER 32 PDP FRPT
FRPV 11
VGH
PANEL 13.2V 1
27 OSCI CLS
VCO MODE2/CLS 13 4
VCO
SPS
GRES/SPS 14 5
26 OSC0
V REV RES
44 V REVC 18
MODE1/RES 18
H REV
46 H REVC
COMTST EX2
47 COMTST EX2 20 20
NTSC
41 NTPC1
GPCK
GPCK/EX1 15 6
HDO
37 CLD
SYNI MCLK/CLD 24 24
PANEL V
34 P15
SPD
OE/SPD 23 23
CN302 VG
9
MO1
CPC PANEL COM P XHD GSRT/MODE1 16 7
8
3 BGPO MO2
FOR HSY RESET/MODE2 17 8
7
CHECK MAKER RECOG CTR
13 SRTL/CTR 22 22
EX3
R467 HSY SRTR/EX3 21 21
4 HSY
4.7kΩ
FRPT/HCNT 12
PANEL 4.9V 30 VDD
7 GND
16
3-7 3-8
MVC-CD200/CD300
3-5. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/3) ( ) : Page No. shown in ( ) indicates the page to refer on the schematic diagram.
FS-83 BOARD(1/2) CN001

BATT SIG
CN708
(4-33,34)
CN701
BACK UP VCC
2 10 48
(SEE PAGE 4-57) BATT/XEXT
4 8 9
BT901 D 3.4V D 3.4V
BATTERY
TERMINAL
FAST CHARGE
5 7 IC151-160 10
POWER(3)
INIT CHARGE (MD-083)
6 6 MD 11 D 4.6V
CN001
F006 INTERFACE
BATT UNREG BATT UNREG 12 (SEE PAGE
1 14 1 XMD POWER SAVE
F001 20 3-13)
5 10 CW UNREG CW 3.4V
BATT SIG 15
S 2
F002
6 9
14 CW UNREG
7 8
13
3 Q001, Q003, 8 7
F003
002 004 HI UNREG
9 6
CHARGE F004
10 5
J901 SWITCH
DC IN 11 4
LF001 F005
ACV UNREG 12 3 ST UNREG
1
13 2
BATT SIG
2 CN004
BATT/XEXT CN001
3
CN002 ACV UNREG
(4-41) BATT UNREG
IC001 VDD
BATT/XEXT
DC/DC CONVERTER Q004 FAST CHARGE
SWITCHING L008 INIT CHARGE
4.6V CW D 4.6V
OUT1-6 4
-IN(E)6 11 SYS DD ON
63 VCC4,5,6 L005 CAM P 5V XMD POWER SAVE
L002 A 4.9V LCD DD ON
51 VCC2 Q001
IN(C)6 9 SWITCHING CAM DD ON
L001 L015
4.9V PANEL 4.9V
42 VCC1,3
POWER(2)
OUT1-5
-IN(E)5
64
16
Q009,011 Q013 IC002 (4-42) (SEE PAGE
Q027
3-11)
4.9V
DETECT CAM 3.1V
3.1V REG BL UNREG
Q005 L014 A 3.4V
IN(C)5 14 SWITCHING L004
3.4V L011 D 3.4V
L016 CW D 3.4V
OUT1-4 57 Q012
Q019,021
Q007
OUT2-4 60 EMERGENCY
13.2V PANEL 13.2V
19 DETECT
-IN(E)4 REG
28 VCC Q002 T001 D002
SWITCHING RECT
15V L013
4 5 PANEL -15.3V
Q018,022 PANEL 13.2V
22 RC IN(C)4 18 D001 PANEL 6.5V
1 RECT 6.5V PANEL 6.5V PANEL 4.9V
6.5V
6
21 RT SCP 13 REG
Q023-026 ST UNREG
Q010
CAM 15V D 1.8V
8 EMERGENCY
OUT1-3 56 DETECT D 3.4V
30 CTL 1
2 Q016,020 CAM 3.1V
29 CTL 2 -IN(E)3 33 –7.5V CAM –7.5V A 3.4V
–7.5V
3
REG
A 4.9V
CAM P 5V
D003,004 Q015,017
IN(C)3 34 PANEL -15.3V

RECT –15.3V
REG
Q003
MVC-CD300 SWITCHING L010
5V CAM 5V
OUT1-2 50
-IN(E)2 36
IN(C)2 37 Q006
SWITCHING L006 D 1.8V
OUT 1-1 46
OUT 2-1 43
-IN(E)1 39
Q008
SWITCHING
REF 1.5V 27 V REF SYS DD ON LCD DD ON CAM DD ON
MVC-CD300
CAM 5V
IN(C)1 40 51
CAM 15V
49
CAM –7.5V
47
50 CAM 3.1V
POWER(3)
52 (CD-333/334)
D 3.4V
13 (SEE PAGE
2 CAM P 5V 3-13)
4
CAM 3.1V
48
CN704
SY-67 BOARD(1/2)
16
3-9 3-10
MVC-CD200/CD300
FS-83 BOARD(1/2)
SY-67 BOARD(2/2) POWER LED
3 9 D004
(POWER) (SEE PAGE 4-57)
D 3.4V
5 7
CN708 CN001
CONTROL SWITCH
RESET
BLOCK (ZK-503)
VL 3V (SEE PAGE 4-55)
(4-36) S003
XPOWER ON POWER
(4-36)
IC403 Q408 7 ON/OFF
BATT SIG
IF BLOCK
78
79
BATT SI
BATT SO
IC402 STB CHG
XSTB FULL
35
18
CAM 3.1V
JOG DIAL
5
MODE CONTROL
3 RESET 5 90 XRESET
D404 STRB PLUNGER ON 43
ACV UNREG 98 BACKUP VCC CAM 3.1V
14 MODE DIAL
47
D403 6 VDD CN705
BATT UNREG 65
7 REG
90 AVCC
DET 4 26 CMOD
CN301
15 BATT IN L301
8 A 3.4V PANEL 3.4V
12 11
VDD
(4-67) (4-68) (4-69) (4-69)
93 7
BATT SENS XPWR ON
IC301 IC302 IC401 IC402
POWER LED 25 EVR LCD TIMING COM
94 ACV SENS DRIVE GENERATOR AMP LCD901
2 VSH
PANEL 4.9V L403 P 4.9V
BATT/XEXT
FAST CHARGE PANEL -15.3V
14 13
L402
12
VSS
LCD
INIT CHARGE
PANEL 13.2V
16 15
L401
9
VGH
UNIT
15 14 1
14 BATT/XEXT PANEL 6.5V CN401
13 12
36 FAST CHARGE CN401
35 D 3.4V
INIT CHARGE 11 10
SYS DD ON
XLANC ON 22 S305
RESET
PK-58 BOARD (4-71,72)
31 SYS DD ON
RESET
3 2
XMD POWER SAVE
BL UNREG 23 22 IC201,202
LCD DD ON 22 21
BACK LIGHT DRIVE
CAM DD ON
ACV UNREG ACV UNREG HI UNREG
31 30 10 CN302 CPC
VDD VDD (FOR CHECK)
24 23 18
POWER(1) Q402
(4-35) CN707 CN801
(SEE PAGE 4
3-10) 8 IC401 J101
LANC UNREG LANC DC

1 14 22 6 LANC/
LANC I/O EXT FLASH
D405
(CHARGE)
VL 3V
1 27
S101,103
VDD VDD BT101 (LITHIUM BATTERY)
13 15 OPEN/CLOSE
BL UNREG
IC101 TK-61 BOARD FP-370
PANEL -15.3V
PANEL 13.2V
PANEL 6.5V
D 3.4V
14 14
USB I/F
(SEE PAGE 4-18) (FLEXIBLE)
PANEL 4.9V CN709 CN101
(4-61) (SEE PAGE 4-18)
(MVC-CD300) JK-208 BOARD Q501
LED
DRIVE
(4-24)
CAM P 5V 1
PRELAMP
IC102-105 CN703
1 1
CN501 CN503
2 LED
IC901 IC101 IRIS MOTOR

PRE-DRIVE
CLOCK EVR
GENERATOR (D/A CONV.)
(4-32) (4-24)
ST UNREG ST UNREG
D 1.8V
ST UNREG
6
D 3.4V D 3.4V STB CHG
1
CAM 3.1V CAM 3.1V XSTB FULL
8
FLASH
A 3.4V A 3.4V Q701,702 STRB ON
7 UNIT
A 4.9V A 4.9V A 4.9V A 4.9V
3
CAM P 5V CAM P 5V CAM P 5V
CN702
CAM DD ON
L258
SP VCC
IC252 IC251 IC301 IC302 IC501 IC503 IC504 IC505 STRB
PLUNGER ON
LINE/ AUDIO 64Mbit MC CAM FLASH ROM SDRAM EEPROM PL901
SPEAKER AD/DA CAMERA DSP
Q253 SDRAM SH-DSP 16Mbit 16Mbit
AMP CONV. MEMORY CONTROL CAM P 5V VCC
1 STROB
(4-38) (4-37) VIDEO ENCODER
OPD,OSD,HOST IF (4-26) (4-29) (4-31) (4-31) (4-32) PLUNGER
Q703,704 CN712
RES CONTROL
SG,JPEG,L-MODE
IC201 199
STRB ON
18
CAM DD ON
VIDEO (4-25) 21
LCD DD ON
AMP
XMD POWER SAVE
32
(4-28)
16
3-11 3-12
MVC-CD200/CD300
(4-51,52) (4-51,53)
MD-083 BOARD (4-51) (4-48)
IC402,403 IC400,407
IC401 IC406 IC404 IC406,418 IC419,422,423 IC022
BACKUP VCC D405
48 SRAM EEPROM 16 100
SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM
Q402 SLFG
CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL AMP
(MD) PERIPHERAL PERIPHERAL
Q403,404,
SW (4-52) (4-52)
418
D 3.4 9 3.4V L402 3.4V
10 Q407,409
DSP3.4V DSP3.4V
XPD IC007
(4-46,47,48) (4-45,47) VC(G)
D 4.6 11 FB410 4.6V IC013 OFFSET
MAP
12
12 FB405 4.6V-2
IC200 IC207 IC014 IC009-012 IC002,004 CD-R/RW
RF BASE
IC201 IC019 PROCESS (4-45)
UNIT
IC208 CD
DSP
CD-R/RW
GA
EVR
(D/A CONV.)
SERVO IC015 IC006 (4-46)
XMD POWER SAVE
20 AUDIO
TSHOCK DAC SERVO
SERVO 4.6V VCC(VC)
DETECT PERIPHERAL PERIPHERAL
(4-49) (4-50) (4-48) (4-48) 11
(4-49) L001
FB002 20
4.6V 4.6V LDD5V
POWER(1) 4.6V-2 21
(SY-67) CN001
CW 3.4V 3.4V
(SEE PAGE 15
3-10)
3.4V VCC
5
CN002
(4-47)
IC414
ATAPI
IC408 IC005 IC001 IC003 IC204 IC410,413 IC209
CD-R
(4-53) ENC/DEC
BUFFER
DRAM SLED
TRACKING
DRIVE
SPINDLE
DRIVE
SWITCH AMP
EFM ENC DRIVE FOCUS IC414 PERIPHERAL
IC425 (4-54)
CONTROL
(4-53) (4-47)
DRIVE
(4-47) (4-49) (4-53) (4-50)
Q417,411
DOOR LOCK
4.6V-2 PL902
CW UNREG 13 DC/DC POWER5V 3.4V VCC

1 DOOR LOCK
CONVERTER
14 CN405
Q412,416
CN404
(MVC-CD300)
CN203
CD-334 BOARD
(MVC-CD300) IC201 IC202
CAM 5V LENS UNIT
51 TIMING S/H,AGC
GENERATOR A/D CONV. F SENS VCC FOCUS RESET
14 SENSOR
(4-14) (4-14) XLENS RST LED
IC401
CAM 15V FB225
49 CCD Z SENS VCC ZOOM RESET
CAM -7.5V FB226 IMAGER 2
47 SENSOR
50
(4-16) CN303
POWER(1) CAM 3.1V
(SY-67) Q302
52
D 3.4V L303
(SEE PAGE 13
3-10)
CAM P 5V 2
4 LENS UNIT
IC101 IC303,304 F SENS VCC
7
FOCUS RESET
SENSOR
IC302 IC301 CCD
IMAGER IRIS DRIVE
HALL AMP
ZOOM
MOTOR FOCUS/IRIS (4-15) (4-11,12) Z SENS VCC
MOTOR DRIVE ZOOM RESET
DRIVE 19 SENSOR
(4-11) (4-11) CN301
CAM 3.1V
48
16
CD-333 BOARD
(MVC-CD200)
Camera block diagrams and MD block diagrams are not shown.

Pages from 3-15 to 3-26 are not shown.
3-13 3-14E
I
J
F
L
E
K
C
B
A
H
G
D
16
1
LED901
FP-370
(PRELAMP)
FLEXIBLE
5
4
3
2
1
2
N,C
CAM_P_5V
CAM_P_5V
PRELAMP_LED
PRELAMP_LED
CN503
LENS UNIT
5P
S502
3
TK-61 BOARD
(LENS CAP DETECT)
CN501
(MVC-CD300)
5P
SELF_TIMER
REG_GND
LENS_CAP_OPEN
PRELAMP_AF_ON
CAM_P_5V
4
CCD
5
4
3
2
1
LOCK
DOOR
IMAGER
PL902
PLUNGER
4-1. FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (1/2)
FP-369
FLEXIBLE
4-1
5
CN303 16P
2
1
5
4
3
2
1
Z_SENS_GND 1
Z_SENS_VCC 2
VCC
GND
Z_SENS_RST 3
REG_GND
SECTION 4
CAM_P_5V
TEMP_COM_(GND) 4
5/5
4/5
3/5
2/5
1/5
SELF_TIMER
CN703
FOCUS_B 5
1/3 LD BLOCK
2/3 CH BLOCK
LENS_CAP_OPEN
CD-334 BOARD
CD-333 BOARD
PRELAMP_AF_ON
3/3 CCD BLOCK
CN405
FOCUS_A 6
FOCUS_B 7
5P
2P
FOCUS_A 8
6
H8S BLOCK
ZOOM_B 9
DRIVE BLOCK
DSP,GA BLOCK
ZOOM_A 10
ANALOG BLOCK
CHAGALL BLOCK
ZOOM_A 11
MD-083 BOARD
CN001 32P ZOOM_B 12
1 FCS- F_SENS_GND 13
CN404 50P CN701 50P CN704 70P CN203 70P
2 TRK- F_SENS_VCC 14
REG_GND 50 50 REG_GND 1 MT_GND CAM_P_5V 2 1 MT_GND CAM_P_5V 2
(MVC-CD300)
(MVC-CD200)
3 TRK+ F_SENS_RST 15
REG_GND 49 49 REG_GND 3 MT_GND CAM_P_5V 4 3 MT_GND CAM_P_5V 4
4 FCS+ N.C. 16
7
BACK_UP_VCC 48 48 BACK_UP_VCC 5 HALL_AD HALL_OFFSET 6 5 HALL_AD HALL_OFFSET 6

5 FGND CN302 6P
XLID_OPEN 47 47 XLID_OPEN 7 HALL_REF HALL_GAIN 8 7 HALL_REF HALL_GAIN 8
6 GND N.C. 1
HDB7 46 46 HDB7 9 LD_GND IRIS_CONT1 10 9 LD_GND IRIS_CONT1 10
7 F IRIS_A 2
HDB8 45 45 HDB8 11 LD_GND IRIS_CONT2 12 11 LD_GND IRIS_CONT2 12
DEVICE
OPTICAL
8 B IRIS_B 3
HDB6 44 44 HDB6 13 D_3.4V XLENS_RST_LED 14 13 D_3.4V XLENS_RST_LED 14
9 A IRIS_A 4
HDB9 43 43 HDB9 15 PE_DIR1B PE_DIR1A 16 15 PE_DIR1B PE_DIR1A 16
10 H IRIS_B 5
HDB5 42 42 HDB5 17 PE_EN1 XZM_RST_SENS 18 17 PE_EN1 XZM_RST_SENS 18
11 VCC N.C. 6
PD
HDB10 41 41 HDB10 19 MSHUT_ON XZM_RST_SENS1 20 19 MSHUT_ON XZM_RST_SENS1 20
MVC-CD300
12
8
VC
HDB4 40 40 HDB4 21 IRIS_EN DIR0B 22 21 IRIS_EN DIR0B 22
PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
13 G
HDB11 39 39 HDB11 23 PE_DIR0B PE_DIR0A 24 23 PE_DIR0B PE_DIR0A 24 CN301 26P
14 D
HDB3 38 38 HDB3 25 PE_EN0 XFC_RST_SENS 26 25 PE_EN0 XFC_RST_SENS 26 FOCUS_A 1
15 C
FP-372
HDB12 37 37 HDB12 27 LENS_TEMP_AD CCD_TEMP 28 27 LENS_TEMP_AD CCD_TEMP 28 FOCUS_B 2
COIL
16 E
FOCUS
HDB2 36 36 HDB2 29 XCAM_RESET VSUB_CNT 30 29 XCAM_RESET VSUB_CNT 30 FOCUS_B 3
17 NC
HDB13 35 35 HDB13 31 XEAGLE/XGCAM_CS PAL/XNTSC 32 31 XEAGLE/XGCAM_CS PAL/XNTSC 32 FOCUS_A 4
18 FPDVC
FP-364
HDB1 34 34 HDB1 33 XCAM_SO XTG_CS 34 33 XCAM_SO XTG_CS 34 F_SENS_GND 5

19 FPDO
MECHANISM DECK DDX-G2100

HDB14 33 33 HDB14 35 XCAM_SCK CD_GND 36 35 XCAM_SCK CD_GND 36 F_SENS_RST 6
20
9
LDD5V
HDB0 32 32 HDB0 37 CD_GND TG_CLK 38 37 CD_GND TG_CLK 38 F_SENS_VCC 7
21 LDD5V
HDB15 31 31 HDB15 39 CD_GND CD_GND 40 39 CD_GND CD_GND 40 HALL- 8
COIL
22 CFREQ
FLEXIBLE
HRESET 30 30 HRESET 41 CD_GND MCK12 42 41 CD_GND MCK12 42 BIAS- 9
23 CMOD
TRACKING
DREQ 29 29 DREQ 43 CD_GND CD_GND 44 43 CD_GND CD_GND 44 HALL+ 10
24 PGND
GND 28 28 GND 45 CA_HD CA_FD 46 45 CA_HD CA_FD 46 BIAS+ 11
25 VRDC
FLEXIBLE
NC(IOCHRDY) 27 27 NC(IOCHRDY) 47 CAM_-7.5V CAM_3.1V 48 47 CAM_-7.5V CAM_3.1V 48 DRIVE+ 12

26 VWDC2
IOW 26 26 IOW 49 CAM_15V CAM_3.1V 50 49 CAM_15V CAM_3.1V 50 DRIVE- 13
27 VWDC1
REG_GND 25 25 REG_GND 51 CAM_5V CAM_3.1V 52 51 CAM_5V CAM_3.1V 52 ZOOM_A 14
28 LDGND
10
IOR 24 24 IOR 53 CAMTEST0 CA_AD05 54 53 CAMTEST0 CA_AD05 54 ZOOM_B 15

29 OSCON
DACK 23 23 DACK 55 CAMTEST1 CA_AD06 56 55 CAMTEST1 CA_AD06 56 ZOOM_B 16
BOARD to BOARD
30 ODON
HA1 22 22 HA1 57 CA_AD00 CA_AD07 58 57 CA_AD00 CA_AD07 58 ZOOM_A 17
31 W/XR
HINT 21 21 HINT 59 CA_AD01 CA_AD08 60 59 CA_AD01 CA_AD08 60 Z_SENS_GND 18
32 ENBL
XMD_POWER_SAVE 20 20 XMD_POWER_SAVE 61 CA_AD02 CA_AD09 62 61 CA_AD02 CA_AD09 62 Z_SENS_VCC 19
CN002 18P HA0 19 19 HA0 63 CA_AD03 CA_AD10 64 63 CA_AD03 CA_AD10 64 Z_SENS_RST 20

1 TKC HA2 18 18 HA2 65 CA_AD04 CA_AD11 66 65 CA_AD04 CA_AD11 66 TEMP_OUT 21
2 SD- HCS0 17 17 HCS0 67 REG_GND PBLK 68 67 REG_GND PBLK 68 TEMP_COM_(GND) 22
M
11
3 SD+ HCS1 16 16 HCS1 69 REG_GND CLPOB 70 69 REG_GND CLPOB 70 OPEN 23
M901
4 LED CW_3.4V 15 15 CW_3.4V OPEN 24
5 VCC CW_UNREG 14 14 CW_UNREG OPEN 25
FG
SPINDLE MOTOR
6 VH- CW_UNREG 13 13 CW_UNREG OPEN 26
MVC-CD200
7 WIN2 D_4.6V 12 12 D_4.6V
8 WIN1 D_4.6V 11 11 D_4.6V

9 VIN1 D_3.4V 10 10 D_3.4V
10 VIN2 D_3.4V 9 9 D_3.4V

5/10
4/10
3/10
2/10
1/10
12
11 UIN! REG_GND 8 8 REG_GND

FS-139
12 UIN2 REG_GND 7 7 REG_GND

HARNESS
13 VH+ REG_GND 6 6 REG_GND CN712 2P
M
14 LMT NC(MPXO_IF) 5 5 NC(MPXO_IF) VCC 1
STROB
PL901
VI BLOCK
15 GND REG_GND 4 4 REG_GND REG_GND 2

PLUNGER
LD BLOCK
SH BLOCK
M902
GEN BLOCK
16 U TH_OUT 3 3 TH_OUT
FG
SLED MOTOR
PEARL BLOCK
PH901
17 V NC(DECEFM) 2 2 NC(DECEFM)
18 W NC(FMDT) 1 1 NC(FMDT)
13
10/10
9/10
8/10
7/10
6/10
SY-67 BOARD(1/2)
FS-140
HARNESS
CN713 2P
DEW_SENS 1
REG_GND 2
DEW SENSOR
FR BLOCK
DD BLOCK
CN BLOCK
AU BLOCK
CW BLOCK
14
CN711
CN706
2P
2P
4-2
SP-
SP+
MIC_GND
MIC_SIG
2
1
2
1
15
MIC
SP901
MIC 901
TO
SPEAKER
FH(2/2)
16
SY-67 BOARD(2/2)
FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (1/2)

MVC-CD200/CD300
MVC-CD200/CD300

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
CONTROL SWITCH
A BLOCK(ZK-503)
S001 S002 S003
(MODE SWITCH) (EXEC)
1 (P_AUTO)
CONTROL SWITCH
POWER
ON/OFF(CHG)
BLOCK(RL-503) FLASH UNIT
(PLAY) A 2 S(AE-S)
S004,005
(MOVIE) 6 10
SET (SET UP) (SHUTTER)

B 3 A(AE-A) (ZOOM)
UP
W T
B SCN(SCENE) 5 4 M(MANUAL)
LOCK
ON
PK-58 BOARD
10
11
12
13
14
1
3
4
5
6
2
3
4
5
2
3
6
7
8
DIAL_B
DIAL_A
GND
KEY_AD3
CAM_3.1V
N.C
XPOWER_ON
N.C
GND
N.C
XPB_ON
XSET_UP
MODE_DIAL
CAM_3.1V
XSHTR_ON
XAE_LOCK_SW
NC
GND
NC
NC
STB_CHARGE
STRB_PHOTO_ON
A_4.9V
UNREG_GND
PHOTO_TR_OUT
UNREG
STROB_ON
XSTB_FULL
1/3 RGB BLOCK
2/3 TG BLOCK
C
14P
3/3 BL BLOCK
6P
8P
CN710
CN702
CN401 24P
CN705
CN707 33P CN301 32P
CHARGE_LED 33 32 CHARGE_LED CLD 24
KEY_AD2 32 31 KEY_AD2 SPD 23

TO HI_UNREG 31 30 HI_UNREG CTR 22
SY-67 BOARD(1/2) LANC_IN 30 29 LANC_IN EX3 21
FH(1/2)
D LANC_OUT 29 28 LANC_OUT EX2 20
REG_GND 28 27 REG_GND VB12 19
MS_SCLK 27 26 MS_SCLK RES 18
MS_BS 26 25 MS_BS TST 17

S301,303-307
MS_DIO 25 24 MS_DIO VR 16
LCD901
FLEXIBLE
VDD 24 23 VDD VG 15 2.5 INCH
COLOR LCD UNIT
BL_UNREG 23 22 BL_UNREG VB 14
DISPLAY/ AE LOCK/
BL_UNREG 22 21 BL_UNREG GND 13
E SY-67 BOARD(2/2) S401

BL_GND 21 20 BL_GND
(SPOT METER)
(EXPOSURE)/
/RESET/
FOCUS
VSH 12
(FLASH OPEN/CLOSE) BL_GND 20 19 BL_GND COM 11
XCAM_SCK 19 18 XCAM_SCK VGL 10
CAM_SO 18 17 CAM_SO VSS 9

D302
FP-363
XCS_PANEL_D/A 17 16 XCS_PANEL_D/A MO2 8
PANEL_-15.3V 16 15 PANEL_-15.3V MO1 7
PANEL_13.2V 15 14 PANEL_13.2V GPCK 6

ACCESS
PANEL_4.9V 14 13 PANEL_4.9V SPS 5
F PANEL_6.5V 13 12 PANEL_6.5V
D304
CLS 4
PANEL_3.4V 12 11 PANEL_3.4V VCC 3
D_3.4V 11 10 D_3.4V VSH 2
REG_GND 10 9 REG_GND VGH 1

/CHG
PANEL_Y 9 8 PANEL_Y
PANEL_R-Y 8 7 PANEL_R-Y
CN201 10P
PANEL_B-Y 7 6 PANEL_B-Y
BL_HIGH 10
REG_GND 6 5 REG_GND
N.C. 9
G PANEL_V 5 4 PANEL_V
N.C. 8
ND901
BACK LIGHT
HDO 4 3 HDO
14P
27P
11P
N.C. 7 D901
RESET 3 2 RESET
N.C. 6
ACCESS_LED 2 1 ACCESS_LED
CN708
CN001
N.C. 5
CN709
XLANC_JACK_IN
USB_D+PULLUP
EXT_STROB_ON
N.C. 1
FAST_CHARGE
USB_SUSPND
INIT_CHARGE
BATT_UNREG
USB_XVDATA
POWER_LED
N.C. 4
AV_JACK_IN
USB_D+OUT
D_4.6V/1.8V
D_4.6V/1.8V
D_3.4V/3.2V
D_3.4V/3.2V
USB_D-OUT
USB_TXENL
XLID_OPEN
ST_UNREG
ST_UNREG
BATT/XEXT
HI_UNREG
USB_D+IN
LANC_SIG
REG_GND
REG_GND
REG_GND
REG_GND
REG_GND
USB_D-IN
REG_GND
REG_GND
REG_GND
REG_GND
REG_GND
REG_GND
REG_GND
REG_GND
BATT_SIG
LANC_DC
USB_DET
KEY_AD0
KEY_AD1
BL_LOW 3 (STARTER)
18P
XEJECT
D_3.4V
D_3.4V
P_4.6V
P_4.6V
V_OUT
A_OUT
VL_3V
LED 2
VDD
LED_GND 1
MAKER_RECOG
H
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
11
10
14
13
12
11
10
CN302
1
7
8
7
6
5
3
2
1
9
8
6
5
3
2
PANEL_COM
LANC_OUT
REG_GND
HI_UNREG
MS_SCLK
LANC_IN
MS_DIO
FS-136
MS_BS
FP-361 FP-362
VDD
HSY
N,C
N,C
N,C
N,C
N,C
N,C
VG
FLEXIBLE FLEXIBLE HARNESS
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
10
11
10
11
12
13
14
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
9
6
5
4
3
2
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
2
3
5
6
2
3
6
7
9
EXT_STROB_ON
REG_GND
LANC_SIG
REG_GND
XLANC_JACK_IN
LANC_DC
USB_DET
REG_GND
V_OUT
REG_GND
A_OUT
REG_GND
D_3.4V
VDD
USB_D+PULLUP
USB_D+OUT
USB_D-OUT
USB_TXENL
USB_D+IN
USB_D-IN
USB_SUSPND
REG_GND
XEJECT
XLID_OPEN
VL_3V
REG_GND
REG_GND
INIT_CHARGE
D_3.4V
REG_GND
POWER_LED
KEY_AD0
KEY_AD1
REG_GND
REG_GND
REG_GND
REG_GND
P_4.6V
P_4.6V
D_4.6V/1.8V
D_4.6V/1.8V
HI_UNREG
D_3.4V/3.2V
D_3.4V/3.2V
ST_UNREG
ST_UNREG
AV_JACK_IN
FAST_CHARGE
BATT_SIG
BATT/XEXT
BATT_UNREG
USB_XVDATA
CPC (FOR CHECK)
I CN002 3P
14P
27P
11P
BT901
ACV_UNREG 1 BATTERY
TERMINAL
ACV_GND 2
CN004
CN101
CN001
BATT/XEXT 3
J101
CN003 3P
ACC
JK-208 BOARD FS-83 BOARD
BATT_UNREG
BATT_SIG
1
2
J901
DC IN
J BT101
S001
BATT_GND 3
S002
J102 (FLASH)
A/V OUT
(MONO)
LITHIUM BATTERY
MENU
(MACRO)
CN102 5P (EDIT SEARCH)
1 VCC S101,103 S102
D004
2 D- (OPEN/CLOSE) OPEN
(USB) 3 D+
K 4 ID (POWER)
(SELF TIMER)
5 GND
16

4-3 4-4
MVC-CD200/CD300
4-2. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
THIS NOTE IS COMMON FOR WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

(In addition to this, the necessary note is printed in each block)
(For printed wiring boards) (Measuring conditions voltage and waveform)

• b: Pattern from the side which enables seeing. • Voltages and waveforms are measured between the measure-
(The other layers' patterns are not indicated.) ment points and ground when camera shoots color bar chart of
• Through hole is omitted. pattern box. They are reference values and reference wave-
• Circled numbers refer to waveforms. forms. *
• There are few cases that the part printed on diagram isn’t (VOM of DC 10 MΩ input impedance is used.).
mounted in this model. • Voltage values change depending upon input impedance of VOM
• Chip parts. used.) *
Transistor Diode
C 6 5 4 4 5 6 4 5 1 2 3 3 3 1. Connection
Pattern box
B E 1 2 3 3 2 1 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 2 1 2 1
(For schematic diagrams)

• All capacitors are in µF unless otherwise noted. p: pF.
50V or less are not indicated except for electrolytics and
tantalums. About 34cm (MVC-CD200)
• Chip resistors are 1/10W unless otherwise noted. About 28cm (MVC-CD300)
kΩ=1000Ω, MΩ=1000kΩ.
• Caution when replacing chip parts.
New parts must be attached after removal of chip.
Be careful not to heat the minus side of tantalum capacitor, Be-
cause it is damaged by the heat.
• Some chip part will be indicated as follows.
Example C541 L452
22U 10UH
TA A 2520 Front of the lens
Kinds of capacitor
Temperature characteristics
External dimensions (mm) 2. Adjust the distance so that the output waveform of Fig. a and
the Fig. b can be obtain.
• Constants of resistors, capacitors, ICs and etc with XX indicate
that they are not used. H
Yellow
Magenta
In such cases, the unused circuits may be indicated.

White
Cyan
Green
• All variable and adjustable resistors have characteristic curve B,

Red
unless otherwise noted.

Blue
• Signal name
XEDIT → EDIT PB/XREC → PB/REC
• 2 : non flammable resistor
• 1 : fusible resistor
• C : panel designation
• A : B+ Line *
A B A=B B A
• B : B– Line *
•J : IN/OUT direction of (+,–) B LINE. * Fig. a (Video output terminal output waveform)
• C : adjustment for repair. *
• Circled numbers refer to waveforms. *
* Indicated by the color red. Electron beam
scanned frame
Magenta
Note : Note :
Green
Yellow
White
Cyan
Blue
Red
The components identified by Les composants identifiés par

mark 0 or dotted line with mark une marque 0 sont critiques
CRT picture frame
0 are critical for safety. pour la sécurité.
Replace only with part number Ne les remplacer que par une
specified. pièce portant le numéro spécifié.
Fig.b (Picture on monitor TV)
When indicating parts by reference number, please include

the board name.
4-5
MVC-CD200/CD300
CD-333 (LENS DRIVE, CAMERA PROCESS, CCD IMAGER) PRINTED WIRING BOARD (CD200)
— Ref. No. CD-333 Board; 1,000 Series —
For printed wiring board

MD-083
• Refer to page 4-78 for parts location. CD-RF PROCESS, SERVO, CD, DSP,
• CD-333 board consists of multiple layers. However, only EFM/ENC CONTROL
the sides (layers) A and B are shown. PK-58
• Chip parts (RGB DRIVE, TIMING GENERATOR, BACK LIGHT)
Transistor Diode
C 3
B E 2 1
FS-83
(CHARGER)
There are a few cases that the part printed on
this diagram isn’t mounted in this model.
JK-208
(USB INTERFACE)
CD-333 (CD200)
LENS DRIVE, CAMERA PROCESS, CCD IMAGER

CD-333 4-7 4-8
MVC-CD200/CD300
CD-334 (LENS DRIVE, CAMERA PROCESS, CCD IMAGER) PRINTED WIRING BOARD (CD300)
— Ref. No. CD-334 Board; 1,000 Series —

SY-67
• Refer to page 4-78 for parts location. LD, PEARL, VIDEO OUT, SH, 16M FLASH MEMORY,
• CD-334 board consists of multiple layers. However, only 64M SDRAM, CLK GEN, CW, HI CONTROL,
the sides (layers) A and B are shown.
• Chip parts FLASH UNIT
Transistor Diode
C 3
TK-61
(LENS CAP DETECT)
B E 2 1

CD-334 (CD300)
LENS DRIVE, CAMERA PROCESS, CCD IMAGER

4-9 4-10 CD-334
MVC-CD200/CD300
For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-7 for CD-333 printed wiring board.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
C306
MVC-CD200 R330
R309 0.033u
CD-333 BOARD(1/3) (MVC-CD200) 100k
1005
B
1608
2200
1005
HALL_AD
A CD-334 BOARD(1/3) (MVC-CD300) C305

3300p
R318 180k 1005
R324 16k 1005 ± 0.5%
HALL_OFFSET
B
LENS DRIVE(LD BLOCK) 1608 IRIS_CONT2
1 TO(2/3)
HALL_REF
-REF.NO.:1000 SERIES- R320
2700
R327
100k
XX MARK:NO MOUNT R326 1005 1005
22k R328 IRIS_CONT1
8 7 6 5 1005 100k R325
R316 1k
1005
NJM12904V(TE2)
180k 1005
± 0.5%
IN(-)
IN(+)
VCC
OUT
1005 R323 C317 R331
0.01u C318
180k
IC303 C313
0.001u
1005 C314 B
0.022u 1005
XX
1005
0.1u
B
1005
B B
B IRIS DRIVE
R306
4700
1005 1005
1005
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
NJM12902V(TE2)
OUT
IN(-)
IN(+)
IN(+)
IN(-)
OUT
GND
IN(+)
IC303
IN(-)
GND
OUT
Q301
2SD2216J-QR(K8).SO
IRIS DRIVE
1 2 3 4
IC304
HALL AMP
C R304 R307 R312
IN(+)
IN(+)
1k 47k
IN(-)
IN(-)
100k
OUT
OUT
VCC
IC304
1005 1005 1005
R303
10 Q303
1/16W 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 L304
C302 2SD2216J-QR(K8).SO
1608 0.022u C303 10uH
0.1u BIAS SW
D302 B 2520
1005 B
1SS401(TE85L) 1608 CAM_3.1V
R322 C316
12k 0.01u
C304 R308 1005 B
1u 10k 1005
B 1005 HALL_GAIN
D 1608 C320
0.01u
C312
0.1u R321 C315 R329
C319
1u C321
B R314 R319 6.3V 10u
B 1200 XX 10k 6.3V
LENS BLOCK is replaced as a block. 1005 1005 330
1005
22k
1005
1005 B 1005 B
TA A
1608 2
So the PRINTED WIRING BOARD and 1005 TO(2/3)
LD_GND
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM are omitted.
C301 TH301 C322

MVC-CD200 0.01u
XX
B R335
C325 1005
CN301 26P XX 0
B CCD_TEMP
E FOCUS_A
FOCUS_B
1
2
1005
C324 R332 R336
XX 47k 0 L303
FOCUS_B 3 B 1005 10uH
2520
FOCUS_A 4 D_3.4V
F_SENS_GND 5 LENS_TEMP_AD
F_SENS_RST 6 XFC_RST_SENS
R311 68k 1005
F_SENS_VCC 7 MVC-CD200
HALL- 8 Q302
2SB1462J-QR(K8).SO R315 47k 1005
F BIAS- 9 SWITCH R337 XX
XZM_RST_SENS1
XLENS_RST_LED
HALL+ 10
R305
BIAS+ 11 4700
1005 R317 68k 1005
DRIVE+ 12 XZM_RST_SENS
DRIVE- 13
ZOOM_A 14 PE_EN1
LENS
BLOCK ZOOM_B 15
PE_DIR1B
ZOOM_B 16
G ZOOM_A 17
L302
CAM_P_5V
Z_SENS_GND 18 10uH
3225
Z_SENS_VCC 19
Z_SENS_RST 20
MA111-(K8).S0
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13
UPD16877MA-6A5-E2
TEMP_OUT 21
C310
VDD
PGND
B2_FB
VM2_3
B3_ZA
PGND
B4_ZB
EN4
IN4
EN3
IN3
B1_FA
C309
D301
TEMP_COM_(GND) 22 0.1u C311
0.01u 47u
B
1005 B 6.3V
OPEN 23
MVC-CD200
1005 TA B
OPEN 24
H OPEN 25
IC302
OPEN 26
A3_ZA
A4_ZB
A2_FB
A1_FA
PGND
PGND
ZOOM MOTOR
VM1
VM4
EN1
EN2
DRIVE
IN1
IN2
6 TO(2/3,3/3) CD_GND
IC302
R338 FOCUS MOTOR
XX DRIVE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
MVC-CD300
CN303 16P R334 R310
180 56k MT_GND 3 TO(2/3)
Z_SENS_GND 1
Z_SENS_VCC 2
I Z_SENS_RST 3
PE_DIR1A
TEMP_COM_(GND) 4
FB305 0uH
FOCUS_B 5
FB306 0uH
FOCUS_A 6
FB307 0uH
FOCUS_B 7
FB308 0uH
FOCUS_A 8
ZOOM_B 9
ZOOM_A 10
J ZOOM_A 11
ZOOM_B 12
F_SENS_GND 13
R333 PE_EN0
LENS F_SENS_VCC 14 R313
BLOCK 180 56k PE_DIR0B
F_SENS_RST 15
N.C. 16
C323
0.1u
CN302 6P B PE_DIR0A
N.C. 1 1005
K IRIS_A 2
FB301 0uH
0uH
L301
FB302 10uH
IRIS_B 3
0uH 2520
FB303
IRIS_A 4
FB304 0uH
IRIS_B 5 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13
UPD16877MA-6A5-E2
N.C. 6
VDD
PGND
B2_FB
VM2_3
B3_ZA
PGND
B4_ZB
EN4
IN4
EN3
IN3
B1_FA
IC301
SHUTTER DRIVE
L
A3_ZA
A4_ZB
A2_FB
A1_FA
PGND
PGND
VM1
VM4
EN1
EN2
IN1
IN2
IC301
C307 C308
0.01u 47u
B 6.3V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1005 TA B
M DIR0B
IRIS_EN
MSHUT_ON
16
LENS DRIVE
CD-333 (1/3)/CD-334 (1/3) 4-11 4-12
MVC-CD200/CD300

• Refer to page 4-73 for waveforms.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CD-333 BOARD(2/3) (MVC-CD200) NO MARK:STILL/PB MODE
S :STILL MODE
P :PB MODE
CD-334 BOARD(2/3) (MVC-CD300)
A CAMERA PROCESS(CH BLOCK) R211 1k
-REF.NO.:1000 SERIES- TO SY-67 BOARD(1/10) CN704

(THROUGH THE FP-364 FLEXIBLE)
XX MARK:NO MOUNT R239 1k
(SEE PAGE 4-23)
CN203 70P L202
R240 R241 R242
3 TO(1/3) MT_GND 1 MT_GND CAM_P_5V 2 CAM_P_5V 47uH
1k 1k 0
2520
R248
XX 3 MT_GND CAM_P_5V 4
1608 C227 R245 R218
HALL_AD 5 HALL_AD HALL_OFFSET 6 47u C222
HALL_OFFSET XX XX 0.1u
B 1 TO(1/3)
HALL_REF 7 HALL_REF HALL_GAIN 8
1 TO(1/3) 6.3V
TA B
B
2 TO(1/3)
R238 XX
9 LD_GND IRIS_CONT1 10
R215
LD_GND IRIS_CONT1
XX
XX
R249 R213
XX 11 LD_GND IRIS_CONT2 12 IRIS_CONT2 R237 C220
XX XX
1608
R209
1u
D_3.4V 13 D_3.4V XLENS_RST_LED 14 XLENS_RST_LED B
B
R236
15 PE_DIR1B PE_DIR1A 16 PE_DIR1A XX
PE_DIR1B
1u
FB223 C219
17 PE_EN1 XZM_RST_SENS 18 XZM_RST_SENS R221 0.1u
PE_EN1 0uH 150 B
C221
TEST0
MSHUT_ON 19 MSHUT_ON XZM_RST_SENS1 20 XZM_RST_SENS1 3 TO(1/3)
S1.1
S0.1
P0.4
S2.1
3 TO(1/3)
3.1
3.1
3.1
3.0
3.0
3.0
O0
S1.5/P0
P0
TEST1
IRIS_EN 21 IRIS_EN DIR0B 22 DIR0B
C PE_DIR0B 23 PE_DIR0B PE_DIR0A 24 PE_DIR0A
R235
XX
FB224
0uH
R222
150
S1.5/P0
48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37
(LACHI
C215
_SEL)
PE_EN0 25 PE_EN0 XFC_RST_SENS 26 XFC_RST_SENS
SCLK
SEN
(SCLK)<CA_FD>SDL
RST
(CA_FD)TRI
SVSS
SVDD
VRB
(D0)SDATA
VRT
CMLVL
(SDATA)SLM
0.1u
(D1)
B C208
LENS_TEMP_AD 27 LENS_TEMP_AD CCD_TEMP 28 S1.5/
11 D0 FB211 0uH R223 150 P3.1 0
1005 0.1u
B
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
4 TO(3/3) D0 (D2)
1
29 XCAM_RESET VSUB_CNT 30 VSUB_CONT CHROMA 1005
D1 FB212 0uH R224 150 S1.5/P3.1
2
31 XEAGLE/XGCAM_CS PAL/XNTSC 32 D1(D3) ADVSS
D2 FB213 0uH R225 150 S1.5/P0 0 C214
0.1u
3
33 XCAM_SO XTG_CS 34 D2(D4) LINE/COMPVID
FB214 0uH R226 150 S1.5/P3.1 3.0 B 1005
D3
4
35 XCAM_SCK CD_GND 36 D3(D5) ADVDD1
FB215 0uH R227 150 S1.5/P3.1 S0.5/P0 C213
D4
1u
5
37 CD_GND TG_CLK 38 D4(D6) CLPBYP/L_
B 1608
D D5 FB216 0uH R228 150 S1.5/P3.1
IC202 8 NC/L
0
6
39 CD_GND CD_GND 40 D5(D7) C212
D6 FB217 0uH R229 150 S1.5/P3.1 S1.5/P0 C211 0.1u
7
41 CD_GND MCK12 42 D6(D8) S/H,AGC,A/D CONVERTER CCDIN 1u B 1608
D7 FB218 0uH R230 150 S2.0/P0 S0.9/P0 B 1608
8
43 CD_GND CD_GND 44 D7(D9) IC202 CLPREF/L+1
FB219 0uH R231 150 S0.6/P0 S1.1/P0 C210
D8 AD80044JSTRL 1u
FB226
9
45 CA_HD CA_FD 46 HALL_GAIN D8(D10) CLPOUT/L+2 B 1608
0uH D9 FB220 0uH R232 150 S0.7/P0 3.0
12 11 10
47 CAM_-7.5V CAM_3.1V 48 CCD_TEMP 2 TO(1/3) D9(D11) ACVDD
D10 FB221 0uH R233 150 S0.2/P0
49 CAM_15V CAM_3.1V 50 CAM_3.1V D10(D12) ACVSS
FB225 0uH D11 FB222 0uH R234 150 0
HD/DVDD
VD/AVDD
51 CAM_5V CAM_3.1V 52 D11 ACVSS
ADCCLK
S1.6/P0
S3.0/P0
S2.3/P0
S2.3/P0
S3.0/P0
DRVDD
CLPDM
DRVSS
DVDD1
DVSS3
CLPOB
TEST0 D5 C209
XSHD
XSHP
PBLK
53 CAMTEST0 CA_AD05 54 (D13) 0.1u
E
3.1
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
TEST1 D6 B
55 CAMTEST1 CA_AD06 56
D0 D7
57 CA_AD00 CA_AD07 58 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
D1 D8
59 CA_AD01 CA_AD08 60
D2
61 CA_AD02 CA_AD09 62
D9 C225 10
R208
1u
XX
D3 D10 B 1608
63 CA_AD03 CA_AD10 64
D4 D11 C224
65 CA_AD04 CA_AD11 66 FB209 0.1u
67 REG_GND PBLK 68 D201
XX
0uH
B
1005 9
69 REG_GND CLPOB 70 SIGNAL PATH
F R210
XX
VIDEO SIGNAL
R220
XX C232
CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA
XX Q201
XX
FB203 REC
0uH
PB
R203 R206 R202
FB208 R207 2200
* 100
0uH 100
G R212 220
X202
XX
C201
0.1u
XX
R214 X201 B
R204 1608
220 XX XX
C207
R246 R205
* R244 XX FB207
10 XX
FB204
XX
C217
0.01u
B
H
36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 CCD_OUT
H2
VSS6
HDI
VDI
SEN
SCK
SSI
MCKO
VDD5
OSCI
OSCO
CKI
CKO
*MARKED:MOUNT TABLE H1
C204
MVC-CD200 MVC-CD300 0.1u RG
B
120p 1005 V1B
C205 XX 16V V1B
48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
CH TEST1 VSS5 V1A
V1A
120p VM ADCLK V2 5 TO(3/3)
I C216 XX 16V
CH
V2
V2 CLPOB V3B
V2
V4 V3B
FB201
FB202
0uH
XX
10uH
0uH
V1A
V4
V1A
IC201 CLPDM
VSS4 V3A
V4
V3A
C230
0.1u TIMING GENERATOR V4
FB205 0uH 10uH VH PBLK C206
B VSHT
V1B 1608 0.1u VSHT
IC201 CXD2470R-T CXD2497R-T V1B IC201 XRS B
V3A * 1608 CAM_15V
L201 XX 47uH C229 V3A XSHD
0.1u CAM_-7.5V
L203 10uH 47uH B VL XSHP
V3B 1005 R201
R201 0 XX V3B VDD4 *
J R203 220 100
VSHT
SUB VDD3
1608
R216 0 XX TEST2 H2
C228 FB201
R217 0 XX 6.8u C205 *
35V *
R207 0 XX
EBCKSM
TA C CH
C203
DSGAT
VDD1
VDD2
C231
VSS1
VSS2
VSS3
1u
WEN
R246 XX 0
RST
22u B
RG
H1
C202
ID
16V 1608
R247 0 XX TA B 47u
R219 6.3V
100k 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 TA B
1005
K C226 C223 R216 R217 C218

CD_GND 6 TO(1/3,3/3)
47u 0.1u * * C216

L203 0.1u *
6.3V B B
* FB210 TA B 1005 1005
R247 ± 10% 0uH
*
FB205 *
L201 R250 C233

FB202 1k XX
* * FB206
0uH
16
CAMERA PROCESS
4-13 4-14 CD-333 (2/3)/CD-334 (2/3)
MVC-CD200/CD300
For Schematic Diagram For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-7 for CD-333 printed wiring board. • Refer to page 4-9 for CD-334 printed wiring board.
• Refer to page 4-73 for waveforms. • Refer to page 4-73 for waveforms.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CD-333 BOARD(3/3) (MVC-CD200) CD-334 BOARD(3/3) (MVC-CD300)
CCD IMAGER(CCD BLOCK) NO MARK:STILL/PB MODE CCD IMAGER(CCD BLOCK) NO MARK:STILL/PB MODE SIGNAL PATH
S :STILL MODE
A -REF.NO.:1000 SERIES- A -REF.NO.:1000 SERIES- P :PB MODE VIDEO SIGNAL
XX MARK:NO MOUNT L101
XX MARK:NO MOUNT L401
Q102 CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA
100uH
± 10%
2SC4178-F13F14-T1
BUFFER 14.6
SIGNAL PATH 100uH
2520
Q402
2SC4178-F13F14-T1
BUFFER S14.5/P0
CAM_15V CAM_15V REC
10.4
VIDEO SIGNAL S10.5/P0
9.7
CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA 4 PB
S9.7/P0
CCD_OUT CCD_OUT
V1B
REC C409
V1B
10p
R407
B V1A
V2
PB B V1A CH
1005 4700
1005
C111 R108 V2
10p
-0.2
4700
V3B CH 1005 V3B
S-7.3/P0
S-0.1/P0
S-0.1/P0
S-0.1/P0
1005
V3A V3A R405
-7.2
-7.2
-0.2
-0.2
S10.5/
S-7.3/P0 XX
V4 10.4 V4 1005
-7.2
P0
S-7.3/P0
2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 4 2
ICX262AQ-13
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
V4
V3A
V3B
V2
V1A
V1B
GND
VOUT
VOUT
TEST
V4
V3A
V3B
V2
V1A
V1B
TEST
GND
5 TO(2/3)
5 TO(2/3)
1 3 5
C C IC401 1 3 7 5
IC101
ICX284AQ-13
CSUB
GND
VDD
IC401
SUB
CCD IMAGER
H1
RG
H2
H1
H2
VL
CCD IMAGER
7 6 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11
S2.3/P0 S14.5/P0
S12.5/P0
CSUB
S2.5/P0
S-7.5/P0
S10.0/P0
S10.0/P0
VSHT
S2.5/P0
S2.3/P0
GND
VDD
IC101
RG
H2
H1
VL
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 7 6
R102 15 R401 0 1005
1005
R106 22 1005
H2 14.6 H2
1.3
1.8
12.8
-7.5
7.8
15 R402 0 1005
R103 1005
D H1
C106 0.1u
16V B 1608
C109
0.1u D H1
R406 68 1005
R104 68 1005 16V RG R413
RG B
8.3
1608 47
CAM_-7.5V C407 1005 C408
CAM_-7.5V R107 FB401 C404
D101 MA111-(K8).S0 0uH 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u
FB101 220k 16V
0uH D401 50V R404 16V
1005 B 1608 B 1608
MA111-(K8).S0 B 3216 1M
VSHT C107 VSHT 1005
C102 C105 2200p C413 C412
1u C101 C104 0.1u B 1u 2200p
6.8u C103 0.01u R101 50V C108 1608 C401 C402 C403 R409 R403
25V 22u 100k R105 0.1u 25V 22u 100k 2700 C405 B
35V 16V B B 3216 6.8u 0.1u 1608
B 3216 16V 1005 2200 10V 35V 16V 1005 1005 0.1u
TA C B 8.2 10V 10V
TA B 1005 1005 B TA C TA B B 1005 S10.0/P0
1005 B
E 4 TO(2/3) VSUB_CONT E 4 TO(2/3(CN203)) VSUB_CONT
0
1005
0
6 TO(1/3,2/3) CD_GND 6 TO(1/3,2/3) CD_GND

Q101 Q401
UN9213J-(K8).SO UN9213J-(K8).SO
INV. INV.
Precautions Upon Replacing CCD imager Precautions Upon Replacing CCD imager
• The CD-333 board mounted as a repair part is not equipped • The CD-334 board mounted as a repair part is not equipped
F with a CCD imager.
F with a CCD imager.
When replacing this board, remove the CCD imager from the When replacing this board, remove the CCD imager from the
old one and mount it onto the new one. old one and mount it onto the new one.
• If the CCD imager has been replaced, carry out all the • If the CCD imager has been replaced, carry out all the
adjustments for the camera section. adjustments for the camera section.
• As the CCD imager may be damaged by static electricity from • As the CCD imager may be damaged by static electricity from
G its structure, handle it carefully like for the MOS IC. G its structure, handle it carefully like for the MOS IC.
In addition, ensure that the receiver is not covered with dusts In addition, ensure that the receiver is not covered with dusts
nor exposed to strong light. nor exposed to strong light.
16 16
CCD IMAGER
CD-333 (3/3)/CD-334 (3/3) 4-15 4-16
MVC-CD200/CD300
TK-61 (LENS CAP DETECT) PRINTED WIRING BOARD

— Ref. No. TK-61 Board; 6,000 Series —
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
TK-61 BOARD
LENS CAP DETECT
A -REF.NO.:6000 SERIES- R511
0
FP-370
XX MARK:NO MOUNT
CN503 5P FLEXIBLE
1 CAM_P_5V
R503 2 CAM_P_5V
R512
NO MARK:STILL/PB MODE 0
0 3 N,C LED901
CN501 5P IC501 (PRELAMP)
XX 4 PRELAMP_LED
TO CAM_P_5V 1 R502 R505
SY-67 BOARD(9/10) 22k XX 3.5 5 PRELAMP_LED
5
CN703 PRELAMP_AF_ON 2 3.5 Q501
THROUGH THE R504 HN1C01FU-TE85R
2
LENS_CAP_OPEN 3
FP-309 FLEXIBLE 0 LED DRIVE
4
REG_GND 4
(SEE PAGE 4-39) 0 0 R509
SELF_TIMER 5 10k
0
R506 0
Q502 82
XX
R508
R510 R507 10k
120 1k
S502
(LENS CAP DETECT)
MVC-CD300
16

SY-67
• TK-61 board consists of multiple layers. However, only LD, PEARL, VIDEO OUT, SH, 16M FLASH MEMORY,
the sides (layers) A and B are shown. 64M SDRAM, CLK GEN, CW, HI CONTROL,
• Chip parts
FLASH UNIT
Transistor
C 6 5 4
TK-61
B E 1 2 3 (LENS CAP DETECT)

Schematic diagram and printed wiring board of the SY-67 and MD-083 boards are not shown.
CD-334 (CD300)
LENS CAP DETECT

4-17 4-18 TK-61
MVC-CD200/CD300
FS-83 (CHARGER) PRINTED WIRING BOARD

— Ref. No. FS-83 Board; 1,000 Series —
1 2 3 4 5 6
CONTROL SWITCH
BLOCK(ZK-503)
A
S001
(MODE SWITCH)
1 (P_AUTO)
(PLAY)
A 2 S(AE-S)
(MOVIE) R005
4k
R001 6 10
20k SET (SET UP)
UP A(AE-A)
CAM_3.1V 14 B 3
B MODE_DIAL 13
R003
24k
R006
6k
5 4
XSET_UP 12 M(MANUAL)
SCN(SCENE)
XPB_ON 11
N.C 10 R004
10k
GND 9
TO N.C 8
SY-67 BOARD(9/10)
CN705 XPOWER_ON 7
S003 S002
(SEE PAGE N.C 6 R008 (EXEC)
20k POWER
C 4-39)
CAM_3.1V 5 ON/OFF(CHG)
KEY_AD3 4
GND 3
DIAL_A 2
DIAL_B 1
D
R002 R007
4400 6600
S004 S005 LND001
(ZOOM) STATICS_GND
W T
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK(ZK-503)is replaced as a block.

So the PRINTED WIRING BOARD is omitted.
E
16

MD-083
• FS-83 board consists of multiple layers. However, only EFM/ENC CONTROL
Transistor Diode
C 3
B E 2 1
FS-83
(CHARGER)
JK-208
(USB INTERFACE)
CD-333 (CD200)

ZK-503 / CHARGER
FS-83 4-55 4-56
MVC-CD200/CD300

• Refer to page 4-56 for printed wiring board.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
FS-83 BOARD NO MARK:STILL/PB MODE
CHARGER
A -REF.NO.:1000 SERIES- C001
XX
C002
XX
XX MARK:NO MOUNT B B
CN004 14P
CN002 3P LF001
1 REG_GND
ACV_UNREG 1
J901 Q002 2 REG_GND
ACV_GND 2 TPC8305(TE12L) R013
DC IN SWITCH 10 R014 3 REG_GND
BATT/XEXT 3 2 3216 1k F001
8.4
FB002 R004 7.9 8.4 1.4A 4 REG_GND
0uH 1k 32V
R003 8.1
1 7 7.7 5 P_4.6V
XX F002 TO
1.4A
B 2W 8
32V
6 P_4.6V SY-67(10/10) BOARD
8.4
2012 R006 5 Q003 CN001
0 2SB1122-ST-TD 7 D_4.6V/1.8V
2W R008 3 6 CHARGE SWITCH F003 THROUGH THE
LND001 470k 1.4A FP-136 FLEXIBLE
2012 8 D_4.6V/1.8V
8.1
D007 32V
STATIC_GND
1SS357-TPH3
R015
6800
(SEE PAGE 4-41)
7.9 4 9 HI_UNREG
F004
D006 1.4A 10 D_3.4V/3.2V
MA8120-TX 0 32V
11 D_3.4V/3.2V
C004 1.7 F005
D003 0.022u 1.4A 12 ST_UNREG
B 32V
MAZT082H08S0 Q004
UN9213J-(K8).SO 13 ST_UNREG
CHARGE SWITCH
C CN003 3P
FB001
7.9
R010
F006
14 BATT_UNREG
BT901 BATT_UNREG 1 0uH 1.4A
0 1M
BATTERY 32V
TERMINAL
S BATT_SIG 2
Q001 C005
BATT_GND 3 SSM3K03FE(TPL3) R016 XX
SWITCH 47k B
S002
MENU S001
(FLASH)
D R011
3300
CN001 11P
REG_GND 1
UP 1 RIGHT
BATT_SIG 2
REG_GND 3 R017 (EDIT SERACH)

470k SET SET S (MACRO)
TO BATT/XEXT 4
SY-67(9/10) BOARD R009
CN708 FAST_CHARGE 5 R005 R007
180 2200 3300
THROUGH THE INIT_CHARGE 6
FP-362 FLEXIBLE LEFT DOWN
E (SEE PAGE 4-40) D_3.4V 7
(SELF TIMER)
REG_GND 8 R012
2200
D004
POWER_LED 9 TLGU1008(T05,SOY)
(POWER)
KEY_AD0 10
KEY_AD1 11
FB003 C003 Note : Note :

XX 2200p The components identified by Les composants identifiés par
B
F D001
XX
D002
MAZT082H08S0
STATIC_GND
LND002 0 are critical for safety.
Replace only with part number
pour la sécurité.
Ne les remplacer que par une
D005 specified. pièce portant le numéro spécifié.
XX
16
CHARGER
4-57 4-58 FS-83
MVC-CD200/CD300
JK-208 (USB INTERFACE) PRINTED WIRING BOARD

— Ref. No. JK-208 Board; 2,000 Series —

MD-083
• JK-208 board consists of multiple layers. However, only EFM/ENC CONTROL
Transistor Diode
C 3
B E 2 1
FS-83
(CHARGER)
JK-208
(USB INTERFACE)
CD-333 (CD200)
USB INTERFACE
JK-208 4-59 4-60
MVC-CD200/CD300

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
JK-208 BOARD FB102 0uH

4
1 J101
FB103 0uH
USB INTERFACE 5
2 ACC
A -REF.NO.:2000 SERIES- R103 R104
FB104
FB105
0uH
0uH
3
100k 1M
XX MARK:NO MOUNT FB106 0uH
NO MARK:STILL/PB MODE
0 0.3
3.3 R109
Q102 470k C106
Q101 D103 D114 D106 D109 XX D111
UN9213J-(K8).SO UN9113J-(K8).SO MAZT082H08S0 MAZT082H08S0 MAZT082H08S0 MAZT082H08S0 B
SWITCH MA111-(K8).S0
ACC BT
3.3 SWITCH
B R110 LF101
R108 220k CN102 5P
330k
3 4 1 VCC
2 1 2 D-
(USB)
3 D+
3 4
4 ID
2 1
LF102 5 GND
CN101 27P
C EXT_STROB_ON 1
REG_GND 2 R112
C104 D107 0
LANC_SIG 3 XX XX
D102 D104 1608 LND101
REG_GND 4 MAZT082H08S0 MAZT082H08S0
STATIC_GND
XLANC_JACK_IN 5 R111 1k
LANC_DC 6 FB107 0uH J102

TO USB_DET 7 A/V OUT
SY-67 BOARD(9/10) FB108 0uH (MONO)
CN709 AV_JACK_IN 8
THROUGH THE C103
D FP-361 FLEXIBLE
REG_GND 9 C102
XX
CH
XX
CH
V_OUT 10
(SEE PAGE 4-40) FB109 0uH
REG_GND 11
Q103
A_OUT 12 C105
UN9113J-(K8).SO D112
SWITCH XX MA111-(K8).S0
REG_GND 13 B
3.3 D105 D108 D110 1608
D_3.4V 14 MAZT082H08S0 MAZT082H08S0 MAZT082H08S0
FB101
VDD 15 0uH
3.1
USB_D+PULLUP 16
IC101 PDIUSBP11APW,118
E USB_D+OUT 17
3.3 0.4
10 11 12 13 14
R107
1
USB_D-OUT 18 MODE VCC

3.1 0 1500
SIGNAL PATH
2
USB_TXENL 19 FB110 OE# VMO/FSEO

1MH 0 3.1
R106
3
USB_XVDATA 20 FB111 RCV VPO

1MH 0 0.4 24 VIDEO SIGNAL
4
USB_D+IN 21 FB112 VP USB_D+

AUDIO
1MH 0 0.4
CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA SIGNAL
5
USB_D-IN 22 VM USB_D-
3.1 3.3 R105
24
6
USB_SUSPND 23 SUSPND SPEED

REC
7
REG_GND 24 GND (NC) C108

C101
0.1u 22u
F XEJECT 25 B 6.3V
TA
PB
XLID_OPEN 26
R115
VL_3V 27
1k
R113
33 S102
IC101
USB I/F
OPEN
C107
0.1u R114
B 1M S101 S103
BT101
(LITHIUM BATTERY)
G (OPEN/CLOSE)
D101
XX
D113
16 MAZT082H08S0
USB INTERFACE
4-61 4-62 JK-208
MVC-CD200/CD300
PK-58 (RGB DRIVE, TIMING GENERATOR, BACK LIGHT) PRINTED WIRING BOARD
— Ref. No. PK-58 Board; 4,000 Series —

• Refer to page 4-79 for parts location.
• PK-58 board consists of multiple layers. However, only
the sides (layers) A and B are shown.
• Chip parts
Transistor Diode
C 6 5 4 3
B E 1 2 3 2 1

MD-083
CD-RF PROCESS, SERVO, CD, DSP,
EFM/ENC CONTROL
PK-58
(RGB DRIVE, TIMING GENERATOR, BACK LIGHT)
FS-83
(CHARGER)
JK-208
(USB INTERFACE)
CD-333 (CD200)
RGB DRIVE, TIMING GENERATOR, BACK LIGHT

PK-58 4-64
MVC-CD200/CD300
(EXPOSURE)
(SPOT METER)
RGB DRIVE, TIMING GENERATOR, BACK LIGHT

4-65 PK-58
MVC-CD200/CD300

• Refer to page 4-74 for waveforms.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
PK-58 BOARD(1/3) NO MARK:STILL/PB MODE

RGB DRIVE(RGB BLOCK)
A -REF.NO.:4000 SERIES-
XX MARK:NO MOUNT
D304
TLAU1008(T05,SOY) R322
470k
COM_ADJ
/CHG (AMBER)
R307 C311
AMP
FRPV
FRPT
BRT_R
BRT_B
470 L302
R311 R316 R318 10u 10uH BL_LEV
R313 22k 15k 12k 10V ± 10% BL_LEV 4 TO(3/3)
Q0301 3.0 TA
47k
UN9213J-(K8).SO R319
R312 P_4.9V 5 TO(2/3)
39k
B LED DRIVE
R324
L301
100uH
± 10%
C309
0.1u
12k
R317
33k
C313
XX 0.1u
CN301 32P 0
CHARGE_LED 32
C307
IC301 47u
1.1
0.8
2.2
1.5
2.3
2.4
2.4
4.9
7.5
KEY_AD2 31
6.3V 2.0
HI_UNREG TA B C312
HI_UNREG 30 EVR 10u
LANC_IN 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 10V
LANC_IN 29 IC301 TA A
MB40D001PFV-G-BND-ER
COM_AMP
GAMMA2
GAMMA0
RGB_AMP
FRP
COM_FRP
OUT_LIM
VSH
VCC2
SUB_BRT_R
SUB_BRT_B
LANC_OUT
COM_BLK_LVL
LANC_OUT 28 C305
0.1u 3.2 3.2
13
12
REG_GND 27 VDD BRT_TST
C MS_SCLK 26
MS_SCLK
3.3
6
14
11
MS_BS VCC P_MUTE
MS_BS 25 C306 2.5
48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
MS_DI0 0.1u H_REV 3.3 2.2 BL_LEV C308 COM_BLK B_OUT VB
15
10
MS_DIO 24 H_REV BL_LEVEL 3.2 2.0 C314
0.1u
VDD 1.3 XTEST B_DC_DET 1u
VDD 23 3.3 V-COM 2.1 2.5 1608
V_REV
5
16
V_REV
9
V-COM BRIGHT G_OUT VG
BL_UNREG 22
NTSC 3.3 2.0 VCO
2.2
CONTRAST IC302 G_DC_DET
2.0 C315
1u
17
BL_UNREG NTSC
8
BL_UNREG 21 VCO COM-O 2.5 1608
COM_OUT RGB DRIVE R_OUT VR
BL_GND 20 BL_GND 1 TO(3/3) 0 1.5 COM_ADJ 3.8 2.0
COMTST
4 C316
18
COMTST
7
COM_ADJ SUB_CON_B IC302 R_DC_DET COM-O
BL_GND 19 PANEL_4.9V 1u COM-O
IR3Y37A4 1608
D 3.0 2.3 AMP SUB_CON_R GND1
19
CLK
6
XCAM_SCK 18 RGB_AMP 2.2
TO VCC1 GND2 FRPV
CAM_SO 17 0.3 2.2 FRPV
SY-67 BOARD(3/10)
20
SI
5
CONT OSD_B SYNC_OUT FRPT
CN707 XCS_PANEL_D/A 16 3.2 FRPT
1.6 BRT_B OSD_G SYNC_IN
THROUGH THE
21
SO
4
PANEL_-15.3V 15 PANEL_-15.3V BRT_B 4.6
FP-363 FLEXIBLE R310 OSD_R EXT_BGP P_XHD
PANEL_13.2V 14 PANEL_13.2V 3.1 2.2 BRT_R 0 0
(SEE PAGE 1 2 3
22
XEN
3
BRT_R BLACK_IN SYNC_SEP COMTST
Y/CR/XRGB_SW
4-27) PANEL_4.9V 13 PANEL_4.9V COMTST
2 TO(2/3) 3.2 1.6 COLOR NTSC
23
VDDA
2
PANEL_6.5V 12 COLOR NTSC
AGC_OUT
REG_OUT
R/R-Y/CR
AGC_LVL
B/B-Y/CB
PICTURE
AGC_FIL
V_REV
H_FIL_IN
COLOR
H_FIL
PANEL_3.4V 11 PANEL_3.4V 2.1 V_REV
E 24
6
1
VSS BRIGHT H_REV TO(2/3)
G/Y
1.9
3.2
1.6
2.1
2.1
1.2
D_3.4V 10 D_3.4V H_REV
1.9
V-COM
REG_GND 9 V-COM
FB301 0uH C302 0.01u 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 VCO
PANEL_Y 8 VCO
FB302 0uH C303 0.01u
PANEL_R-Y 7
FB303 0uH C304 0.01u COLOR
PANEL_B-Y 6 R314
XX R321
REG_GND 5 10k
PANEL_V 4 PANEL_V
3 TO(2/3) R315 C310 R320
HDO 3 HDO XX 0.1u 100k
F RESET 2
R303
REG_GND
ACCESS_LED 1 680
S305
D302
TLSU1008(T05,SOY) (RED) R323 RESET
470k
ACCESS LED
W_MSK
CN302 18P
1 N,C
G 2 N,C
S301 S303 S306
R309 3 N,C
DISPLAY R304 AE LOCK R308 + (EXPOSURE)
2200 3300 6800 4 REG_GND
5 N,C
R467
4.7k 6 N,C
HSY 7 HSY
7 TO(2/3)
8 PANEL_COM CPC
PANEL_COM
R306 9 VG (FOR CHECK)

H S304
22k
S307 SIGNAL PATH HI_UNREG
10 HI_UNREG
(SPOT METER) FOCUS LANC_IN
11 LANC_IN
VIDEO SIGNAL LANC_OUT
12 LANC_OUT
CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA 13 MAKER_RECOG

D301 MS_SCLK
14 MS_SCLK
MAZT082H08S0 REC MS_BS
15 MS_BS
C301 MS_DI0
FB304 2200p D303 PB 16 MS_DIO
LND301 XX B 1SS352-TPH3
1608 17 N,C
I STATIC_GND
VDD
18 VDD
16
RGB DRIVE
PK-58 (1/3) 4-67 4-68
MVC-CD200/CD300

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

S :STILL MODE
TIMING GENERATOR(TG BLOCK) P :PB MODE
A -REF.NO.:4000 SERIES-
Q401-Q404
XX MARK:NO MOUNT COM DRIVE
SIGNAL PATH
VG
VB
VR
5 TO(1/3) P_4.9V L401 R402
10uH
± 10%
XX VIDEO SIGNAL
PANEL_13.2V
R435 CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA
PANEL_-15.3V Q403 33
L402 R429
IC402 100k 2SD2216J-QR(K8).SO ± 0.5%
B
10uH
± 10% IC402 NJM062V(TE2)
1.8
12.9
C415
REC
R436 0.01u C417
VCO 2.5
VCC+
12.9 22k 16V 0.1u
C419 PB
1
OUT1
8
XX
R411 Q402 ± 5% B
C411 R425 1.3 2SB1462J-QR(K8).SO
10k 2.4 1.3 100k
1SV290(TPL3)
2 TO(1/3) 560p OUT2
2
IN1-
7
L403 C409 R437
CH Q404
10uH R403 C407 0.1u 1608 33k
D401
0.3
2SD2216J-QR(K8).SO
2.4 1.3 2SB1462J-QR(K8).SO
± 10% 0 0.001u ± 0.5% C416 C418
IN2-
3
IN1+
6
12.9
-10.6
1u 1u
PANEL_4.9V L405 F F
Q401
R408 -10.6 0.3 1.3
L404 680k 6.8uH C414 2012 2012 R440
0
IN2+
4
VCC-
5
XX 2520 6.8u
0.8 16V
PANEL_3.4V R416 R417 TA A R441
XX
XX
R414
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
47
68k
47
47
0
0
68k R438
C D_3.4V
C402 C405
1M
R422
R428
100k -10.6
22
± 0.5% R442
R459
R464
R458
R457
R460
R461
R462
R465
R466
R456
R463
2.2u 4700 0
C401 0.1u
XX 25V R409 C406
TA A 120k 0.1u R412 D402
1M MA8047-H-TX R443
C413 XX
C408 1u R432
R415 R418 R421 R426 R433 100k
82p 47k 33k B
CH 22k 4700 33k
2012
REG_GND R439
VB XX R444
VB 0
VG
COM-O
V-COM
VG
VR
VCO
D VR
TG_24 R445 0
24
CN401 24P
CLD
TG_23 R446 0
23 SPD
V-COM R447 0
4.9
2.4
TG_22
V-COM 22 CTR
COM-O C404 R404 R448 0
0.1u TG_21
4.9
4.9
4.9
4.9
2.4
2.3
COM-O 47k 21 EX3
VCO TG_20 R449 0
VCO 20 EX2
36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25
6 TO(1/3) 19 VB12
TG_18
3.0
P16
VSEPC
P15
MUT
PDP
GND
VDD
TST2
TST1
OSCI
OSCO
TESTO
18 RES
R450 XX
E R430
XX TG_12
17
16
TST
VR
R405 R434
P_XHD 0
P_XHD 47k 2.7 0 TG_24 15 VG LCD901
48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
W_MSK SYNI CLD R451 XX COLOR
W_MSK 0.5 TG_23 14 VB LCD
NTSC SYNC SPD R452 XX UNIT
NTSC 4.9 2.4 TG_22 13 GND
WIDE CTR 2.5INCH
COMTST 0 TG_21 12 VSH
COMTST PDPC EX3 R453
V_REV
V_REV
H_REV
NTSC 3.3
3.0
NTPC1 IC401 4.9
EX2
0.4
TG_20 XX
R454
11
10
COM
VGL
H_REV TESTI TIMING GENERATOR TESTO XX
F FRPV
FRPV C403
0.1u
4.9
TEST
IC401
RES
2.4 TG_18
TG_17
9 VSS
16V V_REV 3.3 4.9 TG_17 8 MO2

R401 R410 VREVC LZ9GH234 MODE2 TG_16
B 100k
XX 4.9 4.9 TG_16 7 MO1
FRPT TESTI MODE1 TG_15
FRPT H_REV 3.3 0 TG_15 6 GPCK
HREVC EX1 TG_14
HDO COMTST 0 4.8 TG_14 5 SPS
COMTST SPS TG_13
3 TO(1/3) 4.9 3.9 TG_13 4 CLS
LOWI CLS R455
0 3 VCC
PANEL_V
2 VSH
G
WIDOV
WIDOT
1 VGH
BGPO
SYNO
BLKO
FRPV
FRPT
BLKI
GND
HSY
VSY
VIN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
TG_12
2.4
2.4
R424
4.6
3.4
2.4
XX
R431
R419 R420 R427 XX
R406 68k
XX 33k 0
± 0.5% ± 0.5%
PANEL_COM
7 TO(1/3)
P_XHD
C412
82p
H
W_MSK
CH HSY
FRPV
FRPT
16
TIMING GENERATOR
4-69 4-70 PK-58
MVC-CD200/CD300

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BACK LIGHT(BL BLOCK)
A -REF.NO.:4000 SERIES- Q206
FP102-TL R217
1800
XX MARK:NO MOUNT L201 Q204 SWITCHING L202 L203 1/10W
5
4.7uH 2SD2216J-QR(K8).SO 22uH 100uH 2012
2520 3 5.6
SWITCHING 8.2 1
BL_UNREG 4
7.7 2
5 6
1 2
R207 8.2 3
22k R218
1800 CN201 10P
5.4 5.4
1/10W
2012 4 10 10 BL_HIGH
4 5 C214
7.9 0.015u C216
B 1 TO(1/3)
C202
7.7
0
Q209
3 1 2012 T201
INVERTER
12p
3kV
9 N.C.
R206 C206 R208 C209 -0.9 SL 8 N.C.

22u FP216-TL TANSFORMER
560 18p 560 27p INVERTER 2
16V C203 CH CH 7 N.C. ND901
TRANS DRIVE BACK LIGHT
TA B 0.22u
F C211 C212 6 N.C.
D201 33u
10V 1u
5 N.C.
XX TA B F
BL_GND Q210 4 N.C.
Q202
UN9112J-(K8).SO UN9112J-(K8).SO
LED DRIVE 3 BL_LOW
4.9 B+ SWITCH 4.8 4.8
PANEL_4.9V 2 LED D901
0 R223 (STARTER)
C IC201 R210 C210
120 1 LED_GND
10k XX
R205 SELECT SWITCH ± 0.5% 4.8
120k
LND201 ± 0.5%
R209
SHIELD_GND 4.8 4700
0
LND202 4.1 1.0 C208
0 0.01u R219
SHIELD_GND 1 2 3 4 B 100k
C207
R215 R211
TL5001CDR
0.022u
OUT
VCC
FB
IN
47k B 1800
± 0.5%
D Q201
UN9214J-(K8).SO
SWITCH
C201
2.2
0.01u
B
IC202
Q207
CURRENT DETECT
IC201
HN1C01FE-Y/GR(TPLR3)
UN9213J-(K8).SO
GND
DTC
SCP
PROTECT SW
RT
0.9
1.0
Q203
D202
4.8
8 7 6 5 0.6
1.8 MA111-(K8).S0
0.9
3
0.9
2.4
0
E 0 0
2
0.4 4.8 0.3
1
R203 C204 R212
2.5 3300 R216 0
6800 2.2u 4700 C213 R220 R221 C215 R222
6.3V ± 0.5% IC202 0.1u 6800 22k 0.1u 470
± 0.5% TA A NJM2406F-TE2 B B
C205 Q205 R213 R214 Q208

R204 UN9213J-(K8).SO
27k 2.2u UN9213J-(K8).SO 1500 1500
SWITCH
± 0.5% F SWITCH
2012
4 TO(1/3) BL_LEV
F
Note : Note :
16
BACK LIGHT
PK-58 (3/3) 4-71 4-72
MVC-CD200/CD300
4-3. WAVEFORMS
CD-333 BOARD CD-334 BOARD

1 IC101 1,3 9 IC202 qh 1 IC401 1,3 9 IC202 qh
2µsec
3.475µsec
7.5Vp-p 7.5Vp-p
100µsec 3.4Vp-p 3.4Vp-p
54nsec 124µsec 54nsec
2 IC101 2 q; IC202 w; 2 IC401 2 q; IC202 w;
24.0Vp-p 3.1Vp-p 22.0Vp-p 3.1Vp-p

33.3msec 124µsec 33.3msec 124µsec
3 IC101 4,6 qa CN203 rs 3 IC401 4,6 qa CN203 rs

124µsec
7.5Vp-p 7.5Vp-p
3.475µsec 100µsec 2µsec 3.2Vp-p
4.4Vp-p 54nsec
54.7nsec
4 IC101 5 4 IC401 5
24.0Vp-p 22.0Vp-p
33.3msec 33.3msec
5 IC101 8 5 IC401 q;
1.0Vp-p 1.0Vp-p
33.3msec 124µsec
6 IC101 qf 6 IC401 qs
3.7Vp-p 3.7Vp-p
54nsec 54nsec
7 IC101 qg,qh 7 IC401 qd,qf,ql,w;
3.6Vp-p 4.7Vp-p
54nsec 54nsec
8 IC202 e; 8 IC202 e;
1.0Vp-p 1.0Vp-p
33.3msec 124µsec
WAVEFORMS
4-73 CD-333, CD-334
MVC-CD200/CD300
PK-58 BOARD
1 IC302 8
0.5Vp-p
H
2 IC302 9
0.2Vp-p
H
3 IC302 q;
0.2Vp-p
H
4 IC302 w; 4.5Vp-p
2H
5 IC302 ws 4.5Vp-p
2H
6 IC302 wf 4.5Vp-p
2H
WAVEFORMS
PK-58 4-74
Waveforms and parts location of the SY-67 and
MD-083 boards are not shown.
MVC-CD200/CD300
4-4. MOUNTED PARTS LOCATION no mark : side A

* mark : side B
CD-333 BOARD CD-334 BOARD
C101 D-4 FB101 C-2 * R219 C-8 C201 B-4 FB203 B-4 R225 B-3
C102 C-3 * FB201 B-7 * R220 B-9 * C202 A-7 * FB204 B-8 R226 B-3
C103 C-2 * FB202 A-7 R221 B-3 * C203 B-8 * FB205 B-7 R227 B-3
C104 C-3 FB203 B-4 R222 B-3 * C204 B-8 * FB206 B-7 R228 B-3
C105 C-3 * FB204 B-8 R223 B-3 * C205 B-7 * FB207 B-8 R229 B-3
* C106 B-7 * FB205 B-7 R224 B-3 * C206 B-8 * FB208 B-8 R230 B-3
C107 C-4 * FB206 B-7 R225 B-3 * C207 B-8 FB209 A-3 R231 B-3
C108 C-4 * FB207 B-8 R226 B-3 C208 B-4 * FB210 A-9 R232 B-3
C109 C-4 * FB208 B-8 R227 B-3 C209 B-4 FB211 B-2 R233 B-3
C111 C-4 FB209 A-3 R228 B-3 C210 B-4 FB212 B-2 R234 B-3
C201 B-4 * FB210 A-8 R229 B-3 C211 B-4 FB213 B-2 R235 B-2
* C202 A-7 FB211 B-3 R230 B-3 C212 B-4 FB214 B-2 R236 B-2
* C203 B-7 FB212 B-3 R231 B-3 C213 B-4 FB215 B-2 * R237 B-7
* C204 B-8 FB213 B-3 R232 B-3 C214 B-4 FB216 B-3 * R238 B-7
* C205 B-7 FB214 B-3 R233 B-3 C215 B-4 FB217 B-3 * R239 B-7
* C206 B-8 FB215 B-3 R234 B-3 * C216 B-7 FB218 A-3 * R240 B-7
* C207 B-8 FB216 B-3 R235 B-3 * C217 B-8 FB219 A-3 * R241 B-7
C208 B-4 FB217 A-3 R236 B-3 * C218 B-7 FB220 A-2 R242 B-3
C209 B-4 FB218 A-3 * R237 B-7 C219 B-4 FB221 A-3 * R244 B-8
C210 B-4 FB219 A-3 * R238 B-7 C220 B-4 FB222 A-2 * R245 B-7
C211 B-4 FB220 A-3 * R239 B-7 C221 B-3 FB223 B-3 * R246 A-8
C212 B-4 FB221 A-3 * R240 B-7 C222 B-3 FB224 B-2 * R247 A-8
C213 B-4 FB222 A-2 * R241 B-7 * C223 B-7 FB225 B-2 R248 D-2
C214 B-4 FB223 B-3 R242 B-3 C224 B-3 FB226 B-2 R249 D-2
C215 B-4 FB224 B-3 * R244 B-8 C225 B-3 FB301 A-2 * R250 C-8
* C216 B-7 FB225 B-2 * R245 B-7 * C226 A-8 FB302 A-3 R303 C-1
* C217 B-8 FB226 B-2 * R246 A-8 * C227 A-8 FB303 A-3 R304 C-1
* C218 B-7 * R247 A-8 * C228 C-8 FB304 A-3 * R305 C-8
C219 B-4 * IC101 C-6 R248 D-2 * C229 C-8 FB305 A-4 R306 C-2
C220 B-4 * IC201 B-8 R249 D-2 * C230 C-8 FB306 A-4 R307 C-2
C221 B-4 IC202 B-3 * R250 C-7 * C231 C-8 FB307 A-4 R308 C-2
C222 B-3 * IC301 D-8 R303 C-1 * C232 B-9 FB308 A-4 R309 C-2
* C223 B-7 * IC302 C-9 R304 C-2 * C233 C-8 FB401 C-2 R310 A-4
C224 A-3 IC303 C-2 * R305 C-8 * C234 C-8 * R311 C-8
C225 A-3 IC304 D-2 R306 C-2 C301 C-1 * IC201 B-8 R312 C-2
* C226 A-8 R307 C-2 C302 C-1 IC202 B-3 R313 A-4
* C227 A-8 L101 C-4 R308 C-2 C303 C-2 * IC301 D-8 R314 D-2
* C228 B-8 * L201 A-7 R309 C-2 C304 C-2 * IC302 C-9 * R315 C-8
* C229 B-8 * L202 A-8 * R311 C-8 C305 D-2 IC303 C-2 R316 C-2
* C230 B-8 * L203 A-8 R312 C-2 C306 D-2 IC304 D-2 * R317 C-8
* C231 C-8 * L301 D-9 R314 D-2 * C307 D-9 * IC401 C-6 R318 C-2
* C232 B-9 * L302 D-9 * R315 C-8 * C308 D-9 R319 D-2
* C233 C-7 L303 C-2 R316 C-2 * C309 C-9 * L201 A-8 R320 C-2
* C234 B-8 L304 C-1 * R317 C-8 * C310 C-9 * L202 B-8 R321 D-2
C301 C-1 R318 C-2 * C311 D-9 * L203 A-9 R322 D-2
C302 C-2 Q101 C-3 R319 D-2 C312 D-2 * L301 D-9 R323 C-2
C303 C-2 Q102 C-4 R320 C-2 C313 C-2 * L302 D-9 R324 C-2
C304 C-2 * Q201 B-9 R321 D-2 C314 D-2 L303 C-2 R325 C-2
C305 D-2 Q301 C-1 R322 D-2 C315 D-2 L304 C-1 R326 D-2
C306 C-2 * Q302 C-8 R323 C-2 C316 D-2 L401 C-4 R327 C-2
* C307 D-8 Q303 D-2 R324 C-3 C317 C-2 R328 D-2
* C308 D-9 R325 C-2 C318 D-2 * Q201 B-9 R329 D-2
* C309 C-9 R101 C-4 R326 D-3 C319 C-2 Q301 C-1 R330 D-2
* C310 C-9 * R102 B-7 R327 C-2 C320 C-1 * Q302 C-8 R331 C-2
* C311 D-9 * R103 B-7 R328 C-3 C321 C-1 Q303 D-2 R332 C-2
C312 D-2 * R104 B-7 R329 D-2 C322 C-2 Q401 C-3 R333 A-4
C313 C-2 R105 C-4 R330 D-3 * C323 D-9 Q402 C-4 R334 A-3
C314 C-3 R106 C-4 R331 C-2 * C324 C-8 R335 B-2
C315 D-2 R107 C-4 R332 C-2 C325 D-2 * R201 B-8 R336 B-2
C316 D-2 R108 C-4 R335 B-2 C401 D-4 R202 B-4 * R337 C-8
C317 C-2 * R201 A-8 R336 B-2 C402 C-2 * R203 B-8 R338 A-3
C318 D-3 R202 B-4 * R337 C-8 C403 C-3 * R204 B-9 * R401 B-7
C319 C-2 * R203 A-8 C404 C-3 * R205 B-9 * R402 B-7
C320 C-2 * R204 B-9 TH301 C-2 C405 C-4 * R206 B-8 R403 C-3
C321 C-2 * R205 B-8 * C407 B-7 * R207 B-8 R404 C-4
C322 C-2 * R206 B-8 * X201 B-9 C408 C-4 R208 B-3 R405 D-4
* C323 D-8 * R207 B-8 * X202 B-9 C409 C-4 R209 B-3 * R406 B-7
* C324 C-8 R209 B-3 C412 C-4 R210 A-2 R407 C-4
C325 D-2 R210 A-2 C413 C-3 R211 B-3 R409 C-3
R211 B-3 * R212 B-8 R413 C-4
CN203 B-2 * R212 B-8 CN203 B-2 * R213 B-7
CN301 D-1 * R213 B-7 CN301 D-1 * R214 B-8 TH301 C-2
* R214 B-8 CN302 A-3 * R215 B-7
D101 C-4 * R215 B-7 CN303 A-4 * R216 B-7 * X201 B-9
D201 A-2 * R216 B-7 * R217 B-7 * X202 B-9
D301 C-2 * R217 B-7 D201 A-2 * R218 B-7
D302 C-1 * R218 B-7 D301 D-1 * R219 C-8
D302 C-1 * R220 B-9
D401 C-4 R221 B-3
R222 B-3
* FB201 B-7 R223 B-3
* FB202 A-7 R224 B-3
PARTS LOCATION
CD-333, CD-334 4-78
MVC-CD200/CD300
no mark : side A
* mark : side B
FS-83 BOARD JK-208 BOARD PK-58 BOARD
* C001 A-5 * BT101 C-7 C201 E-3 IC302 E-2 R401 C-1
* C002 A-5 C202 E-5 IC401 C-2 * R402 B-11
* C003 D-5 C101 C-2 C203 E-5 IC402 C-3 R403 D-3
* C004 B-5 C102 B-1 C204 E-4 * R404 D-12
* C005 D-4 C103 B-1 C205 D-4 L201 E-4 * R405 D-12
* C104 C-6 C206 E-4 L202 E-5 R406 D-2
* CN001 C-5 * C105 B-7 C207 E-3 L203 D-5 R408 C-2
* CN002 A-5 C106 C-3 C208 E-3 L301 F-1 R409 C-2
* CN003 A-4 C108 C-2 C209 E-4 L302 D-3 R410 D-2
* CN004 D-4 C210 E-3 L401 C-1 R411 C-3
CN101 C-2 C211 E-5 L402 E-1 R412 C-2
* D001 D-5 * CN102 B-5 C212 E-5 L403 E-1 R414 C-2
D002 D-1 C213 C-4 L404 C-1 R415 C-2
D003 A-2 * D101 C-6 C214 D-5 L405 C-2 R416 C-3
D004 D-3 * D102 C-6 C215 C-4 R417 C-3
* D005 D-5 * D103 C-6 C216 C-5 Q201 E-3 R418 C-2
* D008 B-5 * D104 C-6 * C301 F-12 Q202 E-3 * R419 D-12
* D009 C-4 * D105 B-7 C302 E-2 Q203 D-4 * R420 D-12
* D106 C-6 C303 E-2 Q204 E-4 R421 D-2
* F001 C-4 * D107 C-6 C304 D-2 Q205 C-5 R422 D-2
* F002 D-4 * D108 B-6 C305 F-1 Q206 E-4 R424 C-1
* F003 D-4 * D109 C-6 C306 F-1 Q207 C-4 R425 C-3
* F004 D-4 * D110 B-6 C307 E-3 Q208 C-5 R426 B-3
* F005 D-4 D111 C-3 C308 E-2 Q209 D-5 R427 C-1
* F006 D-4 * D112 B-7 C309 E-3 Q210 C-4 R428 D-3
* D113 B-6 C310 E-2 Q301 F-3 R429 C-3
FB001 A-2 * D114 C-5 C311 E-3 Q401 C-3 * R430 C-11
FB002 A-1 C312 D-3 Q402 C-3 R431 C-1
* FB003 D-5 FB101 C-2 C313 D-3 Q403 C-3 R432 C-3
* FB102 C-5 C314 D-2 Q404 C-3 R433 B-3
* LF001 A-5 * FB103 C-5 C315 D-2 R434 C-2
* FB104 C-5 C316 D-2 R203 E-4 R435 B-3
* Q001 B-5 * FB105 C-5 C401 D-2 R204 E-4 R436 B-3
* Q002 B-4 FB106 C-3 C402 C-3 R205 E-3 R437 B-3
* Q003 C-4 FB107 B-2 C403 D-2 R206 E-4 R438 C-2
* Q004 C-4 FB108 B-1 C404 D-2 R207 E-4 R439 B-3
* FB109 B-7 C405 C-3 R208 E-4 R440 D-3
R001 A-2 FB110 C-2 C406 C-2 R209 E-3 R441 D-3
R003 A-2 FB111 C-2 C407 C-3 R210 D-3 R442 D-3
R004 A-1 FB112 C-2 C408 C-3 R211 C-4 R443 C-2
R005 D-3 C409 C-3 R212 C-5 R444 B-3
R007 B-1 IC101 C-1 C411 C-3 R213 C-5 R445 C-2
* R008 B-5 * C412 D-12 R214 C-5 R446 C-2
R009 D-1 * J101 C-5 C413 C-3 R215 E-4 R447 C-2
* R010 B-5 * J102 A-6 C414 B-3 R216 C-5 R448 C-2
R011 B-1 C415 B-3 R217 D-6 R449 C-2
R012 D-1 LF101 C-2 C416 D-3 R218 D-5 R450 C-2
* R013 C-4 LF102 C-2 C417 D-2 R219 C-4 R451 C-2
* R014 C-4 C418 C-2 R220 C-4 R452 C-2
* R015 C-4 Q101 C-3 * C419 B-11 R221 C-4 R453 C-2
* R016 C-4 Q102 C-3 R222 C-4 R454 C-1
R017 D-2 Q103 C-2 CN201 B-5 R223 C-4 R455 C-1
CN301 D-1 * R303 D-12 * R456 C-12
S001 C-1 * R103 C-6 * CN302 D-7 * R304 E-12 * R457 C-12
S002 B-1 * R104 C-6 CN401 B-2 * R306 E-10 * R458 C-11
R105 C-1 R307 F-3 * R459 C-11
R106 C-2 D201 D-4 * R308 E-11 * R460 B-11
R107 C-2 D202 C-4 * R309 E-10 * R461 C-11
R108 C-2 * D301 F-12 R310 E-2 * R462 C-11
* R109 C-6 * D302 A-11 * R311 E-10 * R463 C-11
R110 C-2 * D303 F-12 * R312 E-10 * R464 C-11
R111 B-1 * D304 F-9 * R313 E-10 * R465 C-11
R112 C-2 D401 C-3 R314 E-2 * R466 C-11
* R113 C-6 D402 D-3 R315 E-2 R467 D-6
* R114 C-6 * R316 E-10
* R115 C-6 FB301 E-1 * R317 E-10 * S301 A-9
FB302 D-1 * R318 E-10 * S303 F-12
* S101 A-7 FB303 D-1 * R319 E-10 * S304 F-11
* S102 C-5 FB304 E-1 R320 D-2 * S305 A-10
* S103 A-7 R321 E-2 * S306 F-10
IC201 E-4 R322 F-3 * S307 F-9
IC202 C-4 * R323 D-12
IC301 E-2 R324 F-3 T201 D-5
PARTS LOCATION
4-79E FS-83, JK-208, PK-58
MVC-CD200/CD300
SECTION 5
ADJUSTMENTS
1. Adjusting items when replacing main parts and boards
When replacing main parts and boards, adjust the items indicated by z in the following table.
Replaced parts Board
Block replacement Mounted parts replacement replacement
IC401 (Timing generator) (LCD)

IC302 (RGB decoder) (LCD)
IC101/IC401 (CCD imager)
Back light unit (ND901)
IC301 (CAMERA DSP)

IC202 (S/H, AGC, A/D)
IC301 (EVR) (LCD)

LCD unit (LCD901)
IC201 (Video amp.)

Adjustment
IC505 EEPROM
IC406 EEPROM
Adjustment
(COMPLETE)
(COMPLETE)
(COMPLETE)
(COMPLETE)
Section
IC101 (EVR)
Supporting RadarW
CD-333/334 board
CD-333/334 board
CD-333/334 board
MD-083 board
MD-083 board
Prelamp LED
Base unit *2
PK-58 board
PK-58 board
PK-58 board
PK-58 board
SY-67 board
SY-67 board
SY-67 board
SY-67 board
SY-67 board
Lens device
LCD block
LCD block
Flash unit
Initialization of B, D, Initialization of D page data z
E, F, 7, 9 page data Initialization of B, E, F, 7, 9 page data z z
Video Video output level adj. z z z z
HALL adj. *1 z z z z z
Flange back adj. z z z z z
F No. standard data Input z z z z z
Mechanical shutter adj. z z z z z
Light value adj. z z z z z z z
Mixed color cancel adj. z z z z z z z
Camera AWB standard data input z z z z z z z
Auto white balance adj. z z z z z z z
Color reproduction adj. z z z z z z z
CCD white defect compensation z z z z
CCD black defect compensation z z z z
Strobe adj. z z z z z z z
LED illumination check z z
LCD initial data input z z
VCO adj. zz z z z
D range adj. z z z z z
Bright adj. z z z z z
LCD Contrast adj. z z z z z
Color adj. z z z z z
V-COM level adj. z z z z z
V-COM adj. z z z z z z
White balance adj. z z z z z z z
Battery end adj. z z
System control
Serial No. input z z
Mechanism Mechanical adj. z z z
*1: MVC-CD200 model only.
*2: When replacing the Base unit, reset the data of page: D, address: EC to EF to “00”. (Refer to “Record of Use check” of “5-2. SERVICE
MODE”.)
Table. 5-1-1.
5-1
5-1. ADJUSTMENT
1-1. PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENT
1-1-1. List of Service Tools

• Oscilloscope • Color monitor • Vectorscope • AC power adapter
• Regulated power supply • Digital voltmeter • Frequency counter
Ref. No. Name Parts Code Usage
Auto white balance adjustment/check
J-1 Filter for color temperature correction (C14) J-6080-058-A
White balance adjustment/check
J-2 Pattern box PTB-450 J-6082-200-A
J-3 Color chart for pattern box J-6020-250-A
J-4 Siemens star chart J-6080-875-A For checking the flange back
Adjustment remote commander (RM-95 upgraded)
J-5 J-6082-053-B
Note1
J-6 Clear chart for pattern box J-6080-621-A
For connecting the adjustment remote commander
J-7 CPC-9 jig J-6082-393-C
For adjusting the LCD block
For extension between the SY-67 board (CN701) and
J-8 Extension cable (50P, 0.5mm) J-6082-487-A
MD-083 board (CN404)
J-9 Alignment disk J-6082-512-A For Base unit inspection
J-10 Personal computer with Windows98/ME installed For checking the recorded picture
J-11 Mini pattern box J-6082-353-B For adjusting the flange back
J-12 Camera table J-6082-384-A For adjusting the flange back
For extension between the MD-083 board (CN002) and
J-13 Extension cable (18P, 0.5mm) J-6082-374-A
the base unit.
Note1:If the micro processor IC in the adjustment remote commander is

not the new micro processor (UPD7503G-C56-12), The pages cannot
be switched. In this case, replace with the new micro processor (8-
759-148-35).
J-1 J-2 J-3 J-4 J-5
J-6 J-7 J-8 J-9 J-10
J-11 J-12 J-13
Fig. 5-1-1.
5-2
1-1-2. Preparations
Note1: For details of how remove the cabinet and boards, refer to “2.
DISASSEMBLY”. Pattern box
Note2: When performing only the adjustments, the lens block and boards
need not be disassembled.
1) Connect the equipment for adjustments according to Fig. 5-1-5.

2) The lens block (CD-333/334 board) must be connected, because About 34cm (MVC-CD200)
the timing generator (IC201) is provided on the CD-333/334 About 28cm (MVC-CD300)
board of the lens block.
3) Connect the adjustment remote commander to the following
connector or jack.
• CN302 of PK-58 board via CPC-9 jig (J-6082-393-C)
• LANC (ACC) jack
4) If “CLOCK SET” display appeared in the screen after the power
is turned on, set the clock, or cancel the display.
Front of the lens
Note3: As disconnecting the SY-67 board CN709 means disconnecting
the lithium 3V power supply (JK-208 board BT101), data such as
date, time, user-set menus will be lost. After completing
adjustments, reset these data. If the SY-67 board CN709 has been
disconnected, the self-diagnosis data will be lost. Before
disconnecting, note down the self-diagnosis data (data of page: 2,
address: B3 to B5). (Refer to “SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION” Fig. 5-1-2.
and “5-2. Service Mode” for the self-diagnosis data.)
Note4: Setting the “Forced Power ON Mode (Forced STILL Mode)”
1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.
2) Select page: D, address: 10, set data: 01, and press the PAUSE
button of the adjustment remote commander.
The above procedure will enable the power (STILL (Auto) mode)
to be turned on with POWER switch (SY-67 board CN705)
disconnected. After completing adjustments, be sure to exit the
CN302
“Forced Power ON Mode”.
1
Note5: Setting the “Forced Power ON Mode (Forced PLAY Mode)”
2) Select page: D, address: 10, set data: 02, and press the PAUSE 18
Tapping
The above procedure will enable the power (PLAY mode) to be screw
turned on. After completing adjustments, be sure to exit the “Forced (DIA1.7 × 5)
Power ON Mode”.
Note6: Setting the “Forced Power ON Mode (Forced MOVIE Mode)” 1
1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. 18pins
2) Select page: D, address: 10, set data: 03, and press the PAUSE 18 1
button of the adjustment remote commander. 18
The above procedure will enable the power (MOVIE mode) to be
turned on. After completing adjustments, be sure to exit the “Forced
Power ON Mode”. CPC-9 jig
CPC lid (J-6082-393-C)
Note7: Exiting the “Forced Power ON Mode”
1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. Fig. 5-1-3.
2) Select page: D, address: 10, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE
1-1-3. Discharging of the flashlight power supply

The capacitor which is used as power supply of flashlight is charged Harness retainer
with 200V to 300V voltage. Discharge this voltage before starting Capactior Capactior cap
adjustments in order to protect service engineers from electric shock
during adjustment.
Short jig
Discharge procedure
1. Remove the power supply (AC power adaptor or battery).
2. Fabricate the discharging jig as shown in Fig. 5-1-4 locally by
yourself. Connect the discharging jig to the positive (+) and
negative (-) terminal of the flash voltage charge capacitor. Allow
ten seconds to discharge the voltage.
Fig. 5-1-4.
5-3
Adjustment remote
commander
AUDIO
(Black) CPC-9 jig
(J-6082-393-C)
Color monitor Vector scope 1
VIDEO
(Yellow)
Terminated 18
at 75Ω
18 pins
Lid open/close detect switch (S101,S103) 12 pins LANC jack

AV OUT Must be pressed when using the CD-R/RW
drive unit. Must be connected when performing
jack the LCD system adjustments.
USB
jack
Extension cable
JK-208 (J-6082-487-A) Must be connected when
board using the flash unit.
ACC (LANC) CN101

jack To dew sensor
Flash unit
CN709
FP-361 CN702 CN705 CN405
CN002
CN701 (Note)
1
SY-67 MD-083
board CN404 board
CN707
To strobe 18 PK-58
CN712 CN704 board
plunger
CN708 CN302
To spindle
Must be motor
connected. FP-364 CN001
To door lock
plunger
CN713 DC IN jack
Lens unit
Must be connected when
using the flash unit.
CD-333/334 AC-power adaptor

board (8.4Vdc)
AC IN
CN203 Must be connected when AC-L10, AC-VQ800 etc.
using the CD-R/RW drive unit.
Note: To open the MD-083 board, use the following extension cable between the CN002 and the
spindle motor. J-6082-374-A (18P, 0.5mm)
Fig. 5-1-5.
5-4
1-1-4. Precaution
1. Setting the Switch
Unless otherwise specified, set the switches as follows and perform
adjustments.
SETUP settings Switch settings

DEMO MODE (SETUP2) ............................................... OFF 1. Mode dial .............................................................. Auto ( )
VIDEO OUT (SETUP2) ............................................... NTSC 2. ZOOM W ............................................................... WIDE end
MENU settings 3. MACRO ( ) .................................................................. Off
1. WHITE BALANCE ..................................................... AUTO 4. FOCUS (PK-58 board) ................................... Manual (0.3m)
2. ISO ............................................................................... AUTO 5. EV (PK-58 board) ............................................................ 0EV
3. IMAGE SIZE ............................ 2048 × 1536 (MVC-CD300) 6. AE LOCK (PK-58 board) ................................................. Off
............................ 1600 × 1200 (MVC-CD200)
4. PICTURE EFFECT ......................................................... OFF
2. Order of Adjustments
Basically carry out adjustments in the order given.
Color bar chart (Color reproduction adjustment frame )

Electronic beam scanning frame
H
Yellow
Magenta
White
Cyan
Green
C C=D D
Red
Blue
Magenta
Yellow
Green
White
Cyan
Blue
Red
CRT picture
frame
V
A B A=B B A
Fig. a Enlargement
Effective picture frame
Video terminal
output waveform Fig. b (monitor TV picture)
Difference in level
Adjust the camera zoom and direction to

obtain the output waveform shown in Fig. a
A and the TV monitor display shown in Fig. b.
B
Fig. 5-1-6.
3. Subjects
1) Color bar chart (Color reproduction adjustment frame)
When performing adjustments using the color bar chart, adjust
the picture frame as shown in Fig. 5-1-6. (Standard picture
frame) White
2) Clear chart (Color reproduction adjustment frame) 841mm
Remove the color bar chart from the pattern box and insert a
Black
clear chart in its place. (Do not perform zoom operations during
this time.)
3) Flange back adjustment chart
Make the chart shown in Fig. 5-1-7 using A0 size (1189mm × 1189mm
841mm) black and white vellum paper.
Fig. 5-1-7.
Note: Use matte vellum paper bigger than A0, and make sure the edges of
the black and white paper joined together are not rough.
5-5
1-2. INITIALIZATION OF B, D, E, F, 7, 9 PAGE 3. D Page Table
DATA Note: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the D Page
Data”.)
1-2-1. INITIALIZATION OF D PAGE DATA
Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of D Page
Data”.)
1. Initializing the D Page Data
Note: If the D page data has been initialized, the following
Address Remark
adjustments need to be performed again. Initial value
1) Modification of D page data 00 to 0F
2) LCD system adjustments
3) Color viewfinder system adjustments 10 00 Test mode
4) Battery end adjustments 11 to 4D Fixed data-1
4F Fixed data-2
Adjusting page D 50 to 8F Fixed data-1
Adjusting Address 10 to EF 90 86 Battery end adj.
91 8E
Initializing Method: 92 9D
Order Page Address Data Procedure 93 B2
1 0 01 01 Set the data. 94 BD
2 4 03 Set the following data. 95 to B5 Fixed data-1
12: MVC-CD200 B6 1D Battery end adj.
11: MVC-CD300
B7 09
3 4 00 2D Set the data. B8 to C5 Fixed data-1
4 4 01 2D Set the data, and press PAUSE C6 5A Video output level adj.
button.
C7 61
5 4 02 Check that the data changes to C8 to CD Fixed data-1
“01”.
CE BA Bright adj. (LCD)
6 2 00 29 Set the data.
CF B8 Contrast adj. (LCD)
7 2 01 29 Set the data, and press PAUSE D0 AA Bright adj. (LCD)
button.
D1 66 Color adj. (LCD)
8 Perform “Modification of D Page
D2 98 White balance adj.
Data”.
D3 7A
2. Modification of D Page Data D4 B8 Contrast adj. (LCD)
If the D page data has been initialized, change the data of the “Fixed D5 B0 D range adj. (LCD)
data-2” address shown in the following table by manual input. D6 7C V-COM level adj. (LCD)
D7 6F VCO adj. (NTSC) (LCD)
Modifying Method:
D8 74 V COM adj. (LCD)
1) Before changing the data, select page: 0, address: 01, and set
data: 01. D9 73 Fixed data
2) New data for changing are not shown in the tables because DA to DB Fixed data-1
they are different in destination. When changing the data, copy DC B5 Fixed data
the data built in the same model. DD 6F VCO adj. (PAL) (LCD)
Note: If copy the data built in the different model, the camera may
DE 9A Bright adj. (LCD)
not operate.
3) When changing the data, press the PAUSE button of the DF B8 Contrast adj. (LCD)
adjustment remote commander each time when setting new E0 to EB Fixed data-1
data to write the data in the non-volatile memory. EC 00 Recording counter
4) Check that the data of adjustment addresses is the initial value. ED 00
If not, change the data to the initial value.
EE 00
Processing after Completing Modification of D Page data EF 00
Order Page Address Data Procedure Table. 5-1-2.
2 2 01 29 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
5-6
1-2-2. Initializing the B, E, F, 7, 9 Page Data 3. F Page Table
Note: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the B, E, F,
1. Initializing the B, E, F, 7, 9 Page Data 7, 9 Page Data”.)
Note1: If “Initializing the B, E, F, 7, 9 Page Data” is performed, Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of B, E, F,
all data of the B page, E page, F page 7 page and 9 page 7, 9 Page Data”.)
will be initialized. (It is impossible to initialize a single
page.)
Note2: If the B, E, F, 7, 9 Page data has been initialized, Address Initial value Remark
“Modification of B, E, F, 7, 9 Page Data” and following CD200CD300
adjustments need to be performed again. 10 to 13 Fixed data-1
1) Video system adjustments 14 12 33 Flange back adj.
2) Camera system adjustments
15 A8 48
Adjusting page F 16 18 DA
17 C5 DF
Adjusting Address 10 to FF
18 12 13
Adjusting page 7
19 C9 C0
Adjusting Address 00 to FF
1A 00 00
Adjusting page 9
1B 00 00
Adjusting Address 00 to FF 1C 00 00
Adjusting page E 1D 00 00
Adjusting Address 00 to FF 1E 41 00
Adjusting page B 1F 00 00
Adjusting Address 00 to FF 20 20 20
21 20 20
Initializing Method: 22 20 BA
Order Page Address Data Procedure 23 44 46
1 0 01 01 Set the data. 24 0A 0A
2 6 03 Set the following data. 25 00 00
12: MVC-CD200 26 B2 85 Light value adj.
11: MVC-CD300
27 63 B0
3 6 00 2D Set the data.
28 2E 94
4 6 01 2D Set the data, and press PAUSE 29 00 00 F No. compensation
button.
2A 00 00
5 6 02 Check that the data changes to
2B 00 00
“01”.
2C 00 00
6 Perform “Modification of B, E, F,
2D 00 00
7, 9 Page Data”.
2E 69 HALL adj. (MVC-CD200)
2. Modification of B, E, F, 7, 9 Page Data 2F 84 Fixed data-1 (MVC-CD300)
If the B, E, F, 7, 9 Page data has been initialized, change the data of 30 to 33 Fixed data-1
the “Fixed data-2” address shown in the following tables by manual 34 15 HALL adj. (MVC-CD200)
input. 35 78 Fixed data-1 (MVC-CD300)
36 to 39 Fixed data-1
Modifying Method:
1) Before changing the data, select page: 0, address: 01, and set 3A 2F 2F AWB standard data input
data: 01. 3B 37 37
2) New data for changing are not shown in the tables because 3C 40 40
they are different in destination. When changing the data, copy 3D D0 D0
the data built in the same model. 3E Fixed data-1
Note: If copy the data built in the different model, the camera may
not operate. 3F 86 B5 Auto white balance adj.
3) When changing the data, press the PAUSE button of the 40 41 43
adjustment remote commander each time when setting new 41 03 03 Color reproduction adj.
data to write the data in the non-volatile memory. 42 E9 E9
4) Check that the data of adjustment addresses is the initial value.
43 63 63
If not, change the data to the initial value.
44 83 83
Processing after Completing Modification of B, E, F, 7, 9 Page 45 D5 D5
data 46 FE FE
Order Page Address Data Procedure 47 73 73
1 2 00 29 Set the data. 48 45 45
2 2 01 29 Set the data, and press PAUSE 49 to 4C Fixed data-1
button. 4D 28 28 Strobe adj.
4E 6E 6E
5-7
F page
Address Initial value Remark Address Initial value Remark

CD200CD300 CD200CD300
4F to 58 Fixed data-1 9A 00 Flange back adj.(MVC-CD300)
59 00 00 AWB standard data input 9B 00 Fixed data-1 (MVC-CD200)
5A 14 14 Mechanical shutter adj. 9C to 9F Fixed data-1
5B Fixed data-1 A0 00 00 Mixed color cancel adj.
5C 63 63 Color reproduction adj. A1 00 00
5D 83 83 A2 00 00
5E 03 03 A3 00 00
5F E9 E9 A4 to A8 Fixed data-1
60 to 63 Fixed data-1 A9 05 0F Auto white balance adj.
64 10 10 Strobe adj. AA 02 01
65 to 68 Fixed data-1 AB to D3 Fixed data-1
69 02 02 Strobe adj. D4 80 80 Mechanical shutter adj.
6A 79 79 D5 98 8A
6B F8 F8 D6 A0 8A
6C 09 10 Mechanical shutter adj. D7 A8 8A
6D E6 05 D8 B0 8A
6E 05 09 D9 to FF Fixed data-1
6F D5 B5 Table. 5-1-3.
70 04 07
71 9B C4
72 03 07
73 DC 48
74 03 06
75 50 CB
76 01 01
77 01 01
78 01 01
79 01 01
7A 00 01
7B 09 2C
7C 17 3A
7D 33 2E
7E 33 2D
7F 33 2D
80 00 00 Auto white balance adj.
87 FF FF Flange back adj.
88 00 Flange back adj.(MVC-CD300)
89 00 Fixed data-1 (MVC-CD200)
8A 00 00 Flange back adj.
8B 00 00
8C 00 Flange back adj.(MVC-CD300)
8D 00 Fixed data-1 (MVC-CD200)
8E 00
8F 00
90 00
91 00
92 00
93 00
94 00
95 00
96 00
97 00
98 00
99 00
5-8
4. 7 Page Table
Note: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the B, E, F,
7, 9 Page Data”.)
Address Initial value Remark
Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of B, E, F, CD200CD300
7, 9 Page Data”.) 92 0F 0F CCD white defect compensation
93 FF FF
Address Initial value Remark 94 0F 0F
CD200CD300 95 FF FF
00 to 5F Fixed data-1 96 0F 0F
60 0F 0F CCD black defect compensation 97 FF FF
61 FF FF 98 0F 0F
62 0F 0F 99 FF FF
63 FF FF 9A 0F 0F
64 0F 0F 9B FF FF
65 FF FF 9C 0F 0F
66 0F 0F 9D FF FF
67 FF FF 9E 0F 0F
68 0F 0F 9F FF FF
69 FF FF A0 0F 0F
6A 0F 0F A1 FF FF
6B FF FF A2 0F 0F
6C 0F 0F A3 FF FF
6D FF FF A4 to FF Fixed data-1
6E 0F 0F Table. 5-1-4.
6F FF FF
70 0F 0F
71 FF FF
72 0F 0F
73 FF FF
74 0F 0F
75 FF FF
76 0F 0F
77 FF FF
78 0F 0F
79 FF FF
7A 0F 0F
7B FF FF
7C 0F 0F
7D FF FF
7E 0F 0F
7F FF FF
80 0F 0F
81 FF FF
82 0F 0F
83 FF FF
84 0F 0F
85 FF FF
86 0F 0F
87 FF FF
88 0F 0F CCD white defect compensation
89 FF FF
8A 0F 0F
8B FF FF
8C 0F 0F
8D FF FF
8E 0F 0F
8F FF FF
90 0F 0F
91 FF FF
5-9
5. 9 Page Table 7. B Page Table
Note: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the B, E, F, Note: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the B, E, F,
7, 9 Page Data”.) 7, 9 Page Data”.)
Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of B, E, F, Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of B, E, F,
7, 9 Page Data”.) 7, 9 Page Data”.)
Address Remark
Address Initial value Remark
00 to FF Fixed data-1 CD200CD300
Table. 5-1-5.
32 00 00 Serial No. input
33 00 00
6. E Page Table 34 00 00
Note: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the B, E, F, 35 00 00
7, 9 Page Data”.)
Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of B, E, F, 36 00 00
7, 9 Page Data”.) 37 00 00
38 to 3A Fixed data-1
Address Remark 3B Fixed data-2
00 to FF Fixed data-1 3C to 3D Fixed data-1
3E Fixed data-2
Table. 5-1-6.
3F to FF Fixed data-1
Table. 5-1-7.
5-10
1-3. VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS
1. Video Output Level Adjustment (SY-67 board)
Adjust the sync level and burst level of the composite video signal
output.
Mode Still (Auto ( ))
Subject Arbitrary
Measurement Point Video terminal of AV OUT jack
(75Ω terminated)
Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope
Adjustment Page D
Adjustment Address C6, C7
Specified Value Sync level:
A=286 ± 5mV (NTSC mode)
A=300 ± 5mV (PAL mode)
Burst level:
A=286 ± 5mV (NTSC mode)
A=300 ± 5mV (PAL mode)
Note: If “CLOCK SET” display appeared in the screen after the power is
turned on, set the clock, or cancel the display.
SETUP setting:
VIDEO OUT (SETUP 2) ...................... NTSC (NTSC mode)
............................ PAL (PAL mode)
Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data Procedure
2 4 F1 04 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
3 D C6 Change the data and set the sync
level (A) to the specified value.
4 D C6 Press PAUSE button.
5 D C7 Change the data and set the burst
level (A) to the specified value.
6 D C7 Press PAUSE button.
button.
Fig. 5-1-8.
5-11
1-4. CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS 1. HALL Adjustment (MVC-CD200) RadarW
Before perform the camera system adjustments, check that the For detecting the position of the lens iris, adjust the hall AMP gain
specified values of “VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT” are and offset.
satisfied. Mode Still (Auto ( ))
Note: If “CLOCK SET” display appeared in the screen after the power is
Subject Arbitrary
turned on, set the clock, or cancel the display.
Measurement Point Display data of page 1 (Note1)
Data Setting during Camera System Adjustments Measuring Instrument Adjustment remote commander
Perform the following data setting before the camera system Adjustment Page F
adjustments.
1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. Adjustment Address 2E, 2F, 34, 35
2) Input the following data. Specified Value 12 to 16 during IRIS OPEN
77 to 7B during IRIS CLOSE
Page Address Data
B 75 00 Note1: Displayed data of page 1 of the adjustment remote commander.
1 : 00 : XX
Note: Press the PAUSE button each time to set the data. Display data
Note2: If the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “01”, select page: 6, address:
After completing the camera system adjustments, release the data
01, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button.
setting.
1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. Adjusting method:
2) Input the following data.
Note: Press the PAUSE button each time to set the data. Order Page Address Data Procedure
Page Address Data
B 75 10
3) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00. 4 6 01 6D Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
SET UP Setting during Camera System Adjustments 5 6 02 Check that the data changes to
VIDEO OUT (SETUP2) ....................... NTSC (NTSC mode) “01”. (Note3)
button.
Note3: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address:

2E, 2F, 34, 35.
Checking method:
button.
3 1 Check that the display data (Note1)
satisfies the specified value 1.
button.
satisfies the specified value.2.
Processing after Completing Adjustments:

button.
5-12
2. Flange Back Adjustment RadarW
(Using Minipattern Box)
The inner focus lens flange back adjustment is carried out
automatically. In whichever case, the focus will be deviated during
auto focusing/manual focusing.
Subject Siemens star chart with ND filter for
the minipattern box (Note1)
Measurement Point Display data of page: F, address: 87
Measuring Instrument Adjustment remote commander
Adjustment Page F
Adjustment Address 14 to 25, 87, 8A , 8B (MVC-CD200)
14 to 25, 87 to 9B (MVC-CD300)
Specified value 00
Note1: Dark siemens star chart.

Note2: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If not, turn the
power of the unit OFF/ON.
Preparations: Adjusting method:

1) The minipattern box is installed as shown in the following Order Page Address Data Procedure
figure.
Note: The attachment lenses are not used.
2) Install the minipattern box so that the distance between it and 2 6 01 13 Set the data, and press PAUSE
the front of the lens of the camcorder is less than 3cm. button.
3) Make the height of the minipattern box and the camcorder equal. 3 6 01 27 Set the data, and press PAUSE
4) Check that the output voltage of the regulated power supply is button.
the specified voltage. 4 6 02 Check that the data changes to
5) Check that at both the zoom lens TELE end and WIDE end, “01”. (Note3)
the center of the siemens star chart and center of the exposure
screen coincide. 5 F 87 Check that the data is “00”.
Note3: The adjustment data will be automatically input to the adjustment

Specified voltage: The specified voltage varies according to the
addresses.
minipattern box, so adjust the power supply
output voltage to the specified voltage written Processing after Completing Adjustments:
on the sheet which is supplied with the
minipattern box. Order Page Address Data Procedure
Below 3 cm
button.
Minipattern box 2 0 01 00 Set the data.
3 Perform “Flange Back Check”.
Camera
Camera
table
Regulated power supply

Output voltage : Specified voltage ±0.01Vdc
Output current : more than 3.5A
Red (+)
Black (–)
Yellow (SENS +)
White (SENS –) Need not connected

Black (GND)
Fig. 5-1-9.
5-13
3. Flange Back Adjustment 3-2. Flange Back Adjustment (2)
3-1. Flange Back Adjustment (1) (MVC-CD200)
(Using Flange Back Adjustment Chart) Perform this adjustment after performing “Flange Back Adjustment
The inner focus lens flange back adjustment is carried out (1)”.
automatically. In whichever case, the focus will be deviated during Mode Still (Auto ( ))
auto focusing/manual focusing.
Subject Subject more than 500m away
Mode Still (Auto ( )) (Subjects with clear contrast such as
Subject Flange back adjustment chart buildings, etc.)
(2.0 m from the front of the protection Measurement Point Check operation on TV monitor
glass) (Luminance: 350 ± 50 lux)
Measuring Instrument
Measurement Point Display data of page: F, address: 87
Adjustment Page F
Adjustment Address 14 to 25, 87, 8A , 8B
Adjustment Page F
Adjustment Address 14 to 25, 87, 8A , 8B (MVC-CD200) Note1: Make the lens horizontal and perform this adjustment.
14 to 25, 87 to 9B (MVC-CD300)
Specified value 00 Preparations:
1) Set the zoom lens to the TELE end and expose a subject that is
Note1: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If not, to page: more than 500m away (subject with clear contrast such as
6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button. building, etc.). (Nearby subjects less than 500m away should
not be in the screen.)
Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data Procedure Adjusting method:
1 0 01 01 Set the data. Order Page Address Data Procedure
2 6 01 13 Set the data, and press PAUSE 1 0 01 01 Set the data.
button. 2 6 01 13 Set the data, and press PAUSE
3 6 01 15 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. (Note2)
button. Place a ND filter on the lens so that
4 6 02 Check that the data changes to the optimum image is obtained.
“01”. (Note2) 3 6 01 29 Set the data, and press PAUSE
5 F 87 Check that the data is “00”. button.
Note2: The adjustment data will be automatically input to the adjustment “01”. (Note2)
addresses.
Note2: The adjustment data will be automatically input to the adjustment
Processing after Completing Adjustments: addresses.
button. Order Page Address Data Procedure
2 0 01 00 Set the data. 1 6 01 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
3 Perform “Flange Back Adjustment
(2)”. (MVC-CD200) 2 Perform “Flange Back Check”.
Perform “Flange Back Check”.
(MVC-CD300)
5-14
4. Flange Back Check
Subject Siemens star
(1.0 m from the front of the lens)
(Luminance : approx. 300 lux)
Measurement Point Check operation on TV monitor
Specified Value The lens is focused.
SETUP setting:
DIGITAL ZOOM ............................................................. OFF
Checking method:
1) Place the Siemens star 1.0m from the front of the lens.
2) Shoot the Siemens star with the zoom TELE end.
3) To open the IRIS, decrease the luminous intensity to the siemens
star up to a point before noise appear on the image.
4) Turn on the auto focus.
5) Observe the TV monitor and check that the lens is focused.
6) Select page: 6, address: 2C, and set data: 01.
7) Shoot the Siemens star with the zoom WIDE end.
8) Observe the TV monitor and check that the lens is focused.

1) Select page: 6, address: 2C, and set data: 00.
5-15
5. Picture Frame Setting
Subject Color bar chart
(Color reproduction adjustment frame)
[MVC-CD200]
Approx. 34cm from the front of the lens
[MVC-CD300]
Approx. 28cm from the front of the lens
Measurement Point Video output terminal
Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope and TV monitor
Specified Value A=B, C=D, E=F
Switch setting: Check on an oscilloscope

ZOOM .................................................................... WIDE end
FOCUS ............................................................ Manual (0.3m) 1. Horizontal period
A=B
C=D
Setting method:
1) Select page: 4, address: 06, and set data: 01. B
C
2) Shoot the color bar chart with the zoom WIDE end. A
3) Adjust the direction and distance between the pattern box and D
camera, and set the picture frame to the specified position.
4) Mark the position of the picture frame on the monitor display,
and adjust the picture frame to this position in following
adjustments using “Color reproduction adjustment frame”.
Fig. 5-1-10.
2. Vertical period
E E=F F
Fig. 5-1-11.
Check on the monitor TV (Underscanned mode)
Color bar chart picture frame Effective picture frame
Fig. 5-1-12.
5-16
6. F No. Standard Data Input RadarW 7. Mechanical Shutter Adjustment RadarW
Compensate the unevenness of the iris meter sensitivity. Adjust the period which the mechanical shutter is closed, and
Mode Still (Auto ( )) compensate the exposure.
Subject Clear chart Mode Still (Auto ( ))
(Color reproduction adjustment frame) Subject Clear chart
Adjustment Page F (Color reproduction adjustment frame)
Adjustment Address 29 to 2D Measurement Point Display data of page: 6, address: AB
Note1: This adjustment should be carried out upon completion of “Data Adjustment Page F
Setting during Camera System Adjustments”.
Note2: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If not, to page: Adjustment Address 5A, 6C to 7F, D4 to D8
6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button. Specified value 00
Switch setting: Note1: This adjustment should be carried out upon completion of “Data
ZOOM .................................................................... WIDE end Setting during Camera System Adjustments”.
FOCUS ............................................................ Manual (0.3m) Note2: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If not, to page:
6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button.
Adjusting method:
Switch setting:
ZOOM .................................................................... WIDE end
1 0 01 01 Set the data. FOCUS ............................................................ Manual (0.3m)
2 6 01 BB Set the data, and press PAUSE
button. Adjusting method:
3 6 02 Check that the data changes to Order Page Address Data Procedure
“01”. (Note2) 1 0 01 01 Set the data.
2 6 01 AD Set the data, and press PAUSE
29 to 2D. button.
Processing after Completing Adjustments: “01”. (Note2)
Order Page Address Data Procedure 4 6 AB Check that the data is “00”.
button. Note3: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address:
5A, 6C to 7F, D4 to D8.
2 6 6C 00 Set the data.
3 0 01 00 Set the data. Processing after Completing Adjustments:
button.
5-17
8. Light Value Adjustment RadarW 9. Mixed Color Cancel Adjustment RadarW
Adjust the standard LV value. Perform the mixed color cancel adjustment using the each data of
Mode Still (Auto ( )) the color bars.
Subject Clear chart Mode Still (Auto ( ))
(Color reproduction adjustment frame) Subject Color bar chart
Measurement Point Display data of page: 1 (Note3) (Color bar standard picture frame)
Measuring Instrument Adjustment remote commander Adjustment Page F
Adjustment Page F Adjustment Address A0 to A3
Adjustment Address 26 to 28
Note1: This adjustment should be carried out upon completion of “Data
Specified value 0FE0 to 1020 (MVC-CD200) Setting during Camera System Adjustments”.
0FC0 to 1040 (MVC-CD300) Note2: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If not, to page:
Note1: This adjustment should be carried out upon completion of “Data Note3: This adjustment must be performed in NTSC mode.
Note2: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If not, to page: Switch setting:
6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button. ZOOM .................................................................... WIDE end
Note3: Displayed data of page 1 of the adjustment remote commander. FOCUS ............................................................ Manual (0.3m)
1 : XX : XX
LV data
Adjusting method:
Switch setting: Order Page Address Data Procedure
ZOOM .................................................................... WIDE end 1 Check that the picture frame is set
FOCUS ............................................................ Manual (0.3m) to the specified position. (Refer to
“5. Picture Frame Setting”.)
Adjusting method: 2 0 01 01 Set the data.
Order Page Address Data Procedure 3 6 01 D7 Set the data, and press PAUSE
1 0 01 01 Set the data. button.
2 6 01 0D Set the data, and press PAUSE 4 6 01 D5 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button. button.
3 6 02 Check that the data changes to 5 6 02 Check that the data changes to
“01”. (Note4) “01”. (Note2)
5 1 Check that the display data (Note3) A0 to A3.
satisfies the specified value.
26 to 28. Order Page Address Data Procedure
Processing after Completing Adjustments: button.
Order Page Address Data Procedure 2 0 01 00 Set the data.
button.
5-18
10. Auto White Balance Standard Data Input RadarW Note1: This adjustment should be carried out upon completion of “Data
Adjust the white balance standard data at 3200K. Setting during Camera System Adjustments”.
Note2: After the power is turned on, this adjustment can be done only once.
Mode Still (Auto ( )) Note3: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If not, turn off
Subject Clear chart the power and turn on again.
(Color reproduction adjustment frame) Note4: Displayed data of page 1 of the adjustment remote commander.
1 : XX : XX
Adjustment Page F Display data
Adjustment Address 3A to 3D, 59
Switch setting:
Note1: This adjustment should be carried out upon completion of “Data ZOOM .................................................................... WIDE end
Setting during Camera System Adjustments”. FOCUS ............................................................ Manual (0.3m)
Note2: After the power is turned on, this adjustment can be done only
once.
Note3: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If not, turn off Adjusting method:
the power and turn on again. Order Page Address Data Procedure
1 Place the C14 filter for color
Switch setting: temperature correction on the lens.
ZOOM .................................................................... WIDE end
FOCUS ............................................................ Manual (0.3m)
3 F 49 Write down the data.
Adjusting method: 4 F 49 Set the following data, and press
Order Page Address Data Procedure PAUSE button.
28 (MVC-CD200), 27 (MVC-CD300)
5 F 4A Write down the data.
button. 6 F 4A Set the following data, and press
PAUSE button.
3 6 01 0B Set the data, and press PAUSE
08 (MVC-CD200), 80 (MVC-CD300)
button.
7 F 4B Write down the data.
“01”. (Note4) 8 F 4B Set the following data, and press
PAUSE button.
Note4: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address: 60 (MVC-CD200), 61 (MVC-CD300)
3A to 3D, 59. 9 F 4C Write down the data.
10 F 4C Set the following data, and press
Processing after Completing Adjustments
PAUSE button.
Order Page Address Data Procedure 13 (MVC-CD200), 00 (MVC-CD300)
1 6 01 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE 11 6 01 A7 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
button.
12 6 01 A5 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
“01”. (Note5)
14 6 01 3F Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
11. Auto White Balance Adjustment RadarW 15 0 03 04 Set the data.
Adjust to the proper auto white balance output data. 16 1 Check that the display data (Note4)
If it is not correct, auto white balance and color reproducibility will satisfies the R ratio specified value.
be poor.
Subject Clear chart satisfies the B ratio specified value.
(Color reproduction adjustment frame)
Filter Filter C14 for color temperature Note5: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address:
correction 3F, 40, 80, A9, AA.
Measurement Point Display data of page 1 (Note4)
Adjustment Page F
1 6 01 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
Adjustment Address 3F, 40, 80, A9, AA
Specified Value MVC-CD200:
3 F 49 Set the data that is written down
R ratio: 2768 to 28A8
at step 3, and press PAUSE button.
B ratio: 5F73 to 60B3
MVC-CD300: 4 F 4A Set the data that is written down
R ratio: 26E0 to 2820 at step 5, and press PAUSE button.
B ratio: 6060 to 61A0 5 F 4B Set the data that is written down
6 F 4C Set the data that is written down
5-19
12. Color Reproduction Adjustment RadarW 12-2. Color Reproduction Check
Adjust the color Separation matrix coefficient so that proper color Mode Still (Auto ( ))
reproduction is produced.
(Color bar standard picture frame)
12-1. Color Reproduction Adjustment
Measurement Point Video output terminal
Measuring Instrument NTSC vectorscope
(Color bar standard picture frame) Specified Value Each center of all color luminance
points should settle within each color
Adjustment Page F
reproduction frame.
Adjustment Address 41 to 48, 5C to 5F
Note1: This adjustment should be carried out upon completion of “Data Setting during Camera System Adjustments”.
Setting during Camera System Adjustments”. Note2: This adjustment must be performed in NTSC mode.
Note2: After the power is turned on, this adjustment can be done only once. Note3: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If not, to page:
Note3: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If not, turn off 6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button.
the power and turn on again.
Note4: This adjustment must be performed in NTSC mode. Switch setting:
ZOOM .................................................................... WIDE end
Switch setting: FOCUS ............................................................ Manual (0.3m)
ZOOM .................................................................... WIDE end
FOCUS ............................................................ Manual (0.3m) Checking method:
Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure
1 0 01 01 Set the data. 2 B 75 Check that the data is “00”.
(Note1)
2 B 75 Check that the data is “00”.
(Note1) 3 4 06 01 Set the data.
3 6 12 80 Set the data, and wait for 1 sec. 4 6 10 01 Set the data.
4 6 12 00 Set the data, and wait for 2 sec. 5 E 52 Write down the data.
5 6 01 A9 Set the data, and press PAUSE 6 E 52 09 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button. button.
6 6 02 Check that the data changes to 7 6 01 0F Set the data, and press PAUSE
“01”. (Note5) button.
8 6 12 80 Set the data, and wait for 1 sec.
Note5: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address: 9 6 12 00 Set the data, and wait for 2 sec.
41 to 48, 5C to 5F.
10 Adjust the GAIN and PHASE of
the vectorscope so that the burst
luminance point is set at the
Order Page Address Data Procedure specified position.
1 6 01 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE 11 Check that each center of all color
button. luminance points is set in each
2 0 01 00 Set the data. color reproduction frame.

button.
4 E 52 Set the data that is written down
Burst position
Fig. 5-1-13.
5-20
13. White Balance Check Processing after Completing Adjustments:
Mode Still (Auto ( )) Order Page Address Data Procedure
Subject Clear chart 1 6 01 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
(Color reproduction adjustment frame) button.
Filter Filter C14 for color temperature 2 4 06 00 Set the data.
correction 3 E 52 Set the data that is written down
Measurement Point Display data of Video output at step4, and press PAUSE button.
page 1 (Note2) terminal 4 0 01 00 Set the data.
Measuring Instrument Adjustment remote Vectorscope
commander
Specified Value 3E00 to 4200 Fig. 5-1-14.

Note2: Displayed data of page 1 of the adjustment remote commander.
1 : XX : XX
Display data
R-Y 4mm
Note3: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If not, to page:
Switch setting: B-Y

ZOOM .................................................................... WIDE end
FOCUS ............................................................ Manual (0.3m)
4mm
Checking method:
Order Page Address Data Procedure Fig. 5-1-14 (A).
1 Check that the lens is not covered MVC-CD200
with any filter. R-Y
1.0mm
B-Y
4 E 52 Write down the data.
6mm
5 E 52 0E Set the data, and press PAUSE 1.5mm
button.
INDOOR white balance check
6 6 01 0F Set the data, and press PAUSE 6mm
button.
7 0 03 04 Set the data. MVC-CD300
8 1 Check that the display data (Note2) R-Y
0.5mm
satisfies the specified value.
B-Y
3mm
satisfies the specified value. 6mm
11 Check that the center of the white

luminance point is within the
circle shown Fig. 5-1-14. (A). 6mm
OUTDOOR white balance check
Fig. 5-1-14 (B).
12 Place the C14 filter for color
temperature correction on the lens.
13 6 01 3F Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
14 Check that the center of the white
luminance point is within the
circle shown Fig. 5-1-14. (B).
5-21
14. CCD White Defect Compensation and Check RadarW 15. CCD Black Defect Compensation and Check RadarW
Mode Still (Auto ( )) Mode Still (Auto ( ))
Subject Arbitrary Subject Clear chart (Color bar standard picture
Measurement Point Display data of page 6, address: 55 frame) (Note2)
Adjustment Page 7 Measurement Point Display data of page 6, address: 55
Adjustment Address 88 to A3 Adjustment Page 7
Specified Value1 00 to 7F Adjustment Address 60 to 87
Specified Value2 00 Specified Value1 00 to 0A
Specified Value2 00
Setting during Camera System Adjustments”. Note1: This adjustment should be carried out upon completion of “Data
Note2: Turn on the camera power supply, wait for several minutes, then Setting during Camera System Adjustments”.
perform this adjustment. Note2: Check that there are no dust, no dirt and no reflection on the clear chart.
Note3: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If not, to page: Note3: Any subject other than the clear chart should not be in the screen.
6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button. Note4: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If not, to page:
Adjusting method:
Switch setting:
Order Page Address Data Procedure ZOOM .................................................................... WIDE end
1 0 01 01 Set the data. FOCUS ............................................................ Manual (0.3m)
2 F DE Write down the data.
Adjusting method:
3 F DE 1E Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
4 F E3 Write down the data.
2 F DF Write down the data.
5 F E3 0E Set the data, and press PAUSE
button. 3 F DF 4C Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
6 6 01 8B Set the data, and press PAUSE 4 6 2C 01 Set the data.
button. 5 6 90 00 Set the data.
7 6 02 Check that the data changes to 6 6 91 03 Set the data.
“01”. (Note4) 7 6 92 00 Set the data.
8 6 55 Check that the display data 8 6 93 00 Set the data.
satisfies the specified value1.
9 6 01 79 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
button.
11 6 07 Check that the data changes to “01”.
10 F DE 0F Set the data, and press PAUSE
button. 12 Wait for 4 sec.
11 F E3 60 Set the data, and press PAUSE 13 6 01 8D Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
button. 14 6 02 Check that the data changes to
12 6 01 87 Set the data, and press PAUSE “01”. (Note5)
button. 15 6 55 Check that the display data
13 6 02 Check that the data changes to satisfies the specified value1.
“01”. (Note4) 16 6 01 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
14 6 55 Check that the display data 17 F DF 5A Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
satisfies the specified value2. 18 6 01 89 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
Note4: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address: 19 6 02 Check that the data changes to
88 to A3. “01”. (Note5)
20 6 55 Check that the display data
60 to 87.
button.
2 F DE Set the data that is written down Processing after Completing Adjustments:
at step2, and press PAUSE button. Order Page Address Data Procedure
3 F E3 Set the data that is written down 1 6 01 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
at step4, and press PAUSE button.
5 F DF Set the data that is written down
at step2 of “Adjusting method”,
and press PAUSE button.
5-22
16. Strobe Adjustment RadarW Adjusting method:
Adjust the light level and white balance when the strobe light flashes. Order Page Address Data Procedure
Mode Still (Auto ( )) 1 0 01 01 Set the data.
Subject Paper which reflection rate is 18% 2 2 04 10 Set the data, and press PAUSE
(Note2) (1.0m from the front of the lens) button.
Measurement Point Data of page F, address: 64 and 3 Check that the flash is popped up.
Display data of page 1
Adjustment Page F
6 6 92 FF Set the data.
Adjustment Address 4D, 4E, 64, 69 to 6B
7 6 93 FF Set the data.
Specified Value1 60 to 94
Specified Value2 FA to FF or 00 to 06
Specified Value3 FA to FF or 00 to 06
button.
Setting during Camera System Adjustments”. 11 6 07 Check that the data changes to “01”.
Note2: Background paper (J-250-130-A). Perform this adjustment in the 12 6 01 67 Set the data, and press PAUSE
dark room or use a dark box.
button.
Note3: Any light other than the strobe light should not light up the plate.
Note4: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If not, to page: 13 6 02 Check the flashing, and check
6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button. that the data changes to “01”.
Note5: Displayed data of page 1 of the adjustment remote commander. 14 6 01 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
1 : XX : XX
button.
Lower data
Upper data 15 6 01 67 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
16 6 02 Check the flashing, and check
that the data changes to “01”.
button.
18 6 01 B9 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
19 6 02 Check the flashing, and check that
the data changes to “01”. (Note6)
button.
button.
“01”. (Note6)
23 F 64 Check that the display data
25 1 Check that the upper data of display
data satisfies the specified value2.
26 1 Check that the lower data of display
data satisfies the specified value3.

4D, 4E, 64, 69 to 6B.

button.
5-23
17. LED Illumination Check
Check the LED illumination optical axis.
Subject Paper which reflection rate is 18%
(Note) (1.0m from the front of the lens)
Measurement Point LCD screen Video output terminal
Measuring Instrument Monitor TV
Specified Value3 Center of luminance point should
settle within the frame.
Note: Background paper (J-250-130-A). Perform this adjustment in the

dark room or use a dark box.
Preparations:
1) Take a copy of the LED optical illumination axis frame with a
clear sheet. (Enlarge or reduce the frame in same size as the
effective picture frame of the LCD screen or monitor TV screen.)
2) Attach the copied LED optical illumination axis frame
(transparent) on the LCD screen or monitor TV screen. (The
frame of the LED optical illumination axis frame and the
effective picture frame of the LCD screen or monitor TV screen
must be agree.)
Adjusting method:
MVC-CD200
1 Turn on the auto focus.
3 B 3D Write down the data.
4 B 3D 64 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
8 6 92 Set the following data, and press
PAUSE button.
E0 (MVC-CD200), 00 (MVC-CD300)
9 6 93 Set the following data, and press
PAUSE button.
26 (MVC-CD200), 50 (MVC-CD300)
button.
11 6 07 Check that the data changes to “01”. MVC-CD300
button. Fig. 5-1-15.
14 Check that center of the luminance
point is set in the specified frame
of the LED optical illumination
axis frame.

button.
2 B 3D Set the data that is written down
at step3, and press PAUSE button.
5-24
1-5. LCD SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT 1. LCD Initial Data Input (1)
Note1: The back light (fluorescent tube) is driven by a high voltage AC
Subject Arbitrary
power supply. Therefore, do not touch the back light holder to
avoid electrical shock. Adjustment Page D
Note2: When replacing the LCD unit, be careful to prevent damages Adjustment Address CE to D9, DC to DF
caused by static electricity.
Note3: If “CLOCK SET” display appeared in the screen after the power
Note: Refer to “1. LCD type check” for the discrimination of the LCD
is turned on, set the clock, or cancel the display.
type.
SETUP setting:
Adjusting method:
LCD BRIGHTNESS (SETUP2) ............................ NORMAL
2) Select page: D, and input the data in the following table.
[Adjusting connector] Note: Press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander
Most of the measuring points for adjusting the LCD system are each time to set the data.
concentrated in CN302 of PK-58 board. 3) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.
Connect the Measuring Instruments via the CPC-9 jig (J-6082-393-C).
The following table shows the Pin No. and signal name of CN302. Address Data Remark
CE BA Bright adj.
Pin No. Signal Name Pin No. Signal Name CF B8 Contrast adj.
1 N. C. 10 HI UNREG D0 AA Bright adj.
2 N. C. 11 LANC IN D1 66 Color adj.
3 N. C. 12 LANC OUT D2 98 White balance adj.
4 REG GND 13 MAKER RECOG D3 7A White balance adj.
5 N. C. 14 MS CLK D4 B8 Contrast adj.
6 N. C. 15 MS BS D5 B0 D range adj.
7 HSY 16 MS DIO D6 7C V-COM level adj.
8 PANEL COM 17 N. C. D7 6F VCO adj. (NTSC)
9 VG 18 VDD D8 74 V COM adj.
Table 5-1-8. D9 73 VCO adj.
DC B5 Fixed data
DD 6F Fixed data
DE 9A Fixed data
DF B8 Fixed data
CN302
1
18
Tapping
screw
(DIA1.7 × 5)
1
18pins
18 1
18
CPC-9 jig
CPC lid (J-6082-393-C)
Fig. 5-1-16.
5-25
2. LCD Initial Data Input (2) 3. VCO Adjustment (PK-58 board)
Mode Still (Auto ( )) Set the VCO free-run frequency. If deviated, the LCD screen will
be blurred.
Subject Arbitrary
Adjustment Page B
Subject Arbitrary
Adjustment Address 3A to 3F
Measurement Point Pin 7 of CN302 (HSY)
Note: Refer to “1. LCD type check” for the discrimination of the LCD Measuring Instrument Frequency counter
type.
Adjustment Page D
Adjusting method: Adjustment Address D7 (NTSC)
1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. DD (PAL)
2) Select page: B, and input the data in the following table. Specified Value 1 f = 15734 ± 30Hz
Note: Press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander Specified Value 2 f = 15745 ± 30Hz
each time to set the data.
Setup setting:
Address Data Remark VIDEO OUT ................................................................. NTSC
3A 59 Fixed data (This adjustment must be performed in NTSC mode, so don’t
3B FF Fixed data set the setup setting to “PAL”.)
3C 04 Fixed data
Adjusting method:
3D 5B Fixed data
3E FF Fixed data
3F 02 Fixed data
button.
3 D D7 Change the data and set the VCO
frequency (f) to the specified value 1.
4 D D7 Press PAUSE button.
5 D DD Change the data and set the VCO
frequency (f) to the specified value 2.
6 D DD Press PAUSE button.
button.
5-26
4. D Range Adjustment (PK-58 board) 5. Bright Adjustment (PK-58 board)
Set the D range of the LCD driver to the specified value. If deviated, Set the level of the VIDEO signal for driving the LCD to the specified
the LCD screen will become blackish or saturated (whitish). value. If deviated, the screen image will be blackish or saturated
Mode Still (Auto ( )) (whitish).
Subject Arbitrary Mode Still (Auto ( ))
Measurement Point Pin 9 of CN302 (VG) Subject Arbitrary
External trigger: Pin 8 of CN302 Measurement Point Pin 9 of CN302 (VG)
(COM) External trigger: Pin 8 of CN302
Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope (COM)
Adjustment Page D Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope
Adjustment Address D5 Adjustment Page D
Specified Value A = 3.62 ± 0.05V Adjustment Address D0 CE, DE
Specified Value A = 1.81 ± 0.05V
Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data Procedure Adjusting method:
1 0 01 01 Set the data. Order Page Address Data Procedure
2 4 F1 03 Set the data. 1 0 01 01 Set the data.
3 D D5 Change the data and set the 2 4 F1 03 Set the data.
voltage (A) between the reversed 3 4 10 01 Set the data.
waveform pedestal and non- 4 D D0 Change the data and set the
reversed waveform pedestal to the voltage (A) between the pedestal
specified value. and GAMMA1 limiter level to the
4 D D5 Press PAUSE button. specified value.
5 4 F1 00 Set the data. 5 D D0 Press PAUSE button.
6 0 01 00 Set the data. 6 D D0 Read the data, and this data is
named DD0.
7 Convert DD0 to decimal notation,
Pedestal and obtain DD0’. (Note)
8 Calculate DCE’ and DDE’ using
following equations (Decimal
calculation)
DCE’=DD0’–12
DDE’=DD0’+32
A 9 Convert DCE’ and DDE’ to
hexadecimal number, and obtain
DCE and DDE. (Note)
10 D CE DCE Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
11 D DE DDE Set the data, and press PAUSE
2H
button.
Pedestal
Fig. 5-1-17.
13 4 F1 00 Set the data.
Note: Refer to “Table 5-4-1. Hexadecimal-decimal Conversion Table”.
GAMMA 1 limiter level
2H
Pedestal
Fig. 5-1-18.
5-27
6. Contrast Adjustment (PK-58 board) 7. Color Adjustment (PK-58 board)
Set the level of the VIDEO signal for driving the LCD to the specified Set the color saturation to the standard value. If deviated, the color
value. If deviated, the screen image will be blackish or saturated will be too dark or light.
(whitish). Mode Still (Auto ( ))
Mode Still (Auto ( )) Subject Arbitrary
Subject Arbitrary Measurement Point Pin 9 of CN302 (VG)
Measurement Point Pin 9 of CN302 (VG) External trigger: Pin 8 of CN302
External trigger: Pin 8 of CN302 (COM)
(COM) Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope
Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope Adjustment Page D
Adjustment Page D Adjustment Address D1
Adjustment Address D4, CF, DF Specified Value A = 540 ± 50mV
Adjusting method:
Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure
1 0 01 01 Set the data. 2 4 F1 04 Set the data.
2 4 F1 03 Set the data. 3 D D1 Change the data and set the
3 D D4 Change the data and set the voltage (A) between the white
voltage (A) between the pedestal 100% (Reference level) and green
and 10 steps peak to the specified to the specified value.
value. 4 D D1 Press PAUSE button.
4 D D4 Press PAUSE button. 5 4 F1 00 Set the data.
5 D D4 Read the data, and this data is 6 0 01 00 Set the data.
named DD4.
6 D CF DD4 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
White 100 %
7 D DF DD4 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button. A
Green
10 steps peak
2H
A Fig. 5-1-20.
2H
Pedestal
Fig. 5-1-19.
5-28
8. V-COM Level Adjustment (PK-58 board) 9. V-COM Adjustment (PK-58 board)
Set the common electrode drive signal level of LCD to the specified Set the DC bias of the common electrode drive signal of LCD to the
value. specified value.
Mode Still (Auto ( )) If deviated, the LCD display will move, producing flicker and
conspicuous vertical lines.
Subject Arbitrary
Measurement Point Pin 8 of CN302 (COM)
Subject Arbitrary
Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope
Measurement Point Check on LCD display
Adjustment Page D
Adjustment Address D6
Adjustment Page D
Adjustment Address D8
Adjusting method: Specified Value The brightness difference between the
Order Page Address Data Procedure section A and section B is minimum.
Note1: Perform “Bright Adjustment” and “Contrast Adjustment” before
2 4 F1 03 Set the data. this adjustment.
3 D D6 Change the data and set the V-COM
signal level (A) to the specified Adjusting method:
value. Order Page Address Data Procedure
4 D D6 Press PAUSE button. 1 0 01 01 Set the data.
5 4 F1 00 Set the data. 2 4 F1 01 Set the data.
6 0 01 00 Set the data. 3 4 10 02 Set the data.
4 D D8 Change the data so that the
brightness of the section A and
that of the section B is equal.
A
2H
B A
Fig. 5-1-21.
A B
B A
A B
Fig. 5-1-22.
5-29
10. White Balance Adjustment (PK-58 board)
Correct the white balance.
If deviated, the LCD screen color cannot be reproduced.
Subject Arbitrary
Measurement Point Check on LCD display
Adjustment Page D
Adjustment Address D2, D3
Specified Value The LCD screen should not be colored.
Note1: Use the AC power adaptor during this adjustment.

Note2: Check the white balance only when replacing the following parts.
If necessary, adjust them.
1. LCD panel
2. Light induction plate
3. IC802
Adjusting method:
3 D D2 98 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
4 D D3 7A Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
5 D D3 Check that the LCD screen is not
colored. If not colored, proceed to
step 11.
6 D D2 Change the data so that the LCD
screen is not colored.
8 D D3 Change the data so that the LCD
screen is not colored.
10 If the LCD screen is colored,
repeat steps 6 to 10.
5-30
1-6. SYSTEM CONTROL SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT Adjusting method:
1. Battery End Adjustment (SY-67 board) 1 0 01 01 Set the data.
Check the battery end voltage.
2 Decrease the output voltage of the
Mode Still (Auto ( )) regulated power supply so that the
Subject All black digital voltmeter display is 5.50 ±
(Cover the lens with a black cap) 0.01Vdc.
Measurement Point Display data of page: 2, address: 9A 2 2 9A Read the data, and this data is
Measuring Instrument Adjustment remote commander named Dref.
Adjustment Page D 3 D 90 Dref Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
Adjustment Address 90 to 94, B6, B7 4 Convert Dref to decimal notation,
and obtain Dref’. (Note2)
Note1: Use the CPC-9 jig for connecting the adjustment remote 5 Calculate D91’, D92’, D93’, D94’,
commander. DB6’, and DB7’ using following
equations. (decimal calculation)
Switch setting: D91’ = Dref’+ 5
FOCUS .................................................................. MANUAL D92’ = Dref’+ 23
D99’ = Dref’+ 44
Connection: D94’ = Dref’+ 55
1) Connect the regulated power supply and the digital voltmeter DB6’ = Dref’+ 43
to the battery terminal as shown in Fig. 5-1-23. DB7’ = Dref’+ 14
Preparations: 6 Convert D91’, D92’, D93’, D94’,
1) Adjust the output voltage of the regulated power supply so that DB6’, and D B7’ to hexadecimal
the digital voltmeter display is 6.1 ± 0.1Vdc. number, and obtain D91, D92, D93,
2) Turn off the power supply. D94, DB6, and DB7. (Note2)
3) Turn on the HOLD switch of the adjustment remote 7 D 91 D91 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
commander. 8 D 92 D92 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
4) Turn on the power supply. 9 D 93 D93 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
10 D 94 D94 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
11 D B6 DB6 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
12 D B7 DB7 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
Note2: Refer to “Table 5-2-1. Hexadecimal-decimal Conversion Table”.
Digital voltmeter
PK-58 CPC-9 jig

board (J-6082-393-C)
CN302 1
18
18 pins
Regulated power supply
LANC
jack
Adjustment remote
commander
Use thick cables.

Shorten as much as possible. Battery holder
(Bellow 20cm)
Connecting point
Fig. 5-1-23.
5-31
2. Serial No. Input
Write the serial No. in the EEPROM (nonvolatile memory). Convert
the serial No. on the name plate from decimal to ASCII code, and
write in the EEPROM.
Page B
Address 32 to 37
Input method:
2) Read the 6-digit serial No. on the name plate, and convert each
digit to ASCII code, and obtain D32, D33, D34, D35, D36 and D37.
(See below.)
6-digit serial No.
Convert to ASCII code. (Refer to Table. 5-1-9.)
D37 (Data of address: 37)

Example: If the serial No. is 123456.

D32 = 31
D33 = 32
D34 = 33
D35 = 34
D36 = 35
D37 = 36
2) Input D32, D33, D34, D35, D36 and D37 to each address of page: B.
Note: After setting each data, be sure to press the PAUSE button.
Digit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
ASCII Code 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
Table. 5-1-9.
5-32
5-2. SERVICE MODE
2-1. ADJUSTMENT REMOTE COMMANDER
The adjustment remote commander is used for changing the
calculation coefficient in signal processing, EVR data, etc. The
adjustment remote commander performs bi-directional
communication with the unit using the remote commander signal
line (LANC). The resultant data of this bi-directional communication
is written in the non-volatile memory.
1. Using the Adjustment Remote Commander 2. Precautions Upon Using

1) Connect the adjustment remote commander to the following the Adjustment Remote Commander
connector or jack. Mishandling of the adjustment remote commander may erase the
• CN302 of PK-58 board via CPC-9 jig (J-6082-393-C) correct adjustment data at times. To prevent this, it is recommended
• LANC (ACC) jack that all adjustment data be noted down before beginning adjustments
2) Set the HOLD switch of the adjustment remote commander to and new adjustment data after each adjustment.
“HOLD” (SERVICE position). If it has been properly
connected, the LCD on the adjustment remote commander will
display as shown in Fig. 5-2-1.
Page Data Address
Fig. 5-2-1.
3) Operate the adjustment remote commander as follows.

• Changing the page
The page increases when the EDIT SEARCH+ button is
pressed, and decreases when the EDIT SEARCH– button is
pressed. There are altogether 16 pages, from 0 to F.
Hexadecimal
notation 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
LCD Display 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A b c d E F
Decimal notation
conversion value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 12 1314 15
• Changing the address

The address increases when the FF (M) button is pressed,
and decreases when the REW (m) button is pressed. There
are altogether 256 addresses, from 00 to FF.
• Changing the data (Data setting)
The data increases when the PLAY (N) button is pressed,
and decreases when the STOP (x) button is pressed. There
are altogether 256 data, from 00 to FF.
• Writing the adjustment data
The PAUSE button must be pressed to write the adjustment
data (B, D, E, F, 7 page) in the nonvolatile memory. (The
new adjusting data will not be recorded in the nonvolatile
memory if this step is not performed.)
4) After completing all adjustments, turn off the main power
supply once.
5-33
2-2. DATA PROCESS
The calculation of the DDS display and the adjustment remote
commander display data (hexadecimal notation) are required for
obtaining the adjustment data of some adjustment items. In this case,
after converting the hexadecimal notation to decimal notation,
calculate and convert the result to hexadecimal notation, and use it
as the adjustment data. Indicates the hexadecimal-decimal
conversion table.
Hexadecimal-decimal Conversion Table 2

Lower digit of
hexadecimal 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
Upper digit (A) (b) (c) (d) (E) (F)
of hexadecimal
0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
1 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
2 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
3 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63
4 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79
5 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95
6 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111
7 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127
8 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143
9 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159
A (A) 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175
1 B (b) 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191
C (c) 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207
D (d) 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223
E (E) 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239
F (F) 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255
Note: The characters shown in the parenthesis ( ) shown the display on the adjustment remote commander.
(Example) If the DDS display or the adjustment remote commander shows BD (bd);
Because the upper digit of the adjustment number is B (b), and the lower digit is D (d), the meeting point
“189” of 1 and 2 in the above table is the corresponding decimal number.
Table. 5-2-1.
5-34
2-3. SERVICE MODE 2. Bit Value Discrimination
Bit values must be discriminated using the display data of the
1. Setting the Test Mode adjustment remote commander for following items. Use the table
Page D Address 10 below to discriminate if the bit value is “1” or “0”.
Display on the adjustment remote commander

Data Function
00 Normal
01 Forced STILL mode power ON
02 Forced PLAY mode power ON
03 Forced MOVIE mode power ON
Address
• Before setting the data, select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: Page bit3 to bit0 discrimination
01.
• For page D, the data set is recorded in the non-volatile memory bit7 to bit4 discrimination
by pressing the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote
commander. In this case, take note that the test mode will not be Display on the Bit values
exited even when the main power is turned off. adjustment bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
• After completing adjustments/repairs, be sure to return the data remote or or or or
of this address to “00”, and press the PAUSE button of the commander bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4
adjustment remote commander. 0 0 0 0 0
Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.
1 0 0 0 1
2 0 0 1 0
3 0 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 0
5 0 1 0 1
6 0 1 1 0
7 0 1 1 1
A 8 1 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 1
A (A) 1 0 1 0
B ( b) 1 0 1 1
C ( c) 1 1 0 0
D (d) 1 1 0 1
B E ( E) 1 1 1 0
F ( F) 1 1 1 1
Example: If “8E” is displayed on the adjustment remote commander, the

bit values for bit7 to bit4 are shown in the A column, and the
bit values for bit3 to bit0 are shown in the B column.
5-35
3. Switch check (1)
Page 2 Address 80
Bit Function When bit value = 1 When bit value = 0

0 Power switch (XPOWER ON) Power switch off Power switch on
(Control switch block (ZK-503))
1 Mode dial (XPB ON) *1 Except PLAY PLAY ( )
2 Lens cap switch *2 Off On
(XLENS CAP OPEN)(TK-61 board S503) (Without Lens cap) (With Lens cap)
3 Shutter button (XSHTR ON) Off On
(Control switch block (RK-503))
4 Shutter button (XAE LOCK ON) Off On
(Control switch block (RK-503))
5 Lid open/close switch On Off
(XLID OPEN SW)(JK-208 board S101,103) (Lid close) (Lid open)
*1: Refer to “Switch check (2)” and “Switch check (5)”.

*2: MVC-CD300 model only.
Using method:
1) Select page: 2, address: 80.
2) By discriminating the bit value of display data, the state of the
switches can be discriminated.
4. Switch check (2)

Page 2 Address 86
Bit Function When bit value = 1 When bit value = 0

6 Mode dial (XSETUP) *3 Except SETUP SETUP
*3: Refer to “Switch check (1)” and “Switch check (5)”.
Using method:
2) By discriminating the bit value of display data, the Mode dial
position can be discriminated.
5. Switch check (3)

Page 2 Address 84
Using method:
2) By discriminating the lower digit of the data, the rotation of
the control dial can be discriminated.
Jog dial Lower digit of the data
When rotated upward. ...→0→4→C→8→0→...
When rotated downward. ...→0→8→C→4→0→...
5-36
6. Switch check (4)
Page 2 Address 90 to 93
Using method:
1) Select page: 2, address: 90 to 93.
2) By discriminating the display data, the pressed key can be
discriminated.
Data
Address
00 to 14 15 to 46 47 to 70 71 to A5 A6 to DE DF to FF
90 Control button Control button MENU
(KEY AD0) DOWN UP (S002) No key input
(IC402 is) (S001)(FS-83 board)(S001)(FS-83 board) (FS-83 board)
91 Control button Control button Control button SET
(KEY AD1) RIGHT LEFT (S001) No key input
(IC402 id) (S001)(FS-83 board)(S001)(FS-83 board) (FS-83 board)
92 DISPLAY AE LOCK EV ( ) FOCUS SPOT METER
(KEY AD2) (S301) (S303) (S306) (S307) ( ) No key input
(IC402 if) (PK-58 board) (PK-58 board) (PK-58 board) (PK-58 board) (S304)(PK-58 board)
93 ZOOM W ZOOM T JOG SET
(KEY AD3) (Control switch (Control switch (Control switch No key input
(IC402 ig) block (ZK-503)) block (ZK-503)) block (ZK-503))
7. Switch check (5)

Page 2 Address 94
Using method:
2) By discriminating the display data, the mode dial position can
be discriminated.
Data
Address
00 to 14 15 to 3D 3E to 67 68 to 93 94 to D0 D1 to FF
Mode dial
AUTO ( ) or
Mode dial Mode dial Mode dial Mode dial Mode dial
94 PLAY ( ) or
AE-S AE-A AE-M SCN MOVIE ( )
(MODE DIAL) SETUP
(Control switch (Control switch (Control switch (Control switch (Control switch
(IC402 ih) (Control switch
block (ZK-503)) block (ZK-503)) block (ZK-503)) block (ZK-503)) block (ZK-503))
block (ZK-503))
Note
Note: Refer to “Switch check (1)” and “Switch check (2)”.
8. LED check
Page 2 Address 04
Using method:
1) Select page: 2, address: 04, set data: 01 and press PAUSE button.
2) Check that all LED are lit.
3) Select page: 2, address: 04, set data: 00 and press PAUSE button.
5-37
9. Self Diagnosis Log check Example:
Page 2 Address B3 to B5 C : 32 : 01
Address : B5
Address Initial value Function Address : B4
Address : B3 (Note)
B3 00 Last error occurrence code
B4 00 Note: “C” → “01”
B5 00 “E” → “03”
Using method:
1) The self diagnosis log is displayed at page: 2, addresses: B3 to B5.
Note1:When no error occurs in this unit, data “00” is written in addresses B3 to B5.
When the last error occurs, the data corresponding to the error is written in the address (B3 to B5).
Note2:These data will be erased when the coin lithium battery (JK-208 board BT101) is removed (reset).
10. Record of Use check

Page D Address EC to EF
Address Function Remarks

EC Recording counter Not used.
ED (Hexadecimal)
EE 1000-digit and 100-digit
EF 10-digit and 1-digit
Using method:
1) The recording counter data is displayed at page: D, addresses: EE to EF. These data are named DEE and DEF respectively.
2) Convert DEE and DEF to decimal notation, and obtain DEE’ and DEF’.
(Refer to Table 5-2-1. “Hexadecimal-decimal conversion table”.)
3) Calculate the recording counter (N) using following equation. (Decimal calculation)
N = DEF’ + DEE’ × 256
Initializing method:
2) Select page: D, address: EC to EF, and write data: 00 to each address.
Note: Press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander each time to set the data.
5-38E
MVC-CD200/CD300
SECTION 6
REPAIR PARTS LIST
6-1. EXPLODED VIEWS

NOTE:
• -XX, -X mean standardized parts, so they may • Abbreviation The components identified by mark 0 or
have some differences from the original one. CND : Canadian model. dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety.
• Items marked “*” are not stocked since they HK : Hong Kong model. Replace only with part number specified.
are seldom required for routine service. Some AUS : Australian model. Les composants identifiés par une marque
delay should be anticipated when ordering these CN : Chinese model. 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité.
items. KR : Korea model. Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant
• The mechanical parts with no reference number J : Japanese model. le numéro spécifié.
in the exploded views are not supplied.
6-1-1. OVERALL SECTION
Cabinet (rear) section,
2 (See page 6-5, 6-6)
not 9 5 19
supplied 10
8 K 17 F 14
J BT901 E
13 16
D 15 (Note) 18 B D
11 not
(Note)
7 supplied C
JA 25
F 5
5 6 E 5 C K 2
H
4 5 I G 2
12 M
D-
Cabinet (front) section, B 08
3
Lens cabinet section (See page 6-3),
Lens section (See page 6-4) 3 20
SY
-67
G 21 22
(CD300) A
JK
-20
5 5 5 5 8
2 H 23 (CD200)
I 24
2
1
26 not
supplied 1
2
: BT101(Lithium battery) JK-208 board on the mount position. (See page 4-60) Cabinet (front) section,
Lens cabinet section
Note: The charging capacitor is charged to the maximum of 300V. (See page 6-2),
There is a danger of electric shock due to the high voltage when the capacitor is touched by bare hand. Lens section
Discharge the voltage remained in the capacitor, referring to the Service Note (See page 5). (See page 6-4)
Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks
1 X-3951-672-1 CAP ASSY, LENS (CD300) 13 3-068-461-01 BASE, STROBOSCOPE
1 X-3951-763-1 CAP ASSY, LENS (CD200) 14 3-067-950-01 LID, CPC (CD300)
2 3-968-729-71 SCREW (M2), LOCK ACE, P2 14 3-067-950-11 LID, CPC (CD200)
3 3-067-469-11 SHOE, ACCESSORY 15 X-3951-647-1 CASE ASSY, STROBOSCOPE (CD300)
4 3-069-159-21 PROCESS, (M2) INTERIOR LOCK 15 X-3951-655-1 CASE ASSY, STROBOSCOPE (CD200)
5 3-914-366-01 SCREW (DIA. 1.7X4), PRECISION 0 16 1-476-676-11 FLASH UNIT

6 3-067-937-01 LID, BT (CD300) 17 3-067-949-01 COVER, STROBOSCOPE (CD300)
6 3-067-937-11 LID, BT (CD200) 17 3-067-949-11 COVER, STROBOSCOPE (CD200)
7 3-068-462-01 SPRING, ST-POP-UP 18 A-7010-815-A DDX-G2100 COMPLETE ASSY (SERVICE)
8 3-318-382-01 SCREW (1.7X3), TAPPING 19 3-068-474-01 SCREW (M2), SPECIAL (STEP)
9 3-969-380-01 SPRING, BATTERY 20 1-681-545-11 FP-361 FLEXIBLE BOARD

10 X-3951-639-1 HOLDER ASSY, BT (CD300) 21 3-068-475-01 NUT PLATE (SIDE)
10 X-3951-651-1 HOLDER ASSY, BT (CD200) 22 A-7074-836-A JK-208 BOARD, COMPLETE
11 3-068-464-01 LEVER, ST SENSOR 23 3-068-875-01 RETAINER, B2B
12 A-7074-898-A SY-67 (300) BOARD, COMPLETE (SERVICE) 24 1-681-548-21 FP-364 FLEXIBLE BOARD
(CD300)
25 3-713-791-11 SCREW (M1.7X5), TAPPING, P2
12 A-7074-900-A SY-67 (200) BOARD, COMPLETE (SERVICE) 26 3-067-797-01 STRING (T), CAP (CD300)
(CD200) BT901 1-694-815-11 TERMINAL BOARD, BATTERY
Exploded view and parts list of DDX-

G2100 COMPLETE ASSEMBLY are not
shown. Page 6-8 is not shown.
6-1
6-1-2. CABINET (FRONT) SECTION, LENS CABINET SECTION
(CD200)
61 63 Lens section (See page 6-4)

MIC901
60
62
53 59
57
LED901
not 53 A
supplied
67
55 66
56 65
53
64
51 53
B
58
52
53
A 51 54
not
supplied
51
51 3-968-729-71 SCREW (M2), LOCK ACE, P2 61 3-068-488-01 CUSHION, MICROPHONE
52 X-3951-650-1 CABINET ASSY, LENS 62 3-062-299-01 SHEET, MICROPHONE
53 3-914-366-01 SCREW (DIA. 1.7X4), PRECISION 63 X-3951-646-1 HOLDER ASSY, MICROPHONE
54 3-060-274-01 SCREW, TRIPOD 64 1-681-549-11 FP-369 FLEXIBLE BOARD
55 X-3951-652-1 CABINET (FRONT) ASSY 65 A-7074-907-A TK-61 (200) BOARD, COMPLETE
56 3-989-735-61 SCREW (M1.7), LOCK ACE, P2 66 1-681-550-11 FP-370 FLEXIBLE BOARD

57 1-476-674-11 SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL (RL-503) 67 3-068-494-01 CAP, LED
58 3-067-948-11 PLATE, SIDE ORNAMENTAL LED901 8-719-084-32 DIODE TLOH20TP
59 3-713-791-05 SCREW (B1.7) MIC901 1-542-457-11 MICROPHONE
60 3-068-402-01 SHEET METAL, RETAINER
6-2
6-1-3. CABINET (FRONT) SECTION, LENS CABINET SECTION
(CD300)
113 115 Lens section

MIC901 (See page 6-4)
112
114
106 111
110 LED901
not
106
supplied
119 A
118
108
117
109 106
116
104 102 106
B
not
107
supplied
103
not
supplied 106
A 102 105
101
B
102
101 3-068-411-01 RING, FILTER 112 3-068-402-01 SHEET METAL, RETAINER
102 3-968-729-71 SCREW (M2), LOCK ACE, P2 113 3-068-488-01 CUSHION, MICROPHONE
103 3-060-271-01 SCREW (M1.7X7) 114 3-062-299-01 SHEET, MICROPHONE
104 X-3951-642-1 CABINET ASSY, LENS 115 X-3951-646-1 HOLDER ASSY, MICROPHONE
105 3-060-274-01 SCREW, TRIPOD 116 1-681-549-11 FP-369 FLEXIBLE BOARD
106 3-914-366-01 SCREW (DIA. 1.7X4), PRECISION 117 A-7074-837-A TK-61 BOARD, COMPLETE
107 3-067-948-01 PLATE, SIDE ORNAMENTAL 118 1-681-550-11 FP-370 FLEXIBLE BOARD
108 X-3951-641-1 CABINET (FRONT) ASSY 119 3-068-494-01 CAP, LED
109 3-989-735-61 SCREW (M1.7), LOCK ACE, P2 LED901 8-719-084-32 DIODE TLOH20TP
110 1-476-674-11 SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL (RL-503) MIC901 1-542-457-11 MICROPHONE
111 3-713-791-05 SCREW (B1.7)
6-3
6-1-4. LENS SECTION
(CD300)
160
(CD200)
not
supplied
M002 163
M001 164
161
165
not 162
supplied
IC401 166
153
154 167
155 34
-3
156 CD
not
152 157 supplied
not
151 supplied
158
IC101
154
33
-3
CD 159
Be sure to read “Precautions Upon Replacing CCD Imager”

on pages 4-15 (CD200) and 4-16 (CD300) when changing
the CCD imager.
151 3-831-441-11 SPACER (CD200) 162 3-989-735-31 SCREW (M1.7), LOCK ACE, P2 (CD300)
152 1-758-415-11 LENS, ZOOM (VCL-6103WA) (CD200) 163 1-758-437-11 FILTER BLOCK, OPTICAL (CD300)
153 3-068-533-01 FRAME (M), LENS (CD200) 164 3-067-751-01 RUBBER (N), SEAL (CD300)
154 3-914-366-01 SCREW (DIA. 1.7X4), PRECISION (CD200) 165 3-713-791-05 SCREW (B1.7) (CD300)
155 3-058-032-01 ADAPTOR (CL), CCD FITTING (CD200) 166 A-7074-840-A CD-334 BOARD, COMPLETE (CD300)
156 1-758-436-11 FILTER BLOCK, OPTICAL (CD200) 167 3-318-203-11 SCREW (B1.7X6), TAPPING (CD300)
157 3-060-714-01 RUBBER (CL), SEAL (CD200) IC101 A-7031-236-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER) (CD200)
158 A-7074-843-A CD-333 BOARD, COMPLETE (CD200) IC401 A-7031-268-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER) (CD300)
159 3-947-268-11 TITE (2), +B TAPPING (P) (CD200) M001 3-709-573-01 MOTOR UNIT, FOCUS (CD200)
160 3-068-443-01 FRAME (H), LENS (CD300) M002 3-709-574-01 MOTOR UNIT, ZOOM (CD200)
161 A-7031-247-A LENS ASSY (CD300)
6-4
6-1-5. CABINET (REAR) SECTION-1
Lid CD section
(See page 6-7)
208 209
206
A
205
207
203 Cabinet (rear) section-2
202 B (See page 6-6)
B 205
201 SP901
C 215
218 205 C
FS
-83
204
213 211 210
J901 214 212
205 A
205
205
217
216
201 3-069-046-01 SCREW (Y) (DIA. 1.7X5.5) 211 1-961-144-11 HARNESS (FS-140)
202 3-070-017-01 STAY, PO SPRING 212 3-068-496-01 PIN (DIA. 3), PARALLEL
203 3-068-479-01 CAP, CAPACITOR 213 3-068-450-01 COVER (CD), FLEXIBLE
204 3-070-014-01 SPRING, PRE OPEN 214 3-068-497-01 COVER, PARALLEL PIN
205 3-914-366-01 SCREW (DIA. 1.7X4), PRECISION 215 3-068-453-01 RETAINER, SPEAKER
206 1-476-675-11 SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL (ZK-503) 216 1-961-141-11 HARNESS (FS-136)
207 3-068-454-01 SHEET METAL (R), STRAP 217 1-681-546-11 FP-362 FLEXIBLE BOARD
208 3-068-457-01 SHAFT, STRAP 218 A-7074-835-A FS-83 BOARD, COMPLETE
209 3-056-559-11 SCREW (M1.7), 0 PART-NO. P2 J901 1-794-045-11 CONNECTOR, DC-IN
210 1-657-785-11 FP-248 FLEXIBLE BOARD (DEW SENSOR) SP901 1-544-839-11 SPEAKER (1.6 CM)
6-5
6-1-6. CABINET (REAR) SECTION-2
269
268
267
266
265
264
263
259 262 271

C 270
260
261 272
258 B A
252
257 273
277 B
not
PL902
278 supplied
not C
256 supplied
277 279
255
A 276
254 274
253 256 252
252
251
275 PL901 280
251 3-068-467-01 SPRING, CD OPENER 269 3-068-536-01 KNOB (M), MODE (CD200)
252 3-914-366-01 SCREW (DIA. 1.7X4), PRECISION * 270 3-064-250-01 SPRING, F BUTTON
253 3-068-470-01 COVER, SOLENOID 271 3-067-942-01 BUTTON, FUNCTION (CD300)
254 3-068-469-01 SPRING, CD LOCK LEVER 271 3-067-942-11 BUTTON, FUNCTION (CD200)
255 3-068-468-01 LEVER, CD LOCK 272 3-068-424-01 COVER, DC
256 3-703-357-03 PIN, PARALLEL (DIA. 1.6X6) 273 X-3951-648-1 OPENER ASSY, CD (CD300)
257 1-961-142-11 HARNESS (FS-138) 273 X-3951-656-1 OPENER ASSY, CD (CD200)
258 3-068-481-01 COVER, ST LOCK 274 3-067-941-01 COVER, JK (CD300)
259 3-068-427-01 SPRING, CD LOCK 274 3-067-941-11 COVER, JK (CD200)
260 3-649-266-01 PIN, PARALLEL 275 1-961-143-11 HARNESS (FS-139)
261 3-068-428-01 SLIDER, CD LOCK 276 3-068-455-01 SHEET METAL (L), STRAP
262 3-068-423-01 SPRING, POWER 277 3-065-177-01 SCREW (1.7X3)
263 3-068-422-01 KNOB, POWER 278 3-068-421-01 RETAINER, MODE KNOB
264 3-068-493-01 RING, SLIDER 279 3-068-401-01 HEAD (M1.7),0 PART-NO. SPECIAL
265 3-068-625-01 SPRING, FRICTION 280 X-3951-643-1 CABINET (REAR) ASSY (CD300)
266 3-068-597-01 GRIP (M1.4), EG 280 X-3951-653-1 CABINET (REAR) ASSY (CD200)
267 3-068-623-01 PLATE, CLICK PL901 1-454-674-51 SOLENOID, PLUNGER (STOROBO PLUNGER)
268 3-068-619-01 BASE, DIAL PL902 1-454-988-11 SOLENOID, PLUNGER (DOOR LOCK PLUNGER)
269 3-068-420-01 KNOB, MODE (CD300)
6-6
6-1-7. LID CD SECTION
LCD901
306
not
305 supplied 307
B
304
301 303
301 A
ND901
B
301 PK
302 -58
A
301
301
301
301 3-914-366-01 SCREW (DIA. 1.7X4), PRECISION 307 X-3951-644-1 LID ASSY, CD (CD300)
302 3-068-459-01 LID, CD REAR 307 X-3951-654-1 LID ASSY, CD (CD200)
303 A-7074-838-A PK-58 (SH) BOARD, COMPLETE LCD901 1-803-858-22 INDICATOR MODULE LIQUID CRYSTAL
304 1-681-547-11 FP-363 FLEXIBLE BOARD (LQ25A3FR30) (SERVICE)
305 X-3951-645-1 STAY ASSY, UPPER 0 ND901 1-517-787-71 TUBE, FLUORESCENT,COLD CATHODE
306 3-068-458-01 WINDOW, SOLAR
Note : Note :
6-7
CD-333 CD-334
6-2. ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST

NOTE:
• Due to standardization, replacements in the • RESISTORS When indicating parts by reference number,
parts list may be different from the parts All resistors are in ohms. please include the board name.
specified in the diagrams or the components METAL: metal-film resistor
The components identified by mark 0 or
used on the set. METAL OXIDE: Metal Oxide-film resistor dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety.
• -XX, -X mean standardized parts, so they may F: nonflammable Replace only with part number specified.
have some difference from the original one. • SEMICONDUCTORS Les composants identifiés par une marque
• Items marked “*” are not stocked since they In each case, u: µ, for example: 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité.
are seldom required for routine service. Some uA...: µA... , uPA... , µPA... , Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant
delay should be anticipated when ordering these uPB... , µPB... , uPC... , µPC... , le numéro spécifié.
items. uPD..., µPD...
• CAPACITORS: • Abbreviation
uF: µF CND : Canadian model. CN : Chinese model.
• COILS HK : Hong Kong model. KR : Korea model.
uH: µH AUS : Australian model. J : Japanese model.
A-7074-840-A CD-334 BOARD, COMPLETE (CD300) C217 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V
****************************** C218 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V
A-7074-843-A CD-333 BOARD, COMPLETE (CD200) C219 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V
****************************** C220 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 6.3V
(Ref.No.;1000 Series) C221 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 6.3V
(IC101 and IC401 are not included in this COMPLETE BOARD)
C222 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V
< CAPACITOR > C223 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V
C101 1-107-690-11 TANTAL. CHIP 6.8uF 20% 35V C225 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 6.3V
(CD200) C226 1-110-569-11 TANTAL. CHIP 47uF 20% 6.3V
C102 1-125-827-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 25V
(CD200) C227 1-110-569-11 TANTAL. CHIP 47uF 20% 6.3V
C103 1-119-751-11 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20% 16V C228 1-107-690-11 TANTAL. CHIP 6.8uF 20% 35V
(CD200) C229 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V
C104 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V C230 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V
(CD200) C231 1-119-751-11 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20% 16V
(CD200)
C106 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10%16V C303 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V
(CD200) (CD200)
C107 1-162-966-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0022uF 10% 50V C304 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 6.3V
(CD200) (CD200)
(CD200) (CD200)
(CD200) (CD200)
C111 1-164-850-11 CERAMIC CHIP 10PF 0.50PF 16V
C308 1-110-569-11 TANTAL. CHIP 47uF 20% 6.3V
C202 1-110-569-11 TANTAL. CHIP 47uF 20% 6.3V C310 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V
C203 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 6.3V C311 1-110-569-11 TANTAL. CHIP 47uF 20% 6.3V
C205 1-164-876-11 CERAMIC CHIP 120PF 5% 16V C312 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V
(CD300) (CD200)
C206 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V (CD200)
C210 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 6.3V C316 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V
C211 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 6.3V (CD200)
C213 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 6.3V
C216 1-164-876-11 CERAMIC CHIP 120PF 5% 16V C319 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 6.3V
(CD300) (CD200)
(CD200)
C321 1-135-259-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 6.3V
(CD200)
6-9
CD-333 CD-334
C323 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V FB220 1-414-229-11 FERRITE 0uH
C401 1-107-690-11 TANTAL. CHIP 6.8uF 20.00% 35V FB221 1-414-229-11 FERRITE 0uH
(CD300) FB222 1-414-229-11 FERRITE 0uH
C402 1-119-751-11 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20% 16V FB223 1-414-229-11 FERRITE 0uH
(CD300) FB224 1-414-229-11 FERRITE 0uH
(CD300) FB225 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0
C404 1-104-329-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 50V FB226 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0
(CD300) FB301 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W
(CD300)
C405 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V FB302 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W
(CD300) (CD300)
C407 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V FB303 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W
(CD300) (CD300)
(CD300) FB304 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W
C409 1-164-850-11 CERAMIC CHIP 10PF 0.50PF 16V (CD300)
(CD300) FB305 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W
(CD300) FB306 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W
(CD300)
C413 1-125-827-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 25V FB307 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W
(CD300) (CD300)
FB308 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W
< CONNECTOR > (CD300)
CN203 1-785-482-41 CONNECTOR, BOARD TO BOARD 70P FB401 1-414-228-11 FERRITE 0uH (CD300)
* CN301 1-784-178-11 CONNECTOR, FFC (ZIF) 26P (CD200)
CN302 1-766-336-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 6P (CD300) < IC >
CN303 1-573-356-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 16P (CD300)
IC101 A-7031-236-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER) (CD200)
< DIODE > IC201 8-752-397-43 IC CXD2470R-T4 (CD200)
IC201 8-752-404-95 IC CXD2497R-T4 (CD300)
D101 8-719-073-01 DIODE MA111-(K8).S0 (CD200) IC202 6-700-042-01 IC AD80044JSTRL
D301 8-719-073-01 DIODE MA111-(K8).S0 (CD200) IC301 8-759-637-96 IC uPD16877MA-6A5-E2
D302 8-719-075-62 DIODE 1SS401(TE85L) (CD200)
D401 8-719-073-01 DIODE MA111-(K8).S0 (CD300) IC302 8-759-637-96 IC uPD16877MA-6A5-E2
IC303 8-759-693-13 IC NJM12904V(TE2) (CD200)
< FERRITE BEAD > IC304 8-759-681-42 IC NJM12902V(TE2) (CD200)
IC401 A-7031-268-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER) (CD300)
FB101 1-414-228-11 FERRITE 0uH
FB201 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W < COIL >
(CD300)
* FB201 1-500-282-11 FERRITE 0uH (CD200) L101 1-469-528-91 INDUCTOR 100uH (CD200)
FB202 1-414-228-11 FERRITE 0uH (CD300) L201 1-414-756-11 INDUCTOR 47uH (CD300)
FB203 1-500-283-11 FERRITE 0uH L202 1-414-756-11 INDUCTOR 47uH
L203 1-414-754-11 INDUCTOR 10uH (CD200)
FB205 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W L203 1-414-756-11 INDUCTOR 47uH (CD300)
(CD300)
* FB205 1-500-282-11 FERRITE 0uH (CD200) L301 1-412-951-11 INDUCTOR 10uH
FB209 1-414-228-11 FERRITE 0uH L304 1-412-951-11 INDUCTOR 10uH (CD200)
L401 1-469-528-91 INDUCTOR 100uH (CD300)
FB210 1-414-228-11 FERRITE 0uH
FB211 1-414-229-11 FERRITE 0uH < TRANSISTOR >
FB212 1-414-229-11 FERRITE 0uH
FB213 1-414-229-11 FERRITE 0uH Q101 8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR UN9213J-(K8).SO (CD200)
FB214 1-414-229-11 FERRITE 0uH Q102 8-729-117-73 TRANSISTOR 2SC4178-F13F14-T1(CD200)
Q301 8-729-037-52 TRANSISTOR 2SD2216J-QR(K8).SO
FB215 1-414-229-11 FERRITE 0uH (CD200)
FB216 1-414-229-11 FERRITE 0uH Q302 8-729-042-26 TRANSISTOR 2SB1462J-QR(K8).SO
FB217 1-414-229-11 FERRITE 0uH Q303 8-729-037-52 TRANSISTOR 2SD2216J-QR(K8).SO
FB218 1-414-229-11 FERRITE 0uH (CD200)
FB219 1-414-229-11 FERRITE 0uH
Q401 8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR UN9213J-(K8).SO (CD300)
Q402 8-729-117-73 TRANSISTOR 2SC4178-F13F14-T1(CD300)
Be sure to read “Precautions Upon Replacing CCD Imager”

on pages 4-15 (CD200) and 4-16 (CD300) when changing
the CCD imager.
6-10
CD-333 CD-334
< RESISTOR > R306 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W
(CD200)
R101 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R307 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W
(CD200) (CD200)
R102 1-218-931-11 RES-CHIP 15 5% 1/16W R308 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W
(CD200) (CD200)
(CD200) (CD200)
(CD200) (CD300)
R105 1-218-957-11 RES-CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/16W
(CD200) R311 1-218-975-11 RES-CHIP 68K 5% 1/16W
(CD200)
(CD200) (CD200)
(CD200) (CD300)
R108 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W R314 1-218-947-11 RES-CHIP 330 5% 1/16W
(CD200) (CD200)
R201 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W R315 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W
(CD200) (CD200)
R202 1-218-941-11 RES-CHIP 100 5% 1/16W
R316 1-218-980-11 RES-CHIP 180K 5% 1/16W
R203 1-218-941-11 RES-CHIP 100 5% 1/16W (CD200)
(CD300) R317 1-218-975-11 RES-CHIP 68K 5% 1/16W
R203 1-218-945-11 RES-CHIP 220 5% 1/16W (CD200)
(CD200) R318 1-218-980-11 RES-CHIP 180K 5% 1/16W
R206 1-218-957-11 RES-CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/16W (CD200)
R211 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W (CD200)
R320 1-218-958-11 RES-CHIP 2.7K 5% 1/16W
R212 1-218-945-11 RES-CHIP 220 5% 1/16W (CD200)
R214 1-218-945-11 RES-CHIP 220 5% 1/16W
R216 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 (CD200) R321 1-218-954-11 RES-CHIP 1.2K 5% 1/16W
R217 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 (CD200) (CD200)
(CD200)
R222 1-218-943-11 RES-CHIP 150 5% 1/16W (CD200)
R223 1-218-943-11 RES-CHIP 150 5% 1/16W R324 1-208-712-11 METAL CHIP 16K 0.5% 1/16W
R224 1-218-943-11 RES-CHIP 150 5% 1/16W (CD200)
(CD200)
R226 1-218-943-11 RES-CHIP 150 5% 1/16W
R228 1-218-943-11 RES-CHIP 150 5% 1/16W (CD200)
R230 1-218-943-11 RES-CHIP 150 5% 1/16W (CD200)
R328 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W
R231 1-218-943-11 RES-CHIP 150 5% 1/16W (CD200)
R233 1-218-943-11 RES-CHIP 150 5% 1/16W (CD200)
R234 1-218-943-11 RES-CHIP 150 5% 1/16W R330 1-218-957-11 RES-CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/16W
R239 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W (CD200)

R241 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R333 1-218-944-11 RES-CHIP 180 5% 1/16W
R242 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 (CD300)
R244 1-208-635-11 RES-CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R334 1-218-944-11 RES-CHIP 180 5% 1/16W
R246 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 (CD300) (CD300)
R335 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0
R247 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 (CD200) R336 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0
R250 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W
R303 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R401 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 (CD300)
(CD200) R402 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 (CD300)
R304 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R403 1-218-958-11 RES-CHIP 2.7K 5% 1/16W
(CD200) (CD300)
R305 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W R404 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W
(CD300)
R406 1-218-939-11 RES-CHIP 68 5% 1/16W
(CD300)
6-11
CD-333 CD-334 FS-83 JK-208
R407 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W R009 1-218-959-11 RES-CHIP 3.3K 5% 1/16W
(CD300) R010 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W
R409 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R011 1-218-959-11 RES-CHIP 3.3K 5% 1/16W
(CD300) R012 1-218-957-11 RES-CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/16W
(CD300)
R014 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W
< THERMISTOR > R015 1-218-963-11 RES-CHIP 6.8K 5% 1/16W
R016 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W
TH301 1-809-361-21 THERMISTOR (2125) R017 1-218-985-11 RES-CHIP 470K 5% 1/16W
**************************************************************
< SWITCH >
A-7074-835-A FS-83 BOARD, COMPLETE
********************* S001 1-786-039-21 SWITCH, TACTILE
(Ref.No.;1000 Series) (FLASH/MACRO/SELF TIMER/EDIT SEARCH)
S002 1-771-138-82 SWITCH, KEY BOARD (MENU)
< CAPACITOR > **************************************************************
C004 1-107-819-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.022uF 10% 16V A-7074-836-A JK-208 BOARD, COMPLETE
**********************
< CONNECTOR > (Ref.No.;2000 Series)
CN001 1-691-349-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (ZIF) 11P BT101 1-756-191-11 BATTERY, LITHIUM (SECONDARY)
* CN002 1-580-056-21 PIN, CONNECTOR (SMD) 3P
* CN003 1-580-056-21 PIN, CONNECTOR (SMD) 3P < CAPACITOR >
CN004 1-785-283-21 PIN, CONNECTOR (PC BOARD) 14P
< DIODE > C104 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W
D002 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0 C108 1-119-750-11 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20% 6.3V
D003 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0
D004 8-719-070-95 DIODE TLGU1008(T05,SOY) < CONNECTOR >
D006 8-719-158-49 DIODE MA8120-TX
D007 8-719-027-76 DIODE 1SS357-TPH3 CN101 1-784-421-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (ZIF) 27P
CN102 1-794-962-11 CONNECTOR, SQUARE TYPE(USB 5P) (USB)
< FUSE >
< DIODE >
0 F001 1-576-406-21 FUSE, MICRO 1.4A 32V (1608)
0 F002 1-576-406-21 FUSE, MICRO 1.4A 32V (1608) D102 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0
D106 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0
0 F006 1-576-406-21 FUSE, MICRO 1.4A 32V (1608)
D108 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0
< FERRITE BEAD > D109 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0
D110 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0
FB001 1-414-228-11 FERRITE 0uH D111 8-719-073-01 DIODE MA111-(K8).S0
FB002 1-414-228-11 FERRITE 0uH D112 8-719-073-01 DIODE MA111-(K8).S0
< LINE FILTER > D113 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0

D114 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0
LF001 1-411-957-11 FILTER, COMMON MODE
< FERRITE BEAD >
< TRANSISTOR >
FB101 1-414-233-22 FERRITE 0uH
Q001 8-729-047-68 TRANSISTOR SSM3K03FE(TPL3) FB102 1-500-284-21 FERRITE 0uH
Q002 8-729-051-49 TRANSISTOR TPC8305(TE12L) FB103 1-500-284-21 FERRITE 0uH
Q003 8-729-804-41 TRANSISTOR 2SB1122-ST-TD FB104 1-500-284-21 FERRITE 0uH
Q004 8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR UN9213J-(K8).SO FB105 1-500-284-21 FERRITE 0uH
< RESISTOR > FB106 1-469-324-21 FERRITE 0uH

FB107 1-500-284-21 FERRITE 0uH
R004 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W FB108 1-500-284-21 FERRITE 0uH
R005 1-218-944-11 RES-CHIP 180 5% 1/16W FB109 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0
R006 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 FB110 1-469-084-21 FERRITE 1MH
R007 1-218-957-11 RES-CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/16W
R008 1-218-985-11 RES-CHIP 470K 5% 1/16W
Note : Note :
6-12
JK-208 MD-083 SY-67
FB111 1-469-084-21 FERRITE 1MH A-7074-899-A MD-083 BOARD, COMPLETE (SERVICE)
FB112 1-469-084-21 FERRITE 1MH *******************************
(Ref.No.;3000 Series)
< IC >
**************************************************************
IC101 8-759-657-69 IC PDIUSBP11APW,118
A-7074-898-A SY-67 (300) BOARD, COMPLETE (SERVICE)
< JACK > (CD300)
**************************************
J101 1-793-995-21 JACK, SUPER SMALL TYPE (ACC) A-7074-900-A SY-67 (200) BOARD, COMPLETE (SERVICE)
J102 1-569-950-31 JACK (SMALL TYPE) (A/V OUT (MONO)) (CD200)
**************************************
< LINE FILTER > (Ref.No.;5000 Series)
LF101 1-419-100-21 INDUCTOR 0uH **************************************************************

LF102 1-419-100-21 INDUCTOR 0uH
< TRANSISTOR > Electrical parts list of the MD-083 and SY-
67 boards are not shown.
Q101 8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR UN9213J-(K8).SO
< RESISTOR >
R103 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W

R104 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W
R105 1-220-168-11 RES-CHIP 24 5% 1/16W
R106 1-220-168-11 RES-CHIP 24 5% 1/16W
R107 1-218-955-11 RES-CHIP 1.5K 5% 1/16W
R108 1-218-983-11 RES-CHIP 330K 5% 1/16W

R109 1-218-985-11 RES-CHIP 470K 5% 1/16W
R110 1-216-849-11 METAL CHIP 220K 5% 1/16W
R111 1-216-821-11 METAL CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W
R112 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W
R113 1-218-935-11 RES-CHIP 33 5% 1/16W

R114 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W
R115 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W
< SWITCH >
S101 1-762-805-21 SWITCH, PUSH (1 KEY) (OPEN/CLOSE)

S103 1-762-805-21 SWITCH, PUSH (1 KEY) (OPEN/CLOSE)
**************************************************************
6-13
PK-58
A-7074-838-A PK-58 (SH) BOARD, COMPLETE < DIODE >
**************************
(Ref.No.;4000 Series) D202 8-719-073-01 DIODE MA111-(K8).S0
D301 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0
< CAPACITOR > D302 8-719-070-91 DIODE TLSU1008(T05,SOY)
D303 8-719-016-74 DIODE 1SS352-TPH3
C201 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V D304 8-719-070-93 DIODE TLAU1008(T05,SOY)
C202 1-119-751-11 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20% 16V
C203 1-165-128-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.22uF 16V D401 8-719-084-47 DIODE 1SV290(TPL3)
C204 1-135-149-21 TANTALUM CHIP 2.2uF 20% 10V D402 8-719-976-96 DIODE MA8047-H-TX
C205 1-164-505-11 CERAMIC CHIP 2.2uF 16V
< FERRITE BEAD >
C206 1-164-856-81 CERAMIC CHIP 18PF 5% 16V
C209 1-164-860-11 CERAMIC CHIP 27PF 5% 16V FB303 1-414-234-22 FERRITE 0uH
C211 1-113-682-11 TANTAL. CHIP 33uF 20% 10V
< IC >
C212 1-115-156-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10V
C213 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V IC201 8-759-521-35 IC TL5001CDR
C214 1-164-657-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.015uF 10% 50V IC202 8-759-710-82 IC NJM2406F-TE2
C215 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V IC301 8-759-364-05 IC MB40D001PFV-G-BND-ER
0 C216 1-131-959-91 CERAMIC CHIP 12PF 10% 3KV IC302 8-759-539-27 IC IR3Y37A4
IC401 8-759-587-61 IC LZ9GH234
C302 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V IC402 8-759-327-01 IC NJM062V(TE2)
C304 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V < COIL >
L201 1-414-753-91 INDUCTOR 4.7uH
C306 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V L202 1-424-674-11 INDUCTOR 22uH
C307 1-110-569-11 TANTAL. CHIP 47uF 20% 6.3V L203 1-419-387-21 INDUCTOR 100uH
L401 1-469-525-91 INDUCTOR 10uH
C311 1-104-851-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 10V L402 1-469-525-91 INDUCTOR 10uH
C312 1-104-851-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 10V L403 1-469-525-91 INDUCTOR 10uH
C313 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V L405 1-412-949-21 INDUCTOR 6.8uH
C314 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 6.3V
C315 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 6.3V < TRANSISTOR >
C316 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 6.3V Q201 8-729-042-72 TRANSISTOR UN9214J-(K8).SO
C402 1-113-986-11 TANTAL. CHIP 2.2uF 20% 25V Q202 8-729-042-59 TRANSISTOR UN9112J-(K8).SO
C403 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V Q203 8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR UN9213J-(K8).SO
C404 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V Q204 8-729-037-52 TRANSISTOR 2SD2216J-QR(K8).SO
C405 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V Q205 8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR UN9213J-(K8).SO
C406 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V Q206 8-729-823-84 TRANSISTOR FP102-TL
C407 1-164-937-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.001uF 10% 16V Q207 8-729-053-52 TRANSISTOR HN1C01FE-Y/GR(TPLR3)
C408 1-164-872-11 CERAMIC CHIP 82PF 5% 16V Q208 8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR UN9213J-(K8).SO
C409 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V Q209 8-729-039-43 TRANSISTOR FP216-TL
C413 1-109-982-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 10V Q401 8-729-037-52 TRANSISTOR 2SD2216J-QR(K8).SO
C414 1-113-994-11 TANTAL. CHIP 6.8uF 20% 16V Q402 8-729-042-26 TRANSISTOR 2SB1462J-QR(K8).SO
C415 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V Q403 8-729-037-52 TRANSISTOR 2SD2216J-QR(K8).SO
C416 1-164-346-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 16V Q404 8-729-042-26 TRANSISTOR 2SB1462J-QR(K8).SO
C417 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V < RESISTOR >
C418 1-164-346-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 6V
R203 1-208-703-11 METAL CHIP 6.8K 0.5% 1/16W
< CONNECTOR > R204 1-218-970-11 METAL CHIP 27K 0.5% 1/16W
R205 1-218-978-11 METAL CHIP 120K 0.5% 1/16W
CN201 1-764-709-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (LIF) 10P R206 1-218-950-11 RES-CHIP 560 5% 1/16W
CN301 1-770-742-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 32P R207 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W
CN302 1-766-348-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 18P
* CN401 1-774-261-11 CONNECTOR, FFC (ZIF) 24P
Note : Note :
6-25
PK-58 TK-61
R209 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W R437 1-208-719-11 METAL CHIP 33K 0.5% 1/16W
R210 1-208-707-11 METAL CHIP 10K 0.5% 1/16W R438 1-208-715-11 METAL CHIP 22K 0.5% 1/16W
R211 1-208-689-11 METAL CHIP 1.8K 0.5% 1/16W R440 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0
R212 1-208-695-11 METAL CHIP 3.3K 0.5% 1/16W R442 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0
R213 1-218-955-11 RES-CHIP 1.5K 5% 1/16W R444 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0

R215 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R446 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0
R217 1-216-055-00 METAL CHIP 1.8K 5% 1/10W R448 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0
R218 1-216-055-00 METAL CHIP 1.8K 5% 1/10W R449 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0


R304 1-218-957-11 RES-CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/16W R467 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W
R306 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W
R307 1-218-949-11 RES-CHIP 470 5% 1/16W < SWITCH >
R308 1-218-959-11 RES-CHIP 3.3K 5% 1/16W S301 1-771-138-82 SWITCH, KEY BOARD (DISPLAY)
R309 1-218-963-11 RES-CHIP 6.8K 5% 1/16W S303 1-771-138-82 SWITCH, KEY BOARD (AE LOCK)
R310 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 S304 1-771-138-82 SWITCH, KEY BOARD (SPOT METER)
R311 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W S305 1-692-088-11 SWITCH, TACTILE (RESET)
R312 1-218-966-11 RES-CHIP 12K 5% 1/16W S306 1-771-138-82 SWITCH, KEY BOARD (EXPOSURE)
R313 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W S307 1-771-138-82 SWITCH, KEY BOARD (FOCUS)
R316 1-218-967-11 RES-CHIP 15K 5% 1/16W
R317 1-218-971-11 RES-CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W < TRANSFORMER >
R318 1-218-966-11 RES-CHIP 12K 5% 1/16W
R319 1-218-972-11 RES-CHIP 39K 5% 1/16W 0 T201 1-435-227-11 TRANSFORMER, INVERTER
**************************************************************
R320 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W
R321 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W A-7074-837-A TK-61 BOARD, COMPLETE (CD300)
R322 1-218-985-11 RES-CHIP 470K 5% 1/16W *****************************
R323 1-218-985-11 RES-CHIP 470K 5% 1/16W A-7074-907-A TK-61 (200) BOARD, COMPLETE (CD200)
R403 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 *********************************
(Ref.No.;6000 Series)
R404 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W
R405 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W < CONNECTOR >
R408 1-218-987-11 RES-CHIP 680K 5% 1/16W
R409 1-218-978-11 RES-CHIP 120K 5% 1/16W CN501 1-766-335-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 5P
R410 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W CN503 1-766-335-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 5P
R411 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W < TRANSISTOR >

R412 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W
R414 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W Q501 8-729-427-72 TRANSISTOR HN1C01FU-TE85R
R415 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W
R416 1-218-975-11 RES-CHIP 68K 5% 1/16W < RESISTOR >
R419 1-208-931-11 METAL CHIP 68K 0.5% 1/16W R504 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0
R420 1-208-719-11 METAL CHIP 33K 0.5% 1/16W R506 1-218-940-11 RES-CHIP 82 5% 1/16W
R421 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W R507 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W
R422 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W R508 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W
R426 1-218-971-11 RES-CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W R510 1-218-942-11 RES-CHIP 120 5% 1/16W
R427 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R511 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0
R429 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W

R432 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W
R433 1-218-971-11 RES-CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W
Note : Note :
R434 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0
R435 1-208-719-11 METAL CHIP 33K 0.5% 1/16W mark 0 or dotted line with mark une marque 0 sont critiques
6-26
TK-61
< SWITCH > 3-067-952-11 MANUAL,INSTRUCTION (DIRECT CD)
(ENGLISH) (CD200:US,CND,AEP,UK,AUS,CN,E,JE,HK/
S502 1-771-331-81 SWITCH, PUSH (1 KEY) (LENS CAP DETECT) CD300:US,CND,AEP,UK,AUS,CN,E,JE,HK)
(CD300) 3-067-952-21 MANUAL,INSTRUCTION (DIRECT CD)
************************************************************** (FRENCH/GERMAN)
(CD200:CND,AEP,JE/CD300:CND,AEP,JE)
ACCESSORIES 3-067-952-31 MANUAL,INSTRUCTION (DIRECT CD)
*********** (SPANISH/PORTUGUESE)
(CD200:AEP,E,JE/CD300:AEP,E,JE)
0 1-475-599-11 ADAPTOR, AC (L10A) 3-067-952-41 MANUAL,INSTRUCTION (DIRECT CD)
(CD200:US,CND,AEP,UK,AUS,JE,HK,J,E/ (ITALIAN/DUTCH) (CD200:AEP/CD300:AEP)
CD300:US,CND,AEP,UK,AUS,JE,HK,J,E) 3-067-952-51 MANUAL,INSTRUCTION (DIRECT CD)
0 1-475-599-71 ADAPTOR, AC (L10A) (CD200:KR/CD300:KR) (TRADITIONAL CHINESE/SIMPLIFIED CHINESE)
0 1-475-599-81 ADAPTOR, AC (L10B) (CD200:CN/CD300:CN) (CD200:CN,E,JE,HK/CD300:CN,E,JE,HK)
1-543-798-11 FILTER, CLAMP (FERRITE CORE)
0 1-569-007-11 ADAPTOR, CONVERSION 2P 3-067-952-61 MANUAL,INSTRUCTION (DIRECT CD)
(CD200:JE/CD300:JE) (SWEDISH) (CD200:AEP/CD300:AEP)
3-067-952-71 MANUAL,INSTRUCTION (DIRECT CD)(ARABIC)
0 1-569-008-21 ADAPTOR, CONVERSION 2P (CD200:E/CD300:E)
(CD200:E,HK/CD300:E,HK) 3-067-952-81 MANUAL,INSTRUCTION (DIRECT CD)(KOREAN)
0 1-696-819-11 CORD, POWER (CD200:AUS/CD300:AUS) (CD200:JE,KR/CD300:JE,KR)
1-757-293-31 CORD, CONNECTION (USB 5P) 3-069-219-01 SPVD-006 (CD-ROM) (DIRECT CD)
0 1-769-608-11 CORD, POWER (CD200:AEP,E/CD300:AEP,E) 3-987-015-01 BELT (S), SHOULDER
0 1-776-985-11 CORD, POWER (CD200:KR/CD300:KR)
X-3951-672-1 CAP ASSY, LENS (CD300)
0 1-782-476-11 CORD, POWER (CD200:CN/CD300:CN) X-3951-763-1 CAP ASSY, LENS (CD200)
0 1-783-374-11 CORD, POWER (CD200:UK,HK/CD300:UK,HK) NP-FM50 BATTERY PACK (NOT SUPPLIED)
1-783-738-31 CORD, CONNECTION (AV CABLE)(1.5m)
0 1-790-073-11 CORD, POWER 2P (CD200:JE,J/CD300:JE,J)
0 1-790-107-22 CORD, POWER
(CD200:US,CND/CD300:US,CND)
3-062-875-01 INSTRUCTION (FOR SAFETY)

(CD200:J/CD300:J)
3-063-085-01 ADAPTOR, D (8cm CD)
3-066-676-01 SPVD-004 (P)(CD-ROM)(USB DRIVER)
(CD200:AEP,UK,AUS,CN,E,JE,HK,KR/
CD300:AEP,UK,AUS,CN,E,JE,HK,KR)
3-066-677-01 SPVD-004 (I)(CD-ROM)(USB DRIVER)
(CD200:US,CND,J/CD300:US,CND,J)
3-067-797-01 STRING (T), CAP (CD300)
3-067-951-01 MANUAL,INSTRUCTION (JAPANESE)

(CD200:J/CD300:J)
3-067-951-11 MANUAL,INSTRUCTION (ENGLISH)
(CD200:US,CND,AEP,UK,AUS,CN,E,JE,HK/
CD300:US,CND,AEP,UK,AUS,CN,E,JE,HK)
3-067-951-21 MANUAL,INSTRUCTION (FRENCH/GERMAN)
(CD200:CND,AEP,JE/CD300:CND,AEP,JE)
3-067-951-31 MANUAL,INSTRUCTION
(SPANISH/PORTUGUESE)
(CD200:AEP,E,JE/CD300:AEP,E,JE)
3-067-951-41 MANUAL,INSTRUCTION (ITALIAN/DUTCH)
(CD200:AEP/CD300:AEP)
3-067-951-51 MANUAL,INSTRUCTION
(TRADITIONAL CHINESE/SIMPLIFIED CHINESE)
(CD200:CN,E,JE,HK/CD300:CN,E,JE,HK)
3-067-951-61 MANUAL,INSTRUCTION (SWEDISH)
(CD200:AEP/CD300:AEP)
3-067-951-71 MANUAL,INSTRUCTION (ARABIC)
(CD200:E/CD300:E)
3-067-951-81 MANUAL,INSTRUCTION (KOREAN)
(CD200:JE,KR/CD300:JE,KR)
3-067-952-01 MANUAL,INSTRUCTION (DIRECT CD)
(JAPANESE) (CD200:J/CD300:J)
Note : Note :
6-27E
〈LED ILLUMINATION AXIS FRAME〉
MVC-CD200
MVC-CD300
Take a copy of LED ILLUMINATION

✂
AXIS FRAME with a clear sheet for use.
— 160 —
〈FOR CAMERA COLOR REPRODUCTION ADJUSTMENT〉
For NTSC mode
Take a copy of CAMERA COLOR

REPRODUCTION FRAME with
a clear sheet for use.
MVC-CD200/CD300
✂
— 161 —
MVC-CD200/CD300
Sony EMCS Co. Kohda TEC 2001E1600-1

9-929-900-31 ©2001.5
— 162 — Published by PV Customer Center
Reverse 992990031.pdf
Revision History
S.M. Rev.
Ver. Date History Contents
issued
1.0 2001.05 Official Release — —

Service Manual: MVC-CD200/CD300

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manual: MVC-CD200/CD300

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manual: MVC-CD200/CD300

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MVC-CD200/CD300

SERVICE MANUAL US Model

SAFETY-RELATED COMPONENT WARNING!! ATTENTION AU COMPOSANT AYANT RAPPORT

After correcting the original service problem, perform the following

• NOTE FOR REPAIR

When installing a connector, don't press down at wire of connector.

Cut and remove the part of gilt

[Discharging of the FLASH unit’s charging capacitor]

The charging capacitor of the FLASH unit is charged up to the

Preparing the Short Jig Discharging the Capacitor

Wrap insulating tape.

Display Code Countermeasure Cause Caution Display During Error

Note: The error code is cleared if the battery is removed.

Introduction Identifying the parts

Preparing the power supply

Note on the /CHG lamp during charging

Still image recording/playback

1 Open the DC IN cover and connect the AC power adaptor to the DC

Using a car battery

Using your camera abroad

When using the AC power adaptor

item. If you selected [D/M/Y] in step 3, set the 2001 / 7 / 1 12 : 00 O K

1 6 Select [OK] with B on the control button,

To cancel the date and time setting

1 Set the mode dial to , S, A, M, , SCN, or .

2 Push the POWER switch in the arrow direction to turn on the

3 Select the desired date display format with

4 Select the year, month, day, hour or minute

Inserting a disc Removing the disc

2 Place a disc with the printed side up.

3 Close the disc cover.

Initializing a disc (INITIALIZE) What is initialization?

1 Set the mode dial to , S, A, M, SCN, or .

INITIALIZE INITIALIZE INITIALIZE

READY TO INITIALIZE INITIALIZE IN PROGRESS INITIALIZE COMPLETE

To cancel the initialization

To initialize after canceling the initialization

Recording still images 3 Press the shutter button fully down.

For the number of images you can record on a disc

center z. 3. Select [OK] with v, then press the center z.

If you cannot get a sharp focus on a close subject

6, 7 1, 5 7 Press the shutter button fully down again to stop recording.

Adjusting the brightness of the LCD screen, zooming or using the

3 Select [MOVING IMAGE] with v/V on the

4 Select [MPEG MOVIE] with v/V on the

Playing back still images Playing back moving images

ACCESS lamp ACCESS lamp

1 Set the mode dial to . 1 Set the mode dial to .

2 Select the desired still image with b/B on

Note 3 Press the center z on the control button to 120min

To advance or rewind the moving image

Executing the finalization

2 Select [ ] (DISC TOOL) with v/V on the

If the tabs protrude, press them back down

4 Select [OK] with v on the control button,

1 Set the mode dial to the , S, A, M, SCN, or <<Recommended Windows environment>>

C Viewing images with a CD-R/CD-RW drive (page 41)